Service Sharp MX-M266N

1

: ‘15/Aug.

2

: ‘16/Jun.

SERVICE MA NUAL CODE: 00ZMXM316/S3E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MX-M356N/M356U

1

MX-M266N/M316N/M265N/M315N MX-M265U/M315U MX-M266N A/M316N A/M365N A 2 MODEL MX-M265NE/M315NE CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [1]

PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2]

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3]

CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4]

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5]

ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6]

SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7]

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8]

FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9]

MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 [11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [13] OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

SHARP CORPORATION

This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[6]

1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

[1]

4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 [7]

1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

8. Relation between model names and names in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . .7-24

PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 5. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 6. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 7. Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

[3]

CONSUMABL E PARTS 1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 5. Environmental conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

[4]

4. Dial tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 [8]

FIRMWARE UPDATE 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

[9]

MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 2. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 3. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . .9-4

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. Disassembly and Assembly table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 [11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. RSPF section (31opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 3. RSPF section (56opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 4. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 5. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 6. Paper registration section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 3. Automatic document feeder and document glass . . . . 4-3 4. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 7. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 8. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 9. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 10. Drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 11. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 12. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 13. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 14. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

[5]

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit . . . iii

2. Option list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 [2]

SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

ADJU STMENTS AND SETTINGS 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

7. Paper feed tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 8. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16 9. Duplex section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 10. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18 11. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 12. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21 13. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23 14. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25 15. Fan and Filter section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27 [12] ELECTRICAL SEC TION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9 [13] OTHERS 1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9 4. SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 5. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12 6. TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16

MX-M316N

NOTE FOR SERVICING

It may causeManual an explosion, a fire or an electric shock. Service * Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.

* About a main uni t illustration, it may diffe r from a target mod el.

1.

Precautio ns for servi cing

Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forcibly bend, or pull the power cord. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

* When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the prin ter cable, the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except when performing the communication test, etc. It may cause an injury or an electri c shock. * There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme care when servicing. It may cause a burn. * There is a high volt age section inside the machine which may cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. * Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. * When servicing with the mac hine operating, be careful not to squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other driving sections. * Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. * When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.

* Keep the power cable away from a heat source. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. * Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the machine. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. * Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily hands. It may cause an electric shock.

3.

Note for i ns tall in g si te

Do not install the machine at the following sites. * Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low hum idit y, place under an e xtreme change in temperature and humidity. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications described later.

* The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing. * Do not throw toner or a toner cart ridge in a fire. Othe rwise, toner may ignite and burn you. * When replacing a lithi um battery on a PWB, only use the spe cified replacement battery. If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a machine malfunction or breakdown.

* Place of extreme vibrations It may cause a breakdown.

* When PWB or elect ronic parts installed to it, be surecarrying to put itainunit an with anti-static-electricity bag. It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction. CAUTION DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING (200V series only)

2.

Warn in g fo r se rv ici ng

* Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power out let that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock. It may cause a fire or an electric shock. * If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abn ormal smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.

* Poorly ventilated place An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a well ventilated place.

It may cause a fire or an electric shock. * Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result. To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, grounding must be made. * When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the following points. - Gas tube - Lightning conductor - A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a grounding object by the authorities. - Grounding wire for telephone line

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4.

* Place of direct sunligh t. Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo qualitative change. It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.

Note for ha ndling PWB and electronic parts

When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent against damage by static electricity. * When in transit or storing , put the parts in an anti-s tatic bag or an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

* Place which is full of organic gase s such as ammonium The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammonium. Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue print machine may result in poor quality output. * When and after removing the parts from an anti- static bag (case), use an earth band as shown below: * Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.

* Place of much dust When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a breakdown or poor quality output.

* Place near a wall The machine will require ventilation. If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may result. * When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the procedure on an anti-static mat.

11-13/16" (30cm)

11-13/16" (30cm)

17-23/32" (45cm)

* Unstable or irregular surface If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or machine malfunction. Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk. When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock the casters.

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

1

5.

: ‘15/Aug.

Note for re pairing/ repla cing th e LSU

When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.

Screw kinds and tightening torques Normal screws, set screws (including step screws) Tightening torque (N m)

Tightening torque (kgf cm )

Tightening torque (lbft)

* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sur e to disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.

Screw diameter

Material to be fixed

* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the pr ocedures described in this Service Manual.

M2.6

Steelplate

0.8-1.0

8-10

0.6-0.7

M3

Steelplate

1.0-1.2

10-12

0.7-0.9

* When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation check.

M4

Steelplate

1.6-1.8

16-18

1.2-1.3

* Do not modify the LSU. * When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.

Tapping screws (for iron) Tightening torque (lbft)

M3

Steelplate (Plate thickness 0.8mm or above)

1.0-1.2

10-12

0.7-0.9

Steelplate

1.6-1.8

16-18

1.2-1.3

M4

Note for ha ndl ing th e drum un it, the developing unit

M3

When handling the OPC drum unit, and the developing unit, strictly observe the following items.

M4

If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the copy and print image quality. Drum unit

Tightening torque (kgf cm)


If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones safety may be at risk.

6.

Tightening torque (N m)

Screw diameter

(Plate thickness 0.8mm or above) Steelplate (Plate thickness less than 0.8mm) Steelplate (Plate thickness less than 0.8mm)

0.6-0.8

6-8

1.2-1.4

0.4-0.6

12-14

0.9-1.0

Tapping screw (for plastic)

* Avoid working at a place with strong lights. * Do not expose the OPC drum to light s including interior lights for a long time. * When the OPC drum is rem oved from the machine, cover it with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to cover it.)

Tightening torque (N m)

Tightening torque (kgf cm)

Screw diameter


M3

Plasticresin

0.6-0.8

6-8

M4

Plasticresin

1.0-1.2

10-12

Tightening torque (lbft) 0.4-0.6 0.7-0.9

* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the OPC drum surface. Developing unit

8.

* Be careful not to leave fin gerprints, oil, grease, or other forei gn material on the developing unit.

Relation be tween mode l na mes an d names in the manual

Fusing unit * Be careful not to "lea ve" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreig n material on the fusing roller.

Modelname MX-M266N/MX-M265N/MX-M265U MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U

Nameinthemanual 26cpm machine 31cpm machine

If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the copy and print image quality.

MX-M356N/MX-M356U

35cpmmachine

7.

Scr ew ti gh teni ng t or qu e

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three types. These types are classified according to the shape of the screw grooves and use positions. The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening torques depending on the use position. When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the table. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than specified on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such an exception. CAUTION: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid loosening.

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

2

: ‘16/Jun.

MX-M316N

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

Service Manual

1. Syst em con fig ura tio n A. N mo del 1 2 MX-TR18

MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M356N MX-M316N /M266N A/M356N A MX-M315NE

MX-M265N/M265NE

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM


JOB SEPARATOR

MX-TR17 EXIT TRAY UNIT

MX-FN26 FINISHER

MX-CS12 500 SHEET PAPER TRAY


MX-CS12

AR-DS19

500 SHEET PAPER TRAY

HIGH STAND

AR-DS20 LOW STAND

MX-PK11

MX-PF10

MX-FX11

MX-FWX1

PS3 EXPANSION KIT

BARCODE FONT KIT

FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT

INTERNET FAX EXPANSION STAMP UNIT KIT

AR-SU1

MX-FR48U DATA SECURITY KIT

MX-M316N/M266N/M315N /M265N

MX-USX1

MX-USX5

MX-US10

MX-US50

MX-USA0

MX-AMX1

SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT





APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE

MX-AMX2

MX-AMX3

MX-HD14

MX-EB13

MX-FR50U

MX-HD15

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE

HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT

USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER

DATA SECURITY KIT


MX-M316N/M266N/M315N /M265N

MX-M356N

MX-M356N

MX-M315NE/M265NE

MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/

MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/

M265N/MX-M316N/M266N A/

M265N/MX-M316N/M266N A/

M356N A/M315NE/M265NE

M356N A

MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

2

: ‘16/Jun.

B. U model 1 2

MX-TR18 JOB SEPARATOR

MX-RP19

MX-VR12

MX-RP20

REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER

DOCUMENT COVER


MX-M315U

MX-M265U

MX-M356U




MX-TR17

EXIT TRAY UNIT

MX-FN26 FINISHER



MX-CS12

AR-DS19

500 SHEET PAPER TRAY

HIGH STAND

AR-DS20 LOW STAND

MX-PB16

MX-PK11

MX-PF10

MX-NSX1

MX-FX11

MX-FWX1

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT

PS3 EXPANSION KIT

BARCODE FONT KIT

NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT

FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT

INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT

AR-SU1

MX-FR48U

MX-USX1

MX-USX5

MX-US10

MX-US50

STAMP UNIT

DATA SECURITY KIT





MX-USA0

MX-AMX1

MX-AMX2

MX-AMX3

MX-HD14

MX-EB13


APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE


USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER

MX-FR50U

MX-HD15

DATA SECURITY KIT


MX-M356U/M315U/M265U

MX-M356U/M315U/M265U

MX-M315U/M265U

MX-M315U/M265U


1

: ‘15/Aug.

2

: ‘16/Jun.

2. Option list N model Model name

1 Document feeder

Name

U model MXM265N

MXM315N

MXM356U

MXM265U

MXM315U

STD

STD

STD

—

—

OPT

—

—

MX-RP19


—

—

—

STD

STD

—

OPT

OPT

MX-VR12

DOCUMENT COVER

— 2nd Drawer 4th Drawer 3rd Drawer

500-SHEET PAPER TRAY

MX-CS13 Stand

AR-DS20 AR-DS19

LOW STAND HIGH STAND

Paper Exit Device

MX-TR17*1 MX-TR18*2

EXIT TRAYUNIT JOBSEPARATOR

MX-FN26*3

FINISHER

MX-PB16

PRINTEREXPANSIONKIT

—

—

—

—

OPT

OPT

OPT

STD

STD

STD

OPT

STD

STD

OPT

STD

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT OPT OPT STD

OPT OPT OPT STD

OPT OPT

OPT OPT

OPT STD

OPT STD

OPT OPT OPT STD

OPT OPT OPT OPT

OPT OPT OPT OPT

OPT OPT OPT OPT

MX-PK11

PS3EXPANSIONKIT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT*4

OPT*4

OPT*4

MX-PF10

BARCODEFONTKIT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT*4

OPT*4

OPT*4

MX-NSX1

NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT

MX-FX11

FACSIMILEEXPANSIONKIT

OPT

MX-FWX1

INTERNETFAXEXPANSIONKIT

OPT*5

STD

AR-SU1

STAMP UNIT

Authentication /Security

MX-FR48U MX-FR50U

DATASECURITYKIT DATASECURITYKIT

Application

MX-USX1


OPT — OPT OPT

STD OPT OPT*5 OPT OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT

STD

STD

OPT OPT*5

OPT OPT*5

OPT OPT*7 OPT*7

OPT OPT*7 OPT*7

OPT

OPT

STD

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT

OPT — OPT OPT

OPT OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT

OPT OPT*7 OPT*7

SHARPDESK5LICENSEKIT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

MX-US10


OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

MX-US50


OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

MX-USA0

SHARPDESK100LICENSEKIT APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-HD14

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE HARDDISKEXPANSIONKIT

MX-HD15

HARDDISKEXPANSIONKIT

MX-EB13*6

USBWIRELESSLANADAPTER

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

OPT*5

—

OPT*8

OPT*8

OPT*8

OPT*8

OPT

OPT*9

OPT*9

OPT*9

OPT*9

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

OPT

—: Connection not allowed STD: Equipped as standard OPT: Installable option *1: Need Inner Finisher (Cannot install together with Job Separator). *2: Cannot install together with Paper Exit Tray Unit/Inner Finisher. *3: Cannot install together with Job Separator. *4: Need MX-PB16. *5: Need HDD. *6: Available for limited destination.

2

*7: This model will be integrated to FR50U from April, 2016.

2

*8: Middle East only. (This is only for the limited models. Regarding the details of this machine, refer to SMEF.

2

All models except the above models have been discontinued since December, 2015. *9: All destinations except Middle east


OPT*5

OPT*5

2

OPT

MX-USX5

MX-AMX1

Other

MXM266N


MX-CS12

Image Send

MXM316N

MX-RP20

Paper Feeder

Printer

MXM356N

OPT*5

—

OPT*8

OPT*8

2

OPT

OPT*9

OPT*9

OPT

OPT

2

OPT

1

: ‘15/Aug.

MX-M316N

[2] SPECIFICATIONS

D. Engine Manual resolutio n Service Resolution

1. Basic specif ica tion s A. Eng in e Spec if ic ati on Photoconductor

OPC(Diameter: 30mm)

Gradation * (256 levels)

Recording

Electronicphoto(Laser)

Development Charging

Dry-typedual-componentmagnetic brush development Chargedsaw-toothmethod

Transfer

Transferroller

Separation

Separationclawmethod

Cleaning Fusing

Counterblade Heat roller

Waste toner disposal

Toner cartridge collection

Toner supply d uring o peration

N/A

Outercolor

Pastelwhite(Naturalwavepattern)

B. Eng ine spe ed (ppm)

Writing 600 x 600dpi Writing 600 x 600dpi 1,200 x 600dpi (PCL/PS) Writing 600 x 600dpi x 1bit

Copy Print

Writing Sharp Advanced Printing Language: 600 x 600dpi x 1bit PCL: 600 x 600dpi x 1bit 1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit PS: 600 x 600dpi x 1bit 1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit

*: The dither and error diffusion methods using 8bit input will be performed.

E. Scanne r section

Tray 1 - 4 26cpm machine

31cpm machine

35cpm machine

A3

15

17

20

11x17 8K

14 16

17 19

19 21

1

Copy Print

Paper size

B4,8.5x13,8.5x13.5,8.5x13.4,8.5x14

16

20

(1)

Resoluti on/ Gradation

Scanning Resolution (dpi)

Platen

RSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 400dpi (default) White LED

22

Monochrome 600 x 600dpi 600 x 400dpi 600 x 300dpi (default)

A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R

26

31

35

A4R, 8.5x11R, 16KR

18

24

27

Exposure lamp

B5R

21

24

30

Reading gr adation

10bit

Output gradation

BW: 1bit Grayscale: 8bit Full Color: each color RGB 8bit

Manual paper feed 26cpm machine

31cpm machine

35cpm machine

A3

14

17

18

11x17

14

16

17

Type

19

Scanning area

297 x 432mm

Original standard position Detection Detection size

Left rear reference

Dehumidifying heater (Scanner section)

Supplied as a service parts

1

Paper size

8K

15

B4,8.5x14

16

8.5x13 8.5x13.5,8.5x13.4

18 19

20

17 16

20 19

22 21

A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R, A5, 5.5x8.5

23

27

29

A4R, 8.5x11R, 7.25x10.5R 16KR

19 19

22 22

24 25

B5R

21

24

26

Extra

14

16

17

Custom

14

16

17

(2)

Doc ument table

C. Pri nta ble a rea A3 Wide A3

N/A 293 x 413mm

16K 12 x 18

B4

253x357mm

A4

206 x 290mm

B5

178x250mm

8.5"x13"

A5 Postcard

144 x 203mm 92x140mm

Executive 8.5"x11"

266x383mm

5.5"x8.5"

8K

11"x17"

191 x 263mm N/A 275x425mm

8.5" x 14"

212 x 349mm 212x323mm 180 x 260mm 212x272mm 136x209mm

8.5x13.5

212x336mm

Custom

Min.: 96mm x 141mm; Max.: 297mm x 432mm

8.5"x13.4"

212x333mm

Max. range

AB: 416x293mm (600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot) Inch: 428x275mm (600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)

Void Area

Top 1 to 4mm Bottom 1 to 5mm Front/Rear Total 6mm or less Top 4mm orless Front/Rear Total 6mm or less

Image Loss Image missing width

Top 4mm or less, Bottom 4mm or less, Front/Rear Total 6mm or less

MX-M316N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1

Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

Yes Automatic detection (Detection types can b e changed in the system settings)

1

: ‘15/Aug.

F. Docume nt feeder 1

Model

MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M356N / MX-M356U

Type

RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

Scan speed

Monochrome (A4/8.5" x 11")

Copy

Single: 56-sheet/min. (600 x 400dpi, 38-sheet/min. (600 x 600dpi, Double: 20-page/min. (600 x 400dpi, 17-page/min. (600 x 600dpi,

FAX

Internet FAX

Scanner

Original setup direction Original standard position

Color (A4/8.5" x 11") NA 4bit) 4bit)

4bit) 4bit)

Single:56-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 20-page/min.

NA

(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Single: 56-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)

NA

Single:5 6-sheet/min. Single: 56-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)

MX-M315N / MX-M265N / MX-M315U / MX-M265U Monochrome (A4/8.5" x 11") Single: 31-sheet/min. (600 x 400dpi, 25-sheet/min. (600 x 600dpi, Double: 16-page/min. (600 x 400dpi, 13-page/min. (600 x 600dpi,

Color (A4/8.5" x 11") NA 4bit) 4bit)

4bit) 4bit)

Single:31-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 16-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Single:31-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 16-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Single: 31-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 16-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)

NA

NA

Single: 31-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Double: 16-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)

Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)

Original transport method

Sheet-through method

Paper detection size

Inch-1 Inch-2

11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4

Inch-3

11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4

AB-1 AB-2

11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5

AB-3

11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR

AB-4 AB-5

11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5

Long paper

1000 mm (Monochrome binary only) Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.

Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper)

Enabled

Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)

Enabled Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B 5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided scanning is disabled during random feeding.

Original co py wei ght

Single: Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2) Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2) * Thin pa per mod e (41 pag es/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 27 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper. Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)

Max. loading capacity of documents

Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less

Un-acceptable srcinals for feeding.

Transparency, second srcinal paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakag e, pasted paper, cutout document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch

Detection

unit is allowed.) Yes

Paper feeding direction Finish stamp

Option

Reliability

Single: Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2) Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2) * Thin paper mo de (27 pag es/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 18 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper. Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)

Right hand feeding

MCBJ/MCBF: Same as the main unit

Life

Sameasthemainunit

Power Source

Provided from the main unit


1

: ‘15/Aug.

G. Paper fe ed section (1) 1

Basic sp ecif ica tio ns

MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M315N / MX-M315U / MX-M356N / MX-M356U Type

Standard Full option

Dehumidifying heater

2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray N/A

MX-M265N / MX-M265U Type

Standard

1-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray

Full option

4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray

Dehumidifying heater

N/A

Tray Paper capacity

Tray 1

Standard paper (80g/ m2 )

Multi Bypass Tray

Tray 2

500 sheets

500 sheets

100 sheets

Paper size

Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.

Papersizedetection

No (Guide adjustment and size input)

Paper type setting Changing of paper size

Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”. Switched by the user Switched by the user (Guide adjustment)

Universal handle

Yes

Default Inchsystem paper size AB system setting Detection of remaining paper

8.5"x11" A4

-

N/A (Only paper availability is detected)

Papersizedisplaywindow

(2)

Yes

Yes

-

Extra paper ca pacity Paper type

Envelope Transparency

Paperfeed tray NA NA

Manualfeed tray ABsystem:10sheets Inch system: 5 sheets 40 sheets

Heavypaper

NA

30sheets(Max.200g/m

Tabpaper Others

NA NA

30sheets(Target) sheet 1

2)


(3)

Size of paper which ca n be fed Paper Feeding Section Standard Tray Tray 1

Paper Size

12 18 x(A3W)

305x457

11" 17"(Ledger) x 8.5" 14" x(Legal) 8.5"x13.5"(AsianLegal)

-

MX-CS13

-

-

-

Yes Yes

-

Yes Yes

216x343

Yes*

5

Yes*5

Yes*5

Yes*5

Yes* Yes

5

Yes*5

Yes*5

Yes*5

Yes

Yes

Yes

216x279

Yes

Yes

184x266

-

216x140

Yes*5 Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes*5

Yes

Yes -

-

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

140x216 297x420

Yes Yes

Yes

297x216

Bypass Tray

Tray 4 MX-CS12

Yes Yes

8.5" 11"R(Letter-R) x

5.5" 8.5"R(Incoice-R) x A3

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

B4 A4

257x364 297x210

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

A4R

210x297

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

B5

257x182

Yes

-Y

Yes

es

Yes

182x257

A5

210x148

-

-

-

-

Yes

A5R

148x210

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

B5R

B6R

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

- Yes

8K

270x390

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

16K

270x195

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

16KR A6R

195x270

Yes -

Yes -

Yes -

Yes -

Yes Yes

Envelope*1

Envelope*1

-

-

-

-

Custom*2

Custom*2

-

-

-

-

Thinpaper

13-16lbbond(56-59g/m

Plainpaper

2)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Color paper

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Letter head

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

16-28lbbond(60-105g/m Recycled paper

Heavy paper

Yes

Yes

2)

Pre-printed Pre-punched

Yes Yes

28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m

Yes Yes

2)*6 -

-

2) 110 lb index - 140 lb index (201 - 256g/m

-

Yes Yes -

-

Envelope Transparency

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes Yes -

-

Yes -

Yes -

Yes Yes -

Yes

Label*3

-

-

-

-

Yes

Tab paper*4

-

-

-

-

Yes

User settings 1-7

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1: Supported envelop types: Monarch/Com-10/DL/C5/Custom * Custom envelope size is configurable by Sim setting (default: hidden) *2: Custom siz e AB sys tem (m m) Min. Max. Bypass tray

MX-CS12

8.5" 11"(Letter) x

5.5"x8.5"(Incoice-R)

PaperType

Tray 3

297x432 216x356

8.5"x13.4"(MexicanLegal) 216x340 8.5" 13" x (Foolscap) 216x330

7.25x10.5R(Exective-R)

Optional Tray

Tray 2*7

X

140 Y

100

Inch sys tem (i nch ) Min. Max.

432

5-1/2

297

5-1/2

17 11-5/8

Long size paper from the bypass tray: max. 1,200mm is configurable by Sim. *3: Supported label paper: SF-4A3F *4: Supported tab paper: A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm 8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm *5: Need to set from Sim *6: Brazil: 220g paper feeding is stated. *7: Standard for MX-M316N / M266N / M315N / M315U.


Yes

H. Paper exit se ction (1)

Exit Capacit y Output Location

Center

Output Capacity

Job Separator (Option) 2)

A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2)

Output paper size / weight

Right Side (Option)

(80g/m2)

100 sheets (80g/m2)

Upper tray: 100 sheets Lower tray: A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m2) Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2)

Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.

Shifting function

Yes

Upper: No Lower: Yes

No

Output paper detection

No

Upper: Yes Lower: No

No

Exittrayfulldetection

Yes

Upper:No(detectionbycount-up) Lower: Yes

Yes

(2)

Size of p aper which ca n be dis charged Output Section Center Tray

Duplex Exit Tray Paper 12x18(A3W) Size 17 11 x 8.5 14 x 8.5 13.5 x

305x457

-

297x432

-

Yes

216x356

Yes

Yes

216x343

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

w/offset -

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

w/staple

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Finisher

Finisher

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Right Exit Tray

Offset

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8.5 13.4 x

216x340

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8.5 13 x 8.5 11 x

216x330 297x216

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

216x279

Yes

8.5 11R x

Yes

7.25 10.5R x 5.5 8.5 x

184x266 216x140

-

5.5 8.5R x

140x216

Yes

A3

-

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

297x420

Yes

Yes 4

Yes* -

-

Yes Yes

4

Yes* Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes*

Yes*

-

Yes*

Yes

Yes

4

Yes

4

Yes*4

4

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

B4

257x364

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

A4 A4R

297x210 210x297

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

B5

257x182

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

B5R A5 A5R

182x257 210x148 148x210

Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes*4

Yes -

Yes Yes*4 4 Yes*

B6R

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

270x195 195x270

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes*4

-

-

4

-

-

4

-

-

4

Yes*4

Yes*5

Extra Custom*2 Thin paper*9 Plain paper

Heavy paper

Yes -

Yes

16-28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m 2)

Yes

-

-

-

Yes Yes

Yes*

Yes*

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes*

-

Yes

-

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes* Yes* Yes

-

4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Recycled paper

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Color paper Letter head

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Pre-printed

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Pre-punched

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes*6

Yes*7

28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2)*6

-

Yes

110 lb index -140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2) Envelope Transparency

Yes

Yes 13-16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)

-

-

270x390

-

-

4

16K 16KR Envelope*1

Yes

-

Yes Yes*4 -

8K

A6R

Paper Type

Job Separator -

75-90g/m

-

2

-

User settings 7-1

-

Yes 3

-

8

-

-

-

Yes

Yes*

-

Yes* Yes

-

-

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes*

Yes

-

Yes Yes

-

Label Tab paper

Yes

*1: Supported Envelop types: Monarch/Com-10/DL /C5/Custom Custom envelope size is supported by Sim. Not displayed at the default setting.


4

Yes

4 4

Yes* Yes*

Yes*

-

Yes

6

Yes* Yes

8

Yes*3

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

1

: ‘15/Aug.

*2: Custom siz e AB Syst em (mm ) Bypass tray

X Y

Duplex

Inch Syst em (in ch)

Min.

Max.

Min.

140 100

432 297

5-1/2 5-1/2

Max. 17 11-5/8

X

182

432

7-1/4

17

Y

148

297

5-1/2

11-5/8

Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim * Long size paper ejection is from center tray/inner finisher *3: Comply to “Paper type setting” *4: Can be input but alignment is not supported *5: Can be input and stapled but alignment is not supported *6: Alignment of heavy paper more than 129g/m 2 is not supported *7: Only front/back cover is available. *8: Can be fed but not covered under warranty. *9: A4 paper (grain long) corresponding to 58g/m 2

I.

Operatio n p anel

L. Warm- up tim e

Size

inch 7

Form

Warm-up time

DotmatrixLCD,Touchpanel

Displaydotnumber

800 x 480 dots(WVGA)

LCDbacklight

LEDbacklight

LCDcontrastadjust

Yes

Jam recovery time*1

10sec. or less

* Result may change depending on conditions.

Yes

Angle/position adjustment

20sec. or less

Preheat

*1: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open, standard condition, Polygon stops.

No tilting mechanism

J. Contr olle r boa rd CPU

ARM11:600MHz ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: 75MHz

2. Cop y fu nc ti on s A. Fir st co py ti me

Interface Engine

26cpm machine

31cpm machine

35cpm machine

IEEE1284 Parallel

No

Ethernet

1port

Scan Speed

Interface

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T

Platen

4.3sec.

4.3sec.

4.3sec.

4.3sec.

4.0sec.

Support Protocol

TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, Ether Talk

RSPF

7.0sec.

7.0sec.

7.0sec.

7.0sec.

6.7sec.

USB 2.0 (high speed) (host)*1 USB 2.0 (high speed) (device) USB-HUB (host)

Serial I/F (For coin-operated machines)

2port (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.) 1port

56

Feed the A4 (8-1/2 x 11) sheet in landscape fr om tray 1, with the polygon rotating condition.

Engine

1port

StoS

26cpm machine 26cpm(100%)



* Defines the copy speed of when the main unit and a document feeder are used in combination. * S to S: copying 1 set of an 11-sheet srcinal in A4 / 8.5" x 1 1" (not including the first copy) Monochrome: 600 x 400dpi (default)

ICU (Reus) PWB

HDD*2

Memory* 1 2GB

OPT (250GB)

*2: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condition. Boot/Program area FAX data storage area Without HDD 512MB

1

56

* Measuring Conditions

*1: Memory expansion is not available

Memory area (SD card)

31

B. Jo b S peed

K. Memory/H ard disk/ SD card me mory

4GB

56

Value might vary depends on the machine s ettings/conditions

Internal: 4 port * Main unit USB Front Port * Main unit USB Rear Port * Key board USB Port * IC Card Reader

*1: The USB port can be disabled by Sim

SD card

31

With HDD 1GB


1

3. Pri nt er fu nc tio n A. Pri nt er d ri ver su pp or ted OS Custom PCL6 SPDL2

OS

Windows Me / 98

No

NT 4.0 SP5 later or

No

No

XP x64 XP

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No No No

Windows7x64

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

No

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

Windows7

No

No

CD-ROM

Server2008x64

No

No

No

CD-ROM

Server2008

No

No

TWAIN

No

CD-ROM

Vistax64

No

No

PC-FAX

No

CD-ROM

Vista

No

No

CD-ROM

Server2003x64

Sharp Ad vanc ed Printing Language

PPD

No No

Server2003

CustomPS

No

No

2000

Mac

Custom PCL5e

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM

No



Server2012x64

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

Windows8

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

Windows8x64

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

Windows8.1

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

Windows8.1x64

CD-ROM

No

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

9.0

No

No

No

10.2X

No

No

No

10.3X

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

10.4 X 10.5 X

No No

No No

No No

CD-ROM CD-ROM

No No

No No

No No

10.6 X

No

No

No

CD-ROM

No

No

No

10.7 X

No

No

No

CD-ROM

No

No

No

10.8 X 10.9 X

No No

No No

No No

CD-ROM CD-ROM

No No

No No

No No

10.10 X

No

No

No

CD-ROM

No

No

No

B. PDL emula tion/ Fon t PDL (Command) PCL6compatibility

Installed font Nmodel:STD U model: OPT

ESC/P(VP-1100) compatible, ESC/P_super compatible Postscript3compatibility

OPT

-

Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP Fax Data input (metadata)

Remote PC scan

Submode E-mail

WithHDD Yes

WithoutHDD Yes

FTPserver

Yes

Yes

Yes

Desktop

Yes

USBMemory -

Europeanoutlinefont=136styles

Mode Corresponding server / Protocol

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes No

Yes

No

Scanner SMTP/ SMTP-SSL FTP (TCP/IP)*2/ FTPS SMB *1 HTTP/HTTPS (Supported protocol of Sharp OSA)

InternetFax/DirectSMTP POP3 server SMTP server ESMTP server

*1: Network environment for SMB Windows Server2003, Server2003x64,

E-mail FTPserver

-

-

B. Suppo rt s yst em

A. Mod e

Shared folder (SMB)

Barcode font = 28 styles

European BMP font =2 style (Roman, Sans-serif)

4. Image send fun cti on

Mode Scanner

Option font

European outline font = 80 styles Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style

Yes Yes

Yes No

Shared folder (SMB)

Yes

No

Desktop

Yes

No

Yes

No

Vista, Vistax64, Server2008, Server2008x64, Windows7x64, Windows8, Windows8x64 Server2012, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1x64 Mac OSX 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10 *2: Support Passive/Active Mode


Windows7,

C. Suppor t ima ge Mode

Scanner

Mode

Format/ Compression method

Item

File format (Mono 2 gradation)

TIFF PDF

Support

Yes Yes Yes

EncryptedPDF XPS File format (Color/ Gray scale)

Yes

JPEG

Yes

PDF

Yes

PDF/A EncryptedPDF

Yes Yes

High compression PDF

No

XPS

Yes

Compression

Non-compression

Yes

method (Mono 2 gradation)

G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified Huffman)

Yes

G4= MMR (Modified MR)

Yes

JPEG (high/ middle/ low)

Yes

High compression PDF

No

Black Letter Emphasis 2-color high compression PDF TIFF-FX (TIFF-F / TIFF-S) TIFF-C

No

Non-compression

No

G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified Huffman)

Yes

File format (Monochrome) File format (Color/ Gray scale) Compression method (Monochrome)

Mode

InternetFax/ Direct SMTP

Moire reduction mode CPT(notes’security)

Yes Yes

N/A N/A

Scanning QR codes

N/A

N/A

E. Specifying Addre sse s Address Specifying Method Item

Content

One-touch

Yes

Group key

Yes

No No

Selection from the LDAP server

Yes N/A

Yes

Display the address information stored in the LDAP server directly in the key list.

Other Address Specifying Method

Yes

TIFF-C (high/ middle/ low)

No

Compression method (Monochrome)

MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG

Function

Description

Scanner

Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP

Setting of the default address

The default address can be set in the scanner mode. The user can send only by setting an srcinal and touching the start key.

Yes

No

Apply E-mail

The e-mail address of the

Yes

No

address of the user for login (Scan to Me)

Accept “!” in the address of Scan to SMB folder

authenticated user is automatically set as the default address. The setting whether address selection by this function is applied or not shall be prepared for broadcast with Fax/Internet Fax addresses. The setting whether it is enabled for users to cancel the address selection by this function at any time or not shall be prepared. And it has the function to prohibit to choice address except the user who log in. It accepts that it forbids to input “!” in the address of Scan to SMB folder.

Yes

No

Prohibit the broadcast transmission of Home Directory

It prohibits to input the next address for making to send only the user who log in at Scan to Home Directory.

Yes

No

Resend

Addresses can be selected from the latest 8 destinations in the sending history. Selections from FTP/Desktop/ SMB sending history is N/ A.Support in order of number of sending is N/A.

Yes

N/A

Yes

File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)

Yes

D. Image P roce ssing Color Mode Item

Scanner Yes

InternetFax/ Direct SMTP Yes

Grays scale

Yes

N/A

Full color

Yes

N/A

Auto Color Selection (ACS)

Yes

N/A

Resolution Scanner

InternetFax/DirectSMTP

1 2

100x100dpi 200x200dpi

200x100dpi 200x200dpi

3

300x300dpi

200x400dpi

4 5

400x400dpi 600x600dpi

400x400dpi 600x600dpi

Exposure/Original Type Mode

Scanner

Halftone reproduction

InternetFax/ Direct SMTP

Equivalent to 256 gradations

Exposure Adjustment

Auto

Yes

Original document type (Selectable in manual mode)

Text

5levels

Text/Photo

Yes

Text / Printed photo

Yes

Photo

Yes

Printedphoto Map

Scanner

Yes (e-mail/SMB/ Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/fax) *Addresses of FTP/Desktop cannot be input dire ctly.

G4 = MMR (Modified MR)

B&W

Halftone (B&W only)

Direct input (Entry from the soft keyboard, externally-connected keyboard or 10 keypad)

Compression method (Color/ Gray scale)

Level

Yes Yes

InternetFax/ Direct SMTP N/A

Other Image Processing Functions

Yes Yes

ColorTIFF

Compression method (Color/ Gray scale)

Fax

Magical scan (Area division + Suppress Selectionofimagequality

PDF/A

Internet Fax Direct SMTP

Scanner

Yes Yes

Yes 5levels N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A


5. FAX fu nc ti on

Address Book Registration

(1) Item

Content

Max. number of registrations

Total: 1000 keys *FTP/Desktop/SMB addresses shall be the same as those for other modes. Maximum 1000 addresses shall be able to be registered.

Number of addresses can be registered in one Group key

Max. 500 addresses

Number of addresses can be registered by inputting directly in Group keys LDAP searching when address book registration

5000 addresses (included in the 1000 keys)

Address book registration in the sending history screen

N/A

Speed dial (quick key)

Yes (Call by inputting a registration number from the 10-key pad)

Yes

(2)

FAX to e-mail/FTP

Sup po rt im age Mode

FAX

Compression method

MH, MR,MMR, JBIG

(3)

Sup po rt im age Mode

FAX

Compression method

MH, MR,MMR, JBIG

(4)

Image p roc essing Mode

F. Pro gr am Item Number of registrations

Mode

FAX

Content Registered up to: 48 (Group/Individual can be registered.)

Originalscanning color

FAX B/W

Halftone reproduction

Equivalent of 256 steps

Density adjustment

Auto + 5 steps

Selection of image quality

Half tone (Black-white only) ON/OFF

Resolution (depends on file format/transmission method)

Standard character (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (half tone not allowed) Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi) Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi)

G. Inf orma tion to Be Se nt

Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi) Mode Subject

Scanner

InternetFax/Direct SMTP

Select from the list. Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters; Number of lists: 30)

Filename

Selectfromthelist.*1 Match the subject Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters; Number of lists: 30)

Outbound message (message body) Outbound message selection

Yes*3

Number of letters in an outbound message

1800 one-byte characters (900 two-byte characters) *3

Pre-Setting Mail Signature*2

Yes

Select from the list*3. Direct entry

Yes

*1: N/A for USB Memory Scan *2: A text message can be set to be automatically added in the body of outbound messages. It cannot be edited at the time of sending. *3: When no HDD, N/A

(5)

Specific ation of A ddre sses Mode

FAX

Address specification

Specification by one-touch/group/ direct address entry. Entry from 10-key. (Fax) Selection from LDAP server

Number of One-touch address key registration

Total (number of key): Maximum 1000

Number of Group (1 key) address registtation

Number of Group (1 key) address registration : maximum 500 Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total address number included in /1000 key)

Program

48

Direct entry of addresses

Entry by 10-key, # key

Chaindial

Yes(pausekey) *1

Resend Destination confirmation

Callupnearest8addresses. Yes

Shortcut for address selection (quick key)

Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of addresses.

Disable direct entry transmission*2 Disable PC-Fax sending

Yes Yes

*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB mem ory, Broadcast. *2: When disabled, the address r egistration is not allowed either.

(6)

Specifica tion of Multiple Addre sses Mode

Broadcast Request of serial transmission

FAX Yes(500destinations) Yes

* Broadcast transmission is allow ed. (Monochrome only)


(7)

Trans mis sio n fun cti on

Mode

FAX

Staple function of received data Mode

FAX

Yes

Auto wake up print

Yes

Memory transmission

94 destinations in all

Received data print hold*1

Yes

On-hook

Yes

Color toner print when black toner runs out.

No

Quick online transmission

Yes

Directtransmission

Yes (Switching: Memory transmission Direct transmission)

Automatically-reduced transmission

Yes

Rotatedtransmission

Yes

Scaledtransmission

Yes Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a fixed size to another. Reduction may be done on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax sending.

Recallmode

Error Busy

(9)

Yes Yes Number/time to be set up through system setup

Long original transmission

*1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.) Setting only on the reciver side.

Yes Maximum of 1000mm (single side only/black-white 2 values only)

Repor t/lis t func tio n Mode

FAX

Image sending activity report

Transactionreport Address/phone number table

Yes Time-specified output Output with memory full * Maximum of 200 ti mes including both transmission and reception Yes Yes

Group table

Yes

Programtable

Yes

Memory box table (F code)

Yes

Confidential transmission (Sharp mode)

No

Communication srcinal contents print

No

List of allowed or rejected reception numbers

Yes

Relay broadcast transmission (Sharp mode)

No

Large capacity original mode

Yes

Table of control record for each account

Scanningofthinpaper Mixed originals feeder Default date sender transmission Preview Side erase

(8)

Yes Yes (Random + MIX)

(10) Other Fu nctions

Yes (ON only)

Mode

No Yes

Recepti on fun ction

Mode Automatic reception

Memoryreception

Switching from manual reception to automatic reception. (Allowed only for France and Japan) Yes

Fixed size reduced reception

Yes

Specified size scaled re ception

No

Rotatedreception

Yes

Setting of received data print condition

Equal size print (partition not allowed) Equal size print (partition allowed) Equal or reduced size print Condition setting through system setting

Yes Yes Up to 100 registrations allowed with bulletin board, confidential and relay broadcast all combined. (Free area : 1 registration) Setting of the number of transmission: 1/no limit. No

Coversheetfunction Transmissionmessage

No

Sender print Senderselection

Yes Yes

Pagenumberprint

Yes

Dateprint

Yes(Datecanbeexpressed alternatively)

Polling protection function

Yes

Page partition transmission Pageconnection Confidential (receiver unit) Fax to e-mail (F code) *1 Edge erase

Yes

Reception from a specific number not allowed, or allowed. (Allow/Reject)

Specified numbers only (50 numbers /20 digits)

External phone connection remote

Yes

Confidential reception (Sharp mode)

No

Received data bypass output

Yes

Yes (Other than North America and Inch destinations)

Center erase 1 in 2

Yes No Yes (F code method) Yes (F code method) Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Cardshot

Forward data transmission/ reception (Document Admin)

Indexprinting No Transfer function upon disabling Yes (1 receiver (of transfer) of output. registration) Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail Yes (Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax reception data to e-mail, inbound routing) Insertion of j ob separator sheet

Pollingreception Bulletin b oard t ransmission

Relay broadcast instructions

No

Automatic reduction setting upon receiving A3 Automatic reduction setting upon receiving letter

Exittraysetting

Yes

FAX No

2-in-1reception

FAX

Timespecification

Yes

Manualreception

2-sided reception

Always print/Upon error/no print

Yes(Equivalentorenlargementupto the paper width. The maximum enlargement is not allowed to exceed 400%) Yes Data transmission by PC-Fax/ PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too.

*1: This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code relay broadcast allowed.

Yes No


1

: ‘15/Aug.

(11) Transmission M ethod

(15) Telephone functions

Mode Transmission time Modem speed Intercommunication Communication line

ECM

FAX

Mode

FAX

2 seconds level (super G3/JBIG), 6 seconds level (G3 ECM) Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps 2.4kbps

On-hookfunction Setting of pause time

Yes (1 ? 15 seconds)

SuperG 3/G3

Telephone transmission during power outage

No (External telephone transmission allowed)

Tone p ulse switching

Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/ Taiwan) * For the other destinations, set with the soft switch.

General membership telephone line (PSTN), independent business line (PBX), F net. (R-key for PBX setting: Germany/France)

Yes

Hold

No

Yes

(12) Record S ize

(16) Sound settings

Mode

FAX

Mode

Item

FAX

Maximumrecordwidth

293mm

On-hooksound

Soundvolumesetting

Recordsize

A3?A5/11"x17"?5.5"x8.5"

Sound volume for calling

Sound volume setting

1 - 9, No

Line monitor sound Reception sound

Sound volume setting Sound volume setting

1 - 9, No 1 - 9, No

(13) F code commun icat ion Mode

FAX

Sub-address

Yes(20digits)

Password

Yes(20digits)

(14) Registration-rela ted se ttings Mode One-touch/group *1 E-mail FTP Desktop SMB FAX

Program

Number of memory boxes

FAX 1000 destinations Use of LDAP allowed Up to 500 registered addresses for each group dial. Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 half-size characters) One-touch dial receiver number registration: within 64 digits for receiver number + sub-address + passcode (including "/"). Registrationofaddresses(groups), settings (density, image quality) and special functions in one set is allowed. (48 of them) Registration of bulletin board/ confidential/relay broadcast is allowed up to 100. Registration name: 18 characters

Number of sender registration

1 (default) with 20 characters

Number of sender selection registration

Total: 18 registrations (2 0 characters) (Sender selection: In addition to default, 18 registrations allowed)

Registration of polling approval number

10 numbers/20 digits

Registration of Fax system number (Sharp mode)

No

Registration of Fax polling approval ID number (Sharp mode) Fax relay ID registration (Sharp mode)

No

Quick key (short cut registration) *2

Yes (001 ? 1000)

Import/export of address book Blacklist(forFrance)

1-9

Transmission success sound


Transmission and reception error sound Sound setting for end of srcinal reading (image send)


1 - 9, No

1 - 9, No


Large/middle/ small/no sound

(17) Others Mode

FAX

PC-FAX

Yes

FAST Network FAST

Yes (SEC only) No

Distinctive ring detection

Setting for each destination

6. Pow er c on su mp ti on The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source. 100 V type Maximum rated power Consumption*1 TECvalue

200 V type

1.44kW

1.45kW

26cpmmachine 31cpmmachine

1.8kWh 2.1kWh

1.8kWh 2.1kWh

35cpmmachine

2.2kWh

2.2 kWh

Fax waiting power consumption is 1W Yes *Condition of Standing by Network: Connect with TCP/IP protocol only

Time to move into Preheat mode Recovery time from Preheat mode Time to move into sleep mode

No

1 minutes (default) 10 seconds 1 minute (Default)

11 minutes (Europe) 1 minute (Other)

* After the remote job is done: 1 second (Default)

No Recovery time from Sleep mode Yes (By storage backup) No

20 seconds

*1: At power-on timing (with condition of dehumidify heater turned OFF)

*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book, the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum total of all modes. *2: Quick key is the funct ion to select an add ress based on th e registered number of each address within the book for address selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.


1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

7. Dime nsi ons and w eigh t MX-316N/ MX-M266N/ MX-M315N/ MX-M315U/ MX-M356N/ MX-M356U

1 Outer dimension (Included operation panel)

W620 x D617 x H680 mm When the OC is installed: W620 x D617 x H700 mm When the RSPF is installed: W620 x D617 x H830 mm

Footprint

W620x D617mm

Dimension occupied by the machine

W938 x D617 mm (when the bypass tray is extended)

Weight When the RSPF is installed: Main Unit 51 kg (100V type / 200V type) (including photoreceptor / not including When the OC is installed: 45 kg consumables)

MX-M265N/ MX-M265U W620 x D617 x H580 mm When the OC is installed: W620 x D617 x H600 mm When the RSPF is installed: W620 x D617 x H730 mm

When the RSPF is installed: 45 kg (100V type / 200V type) When the OC is installed: 39 kg


[3]CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supp ly sys tem table A. Nor th Am eri ca, Mi dd le A mer ic a, Sout h A mer ic a No.

Item

1

Toner cartridge (black)

2 3

Developer(black) Drum

Content Toner cartridge

Life x1

Developer Drum

27.5K

Model name MX-315NT

x1 1x

100K 100K

Life

Model name

x1 x1

27.5K 100K

MX-315GT MX-312GV

1x

100K

MX-312GR

Remarks Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document

MX-312NV MX-312NR

B. Europe , Australia a nd Ne w Zea land No.

Item

1 2

Toner cartridge (black) Developer(black)

3

Drum

Content Toner cartridge Developer Drum

Remarks Life setting by A4 (8.5"x 11") 6% document

C. Asia and Hong Kong No.

Item

1 2

Toner cartridge (black) Developer(black)

3

Drum

Content Toner cartridge Developer

Life x1 x1

Drum

1x

27.5K 100K 100K

Model name MX-315AT MX-312AV

Remarks Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document

MX-312AR

D. Middle Ea st, Africa, T aiwan, Israe l and Philippin es, Korea No.

Item

Content

Life

1

Toner cartridge (black)

Toner cartridge

x1

27.5K

2

Developer(black)

Developer

x1

100K

3

Drum

Drum

1x

100K

Model name MX-315FT MX-312FV MX-312FR

MX-M316N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

Remarks Life setting by A4 (8.5"x 11") 6% document

2. Mainte nance parts list A. Nor th Am eri ca, Mi dd le A mer ic a, Sout h A mer ic a No. 1

Item Upperheatrollerkit

Content

Life

Upperheatroller Fuser gear

x1 1x

Upper heat roller bearing

Lowerheatrollerkit

Fusing separation pawl (upper) Lowerheatroller x1

MX-312LH

x4 x1

Fuserbearing(lower) Maintenancekit

300K

Remarks

x1

Fusing separation pawl (lower) 3

MX-313UH

x2

Uppercleaningpad 2

Model name

150K

x2

Drumseparationpawlunit

x2

Cleanerblade MC unit

100K

MX-312KA

300K

MX-312DU

x1 1 x

4

Drumframeunit

Drumframeunit

x1

5

Transferrollerunit

Transferrollerunit

6

Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit

x1

100K

MX-312RT

7

Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit

x1

100K

MX-312MR

8

Fusingunit

9

Fusingunit

* Thelifeofthetonerreceptionseatattached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up toas 3 times. (Supplied a drum frame unit.)

10

Tonerfilterunit

11

Staplecartridge

x1

Fusingunit(120Vheaterlamp)

x1

Fusingunit(200Vheaterlamp) Tonerfilterunit

150K

150K

x1

150K

x1

100K

Staplecartridge

x3

MX-312TX

MX-312FU1 MX-312FU MX-312TF

5000staples x3

MX-SCX1

* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

B. Europe , Australia a nd Ne w Zea land No. 1


Content

Life

Upperheatroller

x1

Fuser gear Upper heat roller bearing

3

Maintenancekit

x4

Fuserbearing(lower) Drumseparationpawlunit

x1 x2 x2

Cleanerblade

5

Transferrollerunit

Transferrollerunit

6 7

Paperfeedrollerkit Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit Paperfeedrollerkit

8

Fusingunit

9 10

Fusingunit Tonerfilterunit

11

Staplecartridge

100K

MX-312KA

300K

MX-312DU

x1

MC unit Drumframeunit

Drumframeunit

MX-312LH

x2

Lowerheatroller x1 Fusing separation pawl (lower)

4

300K

1 x x1

x1

150K

x1 x1

100K 100K

MX-312TX MX-312RT MX-312MR


x1

150K

MX-312FU1

Fusingunit(200Vheaterlamp) Tonerfilterunit

x1 x1

150K 100K

MX-312FU MX-312TF

Staplecartridge

Remarks

x1

Fusing separation pawl (upper) Lowerheatrollerkit

MX-313UH

1x

Uppercleaningpad 2

Model name

150K

x3

5000staples x3

MX-SCX1



* Thelifeofthetonerreceptionseatattached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)

C. Asia and Hong Kong No. 1


Content

Life

Upperheatroller

x1

Fuser gear

Lowerheatrollerkit

Maintenancekit

300K

MX-312LH

x4

Lowerheatroller x1 Fusing separation pawl (lower)

x1 x2


x2

100K

MX-312KA

x1

300K

MX-312DU

Cleanerblade

x 1

MC unit Drumframeunit

1 x

4

Drumframeunit

5 6

Transferrollerunit Paperfeedrollerkit

Transferrollerunit Paperfeedrollerkit

x1 x1

150K 100K

MX-312TX MX-312RT

7

Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit

x1

100K

MX-312MR

8

Fusingunit


x1

150K

9

Fusingunit


x1

150K

10

Tonerfilterunit

11

Staplecartridge

Remarks

x2 x1

Fusing separation pawl (upper)

Fuserbearing(lower) 3

MX-313UH

1x

Upper heat roller bearing Uppercleaningpad 2

Model name

150K

Tonerfilterunit

x1

100K

Staplecartridge

x3

* Thelifeofthetonerreceptionseat attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)

MX-312FU1 MX-312FU MX-312TF

5000staples x3

MX-SCX1


D. Middle Ea st, Africa, T aiwan, Israe l and Philippin es, Korea No. 1


Content

Life

Upperheatroller

x1

Fuser gear Upper heat roller bearing Uppercleaningpad Lowerheatrollerkit

Lowerheatroller

Maintenancekit

300K

MX-312LH

x1 x2


x2

Cleanerblade MC unit

100K

MX-312KA

300K

MX-312DU

x 1 1 x

4

Drumframeunit

5

Transferrollerunit

Transferrollerunit

6

Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit

x1

100K

MX-312RT

7

Paperfeedrollerkit

Paperfeedrollerkit

x1

100K

MX-312MR

8 9

Fusingunit Fusingunit

10

Tonerfilterunit

11

Staplecartridge

Remarks

x4 x1

Fusing separation pawl (lower) Fuserbearing(lower) 3

MX-313UH

x2 x1

Fusing separation pawl (upper) 2

Model name

150K

1x

Drumframeunit

x1

x1

Fusingunit(120Vheaterlamp) Fusingunit(200Vheaterlamp) Tonerfilterunit

150K

x1 x1

150K 150K

x1

Staplecartridge

100K x3

5000staples x3

* Thelifeofthetonerreceptionseat attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)

MX-312TX

MX-312FU1 MX-312FU MX-312TF MX-SCX1


3. Develop er/Drum life end d efinition * When the developer/drum counter reaches the spe cified count. * When the developer/drum rpm reaches the spe cified count. When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end. when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates. Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified amount, it is judged as life end. To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-13. Developer/drum counter Developer/drum

100K

Number of rotations (Rotations) 550K


: ‘15/Aug.

1

4. Produc tion numb er identific ation

The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year, month, day) of production.

The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.

Label position

123456

Internal product name Incompatibility

1 1

Destination

Alphabet Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.

2

Number Indicates the end digit of the production year.

3

Production year/month/day (6 digits)

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 4, 5

Number

6

Indicates the day of the month of packing. Factory code (Only for some destination)

Serial No. in production day (5 digits) Production place (1 digits)

Number or X, Y, Z Indicates the month of packing.

Version No.

5. Envi ron mental cond iti ons (Humidity) 85%

60%

12345678

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.

20%

The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the developer bag. 1

Alphabet Indicates the production factory.

2

Number Indicates the production year.

3, 4

Number

5, 6

Number

Indicates the production month. Indicates the production day. 7 8

Hyphen Number Indicates the production lot.


10 C

30 C

35 C

(Temperature)

MX-M316N

Service Manual [4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

1. Exte rnal view 1

2

3

45

6

7

When a output tray unit is installed 13

8

9

No. 1

10 11 1 2

When a finisher is installed

Name Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)

Function/Operation Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.

2

Automatic document feeder

This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.

3

Output tray (center tray)

4

Operation panel

This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.

5

Front cover

Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.

6

USB connector(Atype)

7

Exit tray unit (right tray)* 1

8

Finisher*1

9

Tray 1

10

Tray2

Thisholdspaper.(OnlyforNVmodels,thisistheoption.)

11

Tray 3 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1

This holds paper.

12 13

Tray 4 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper. Main powerswitch Thisisusedto poweron themachine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.

Output is delivered to this tray.

SupportsUSB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. When installed, output can be delivered to this tray. This can be used to staple output. This holds paper.

*1: Peripheral device.

MX-M316N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

2. Interna l structure 1

2 3

6

No.

Name

45

7

8

9

Function/Operation

1

Toner cartridge

This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.

2 3

Upper cover of machine (when a second paper exit unit is installed) Fusing unit

Open this cover to remove jam paper when a paper jam occurs in the output of the job separator or the optional finisher. Heatisapplied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.

4

Rightsidecover

5 6

Right side cover release lever Photoconductive drum

7

Right cover of paper drawer (when a

8 9

paper drawer is installed) Paper tray right side cover Bypasstray

Openthiscovertoremoveamisfeed. To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover. This drum has a photoconductive coating on its surface. The images are formed on top of this photoconductive surface. (The photoconductive coating is green in color.) Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4. Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2. Usethistraytofeedpapermanually. When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.


3. Automatic document 1

feeder and document gla ss 2

3

5 4

7

6

8

No.

Name

Function/Operation

1

Paperfeed roller

Thisrollerrotatesto automatically feed the original.

2

Document feeding area cover

Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.

3

Original guides

4

Document feeder tray

These help ensure thatthe originalisscanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the srcinal. Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.

5

Original exittray

Originalsare delivered to thistrayafterscanning.

6

Scanning area

Originalsplaced in the documentfeedertrayare scanned here.

7

Original size detector

This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.

8

Document glass

Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.


4. I/F connectors

1 2 3 4

5

6

100V Type

200V Type

When a fax expansion kit is installed

7 8

No. 1

Name Service-only connector

Function/Operation This connector is for use o nly by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.

2

LAN connector

3

USB connector (B type)

SupportsUSB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.

Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.

4

USB connector (A type)

SupportsUSB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.

5

Connector for the finisher only

Connects the finisher.(At the time of optional wearing)

6 7

Power plug Extension phone jack

When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.

8

Telephone line jack

When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.


5. Operation panel 1

2

3

4

5

12 13

No.

Name

14

6

15

16

7

11 10 89

1718

Function/Operation

1

Touch panel

Messagesandkeysappearin the touch paneldisplay. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation.

2

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.

3

[HOME] key

Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the machine.

4

[JOB STATUS] key

Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs. For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.

5

PRINT mode indicators

* READY indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. * DATA indicator: This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.

6

IMAGE SEND mode in dicators

* LINE i ndicator: This lights up during transmission or reception of a f ax or Internet fax. Th is also lights during transmission of an image in scan mode. * DATA indicator: This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.

7 8

[CLEAR]key [STOP]key

Pressthiskeytoreturn thenumberofcopiesto"0". Pressthiskeytostopacopyjoborscanningofan original.

9

Main power indicator

This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

10

[POWER]key

Usethiskeytoturn themachinepoweron and off.

11

POWER SAVE key indicator

Use to switch the machine to "Auto power shut-off" mode, which is a p ower save function. [Power save key] blinks when the machine is in an auto power shut-off mode.

12

DATA NOTIFICATION indi cator (Green)

The in dicator lights solidly or bli nks to indi cate the status of a job.

13

[LOGOUT] key

14

Numeric keys

15

[#/P] key

Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line. These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings). When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used when dialing.

16 17

Error indicator [CLEAR ALL] key

18

[START] key

Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error. Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state. Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.


: ‘15/Aug.

1

6. RSPF A. Sens or s an d d etec to rs 1

(1)

MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N MX-RP19/RP20 SCOV SPPD1

SPED SPLS1

SPPD2

SPLS2

SPWS SOCD SPPD3

Signalname

Name

SPPD4

Type Micro switch Transmission type

Function/Operation

SCOV SOCD

RSPF cover open/close detector RSPF open/closesensor

Detects open/close o f the RSPF cover. Detects open/closeo f the RSPF unit.

SPED

Document sensor

Transmission type

Detectsdocument empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.

SPLS1

Paper size detector 1

Transmission type

Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.

SPLS2


Transmission type


SPPD1

Document transport sensor 1

Transmission type

SPPD2


Transmission type

Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed. Detects paper pass.

SPPD3


Transmission type

Detects paper pass.

SPPD4 SPWS

Document transport sensor 4 Document size detector

Transmission type Volume-type resistor

Detects paper exit and switchback. Detects the document width.


Note

: ‘15/Aug.

1

B. Motors, clutches, solenoids and PWB 1

(1)

MX-M316N/M266N/M356N MX-RP20

SRRC SPFM SPM (SPUM)

SPRS

1

Signalname

Name

SPFM SPM/SPUM

RSPFtransportmotor RSPFpaperfeed motor

Type Steppingmotor Stepping motor

Function/Operation Transportsadocument. Feedsa document.

SPRS

Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (RSPF)

Magnetic solenoid

Controls ON/OFF of the tr ansport power of the paper e xit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)

SRRC

Registration roller clutch (RSPF)

Magnetic clutch

Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)

No.

Name

1

(2)

RSPF driver PWB

Function/Operation Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.

MX-M265N/M315N MX-RP19

SRRC SPFM SPRS SPUC

1

Signalname SPFM

Name

Type

RSPFtransportmotor

Steppingmotor

Function/Operation Transportsadocument.

SPRS

Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (RSPF)

Magnetic solenoid

SRRC


Magnetic clutch


SPUC

Reverse clutch

Electromagnetic clutch

Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the resist roller.

No. 1

Name RSPF driver PWB

Controls ON/OFF of the tr ansport power of the paper e xit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)

Function/Operation Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.


: ‘15/Aug.

1

C. Rollers 1

(1)

MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N MX-RP19/RP20 6

7 8

No.

5

4

10 9

Name

2

3

1

12 11

Function/Operation

1

Document pickup roller (RSPF)

Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.

2

Paper feed roller (RSPF)

Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.

3

Separation roller (RSPF)

Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.

4

Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF)

5

Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF)

Reduces friction b etween a d ocument an d th e paper guide to t ransport the d ocument smoothly to the registration roller. Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing.

6

Registration roller (Idle) RSPF)

7

Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF)

8

Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF)

9

Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF)

Apply a p ressure to a document and the registration roller to provide th e transport power of the transport roller to the document. Apply a p ressure to a document and th e transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the document. Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section. Apply a p ressure to a document and th e transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the document.

10

Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF)

Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.

11

Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF)

Apply a pressure to a d ocument and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to the document.

12

Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF)

Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the back surface.


: ‘15/Aug.

1

7. Sens or 1

A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/ M356U

B. MX-M265N/M265U

1

1

2

2

12 11 3

12 11 3

10

10

13

13

14 17

14 17

4 18 16

4 18 16

5

5 7

15

8 6 15

No. 1 2

Name Scanner home position sensor Paper size detection trigger sensor

19

23 20

9

Code MHPS OCSW

22

Function and operation Detects the scanner home position. Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal.

No.

Name

1

Scanner home position sensor Paper size detection trigger sensor Toner motor sensor Temperature sensor/ Humidity sensor Manual paper feed tray empty sensor 1

2

3

Toner motor sensor

TM_CO UNT

Detects the rotation of the toner motor.

4

Temperature sensor/ Humidity sensor Manual paper feed tray empty sensor 1

TH_RA/ HUD_RA MTOP1

Machine temperature/humidity detection Manual feed tray position detection

4

MTOP2

Manual feed tray position

6

MPLD1

detection Manual feed paper length detection

7

6

Manual paper feed

7

tray empty sensor 2 Manual f eed l ength detection sensor 1

8 9 10

Manual feed width detection sensor Manual feed paper empty sensor Shifter home position sensor

MPWD MPED SHPOS

20

9

8 6

21

3

5

7 19

5

Manual paper feed tray empty sensor 2 Manual feed l ength detection sensor 1 Manual feed width detection sensor

Code MHPS OCSW TM_CO UNT TH_RA/ HUD_RA MTOP1 MTOP2 MPLD1 MPWD

Function and operation Detects the scanner home position. Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal. Detects the rotation of the toner motor. Machine temperature/humidity detection Manual feed tray position detection Manual feed tray position detection Manual feed paper length detection Manual feed paper width detection

Manual feed paper width detection

8

Manual feed paper empty detection

9

Manual feed paper empty sensor

Shifter ho me po sition sensor detection

10

Shifter home position sensor

SHPOS

Shifter ho me po sition se nsor detection

1st paper exit sensor

POD1

1st paper exit detection

MPED

Manual feed paper empty detection

11

1st paper exit sensor

POD1

1st paper exit detection

11

12

1st exit tray full detection sensor

TFD1

1st exit tray full detection

12

1st exit tray full detection sensor

TFD1

1st exit tray full detection

Paper transport de tection

13

Paper exit divergence detection

POSD

Paper transport detection

Fusing temperature detection

14

Thermistor

TH_UM/ TH_US

Fusing temperature detection

Thermostat

RDTCT

Fusing section abnormally high temperature detection

13

Paper exit divergence detection

14

Thermistor

POSD TH_UM/ TH_US

15

Thermostat

RDTCT

Fusing section abnormally high temperature detection

15

16 17

Paper in sensor 1st tray (paper tray) detection

PPD1 C1SS

Paper transport detection 1st tray (paper tray) empty detection

16

Paper in sensor

PPD1

Paper transport detection

17

C1SS

Paper feed tray 1

C1LUD

This detector detects when the

18

1st tray (paper tray) detection Paper feed tray upper limit detector

1st tray (paper tray) empty detection This detector detects when the tray in paper feed tray reaches its upper limit. Detects paper empty in Paper feed tray 1

18

upper limit detector 19

Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector Toner density sensor

C1PED

21

Paper feed tray 2 upper limit detector

C2LUD

This detector detects when the tray in paper feed tray 2 reaches its upper limit.

22

2nd tray paper pass sensor Paper feed tray 2 paper empty detector

C2PFD

2nd tray paper pass

C2PED

Detects paper empty in Paper feed tray 2

20

23

C1LUD

tray in paper feed limit. tray 1 reaches its upper

TCS

Detects paper empty in Paper feed tray 1 Detects the toner density in the developing unit.

19

Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector

C1PED

20

Toner density sensor

TCS


Detects the toner density in the developing unit.

: ‘15/Aug.

1

8. Switch 1

B. MX-M265N/M265U


1

1

3

4

2

2

No.

Name

1

Power switch

2

Side door/Front cover switch

3 4

Code

Function and operation

MAIN SW

Turns ON/OFF the main power source.

DSWR/ DSWF

Side door/Front cover open detection

2nd tray (paper tray) detection

C2SS

2nd tray (paper tray) empty detection

2nd side door cover switch

DSW_C2

No. 1 2

Name Power switch Side door/Front cover switch

Code MAIN SW DSWR/ DSWF

Side d oor open d etection


Function and operation Turns ON/OFF the main power source. Side door/Front cover open detection

: ‘15/Aug.

1

9. Sole noid/Clutch 1

B. MX-M265N/M265U


6

4

4

2 1

2 1

3

3

7

5

5

No. 1

Name

Code

1st tray paper feed clutch PSclutch

C1PUC

3

Manual paper feed clutch

MPFC

4

Paper exit gate switching solenoid (Option) Separation pawl solenoid 2nd tray paper feed clutch

POGS1

Paper feed transfer clutch

2

5 6 7

RRC

Function and operation Paper feed roller drive Mainunitpaperfeed

No. 1 2

Name 1st tray paper feed clutch PSclutch

Code C1PUC RRC

Manual paper feed cl utch

3

Manual paper feed clutch

MPFC

Paper exit gate switcher

4

Paper exit gate switching solenoid (Option)

POGS1

Separation pawl operation solenoid Paper feed roller drive

5

Separation pawl solenoid

C2PUC PTRC2

Paper feed transfer clutch

PSPS

PSPS


Function and operation Paper feed roller drive Mainunitpaperfeed Manual paper feed cl utch Paper exit gate switcher

Separation pawl operation solenoid

: ‘15/Aug.

1

10. Drive mot or 1

B. MX-M265N/M265U


2

2

8

8

7

7

5

5

6

6

3

3

4

4

9

1

1

No.

Name

Code


No.

Name

1

Polygon motor

Drivesthe polygon mirror

1

Polygon motor

2

Scanmotor

MIM

Drivesthescannerunit

2

Scanmotor

3

ADUmotor

ADUM

Reversepassforpaper transport

3

ADUmotor Tray liftmotor

PM

Code PM MIM ADUM

Function and operation Drivesthe polygon mirror Drivesthescannerunit Reversepassforpaper transport

4

Tray lift motor

C1LUM

Tray paperlift

4

5 6

Mainmotor Tonermotor

MM TNM

Maindrive Tonersupply

5 6

Mainmotor Tonermotor

MM TNM

Maindrive Tonersupply

7

Shiftermotor

OSM

Shifterdrive

7

Shiftermotor

OSM

Shifterdrive

8

Paper exit reverse motor

POM

Duplex paper switching and exit motor

8

Paper exit reverse motor

POM

Duplex paper switching and exit motor

9

Tray lift motor

C2LUM

C1LUM

Tray paper lift

Tray paperlift


: ‘15/Aug.

1

11. Lamp 1

B. MX-M265N/M265U


No. 1 2

Name Copylamp Heaterlamp


1

1

2

2

No.

Name


Imageexposurelamp

1

Copylamp

Imageexposurelamp

Fusingheatlamp

2

Heaterlamp

Fusingheatlamp


: ‘15/Aug.

1

12. Fan/Filt er 1

B. MX-M265N/M265U


2 2 5 5

3

3 6*1 4

4

1 1

No.

Name

1 2 3

DV cooling duct Power supply cooling fan 1 Ozone e xhaust f an

4

Paper e xit cooling

5

fan Ozonefilter

6*1

Ozonefilter


No.

Name

Cools the inside of the unit. Cools the inside of the unit.

1 2

DV cooling duct Power supply cooling fan 1

OZFM

Cools the inside of the machine and discharges the ozone.

3

Ozone e xhaust f an

OZFM

FUFM

Cools the fusing section and

4

Paper exit cooling fan

FUFM

the paper exit section. Absorbsozonegeneratedin the image process section. Takeinanodortoexhaust.

5

Ozonefilter

Code LSUFM PSFM1

Code LSUFM PSFM1

*1:Destination North America and Mexico only


Function and operation Cools the inside of the unit. Cools the inside of the unit. Cools the inside of the machine and discharges the ozone. Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section. Absorbsozonegeneratedin the image process section.

: ‘15/Aug.

1

13. PWB B. MX-M265N/M265U


1

8

8

13

13

9

9

6

6

10

10 4 1

7

7

4 1 5

5 12

12

2

2

3 14

11

3 14

11

15

No. 1

Name CCD PWB

Function and operation Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.

No. 1

Name CCD PWB

Function and operation Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.

2

High voltage PWB

High voltage control

2

High voltage PWB

3

KEY PWB

Outputs the key operation signal.

3

KEY PWB

Outputs the key operation signal.

LED drive PWB

Copy lamp control

High voltage control

4

LED drive PWB

Copy lamp control

4

5

LED PWB-F

Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to read a manuscript image.

5

LED PWB-F


6

LED P WB-R


6

LED PWB-R

7

LVDS PWB

Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel.

7

LVDS PWB

8

MFP control PWB

Controls image data (compression, decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.

8

MFP control PWB

Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to read a manuscript image. Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel. Controls image data (compression, decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.

9

ORS LED PWB

Drives the LED for the document size detection.

9

ORS LED PWB

10 11

ORS-PD PWB PCU PWB

Outputs the document size detection signal. Controls the engine section.

10

ORS-PD PWB

Drives the LED for the document size detection. Outputs the document size detection signal.

11

PCU PWB

Controls the engine section.

12

DC voltage control

12

13

DC power supply PWB SCN CNT PWB

13

DC power supply PWB SCN CNT PWB

14

USBI/FPWB

14

USBI/FPWB

15

Tray interface PWB

Controls the scanner and the operation section. USBI/F

DC voltage control Controls the scanner and the operation section. USBI/F

2nd tray control


: ‘15/Aug.

1

14. Rol ler 1


11

1

1

2

2

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

7 8

12 13

9

14 15 16

B. MX-M265N/M265U

10 17 18

11

7 8

12 13

9

14 15 16

10

1920 21

No. 1

Name Paper exit roller


No.

Name


Paper exit roller

1

Paper exit roller

Paper exit roller

Paper exit follower roller Transport roller

Paper exit roller

2

Paper exit follower roller

Paper exit roller

2

3 4

Transport roller Transport follower roller

Paper transport roller Paper transport roller

3 4

Transport follower roller

Paper transport roller

5

Upper heat roller

Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon roller)

5

Upper heat roller

6

Lower heat roller

6

Lower heat roller

7

DUP transport follower roller

Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone rubber roller) Duplex paper transport

Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon roller) Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone rubber roller)

7

DUP transport follower roller

Duplex paper transport

8

DUP transport roller


8

DUP transport roller


9

Bypass tray paper pick up roller Bypass tray separation roller

Picks up paper in bypass tray.

9

Bypass tray paper pick up roller

Picks up paper in bypass tray.

Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (Bypass tray)

10

Bypass tray separation roller

Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (Bypass tray)

Transport roller

Transfer images on the drum onto paper.

10


11

Transport roller

Transfer images on the drum onto paper.

11

12

Resist follower roller

Synchronize the paper lead edge with the image lead edge.

12

Resist follower roller

Synchronize the paper lead edge with the image lead edge.

13

Resist roller

Synchronize the paper l ead e dge with the image lead edge.

13

Resist roller

Synchronize the paper lead edge w ith the image lead edge.

14

1st tray pick-up roller

Picks up paper from the tray.

15

1st tray paper feed roller 1st tray separation roller

Transports the picked up paper to RESIST section. Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (1st tray)

14 15

1st tray pick-up roller 1st tray paper feed roller

Picks up paper from the tray. Transports the picked up paper to RESIST section.

16

1st tray separation roller

Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (1st tray)

17

Transport follower roller


18 19

Transport roller 2nd tray pick-up roller

Paper transport roller Picks up paper from the tray.

20

2nd tray separation roller

Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (1st tray)

21

2nd tray paper feed roller

Transports the picked up paper to RESIST section.

16


MX-M316N

[5] ADJUS TMENTS AND SETTINGS

Service Manual

1. General Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.

Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number must be observed.

However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.

If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would not complete normally or trouble may occur.

2. Ad ju st ment i tem li st Job No. ADJ 1

Adjust the developing unit

ADJ 2

High voltage values check

ADJ 3

ADJ 4

Image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image offcenter, image magnification ratio adjustment (Automatic adjustment) Scan image distortion adjustment (Document table mode)

1A 1B

Adjustment item list Developing doctor gap adjustment MG roller main pole position adjustment

1C

Tonerdensitycontrolreferencevaluesetting

2A

Check the main charger grid voltage

2B

Check the developing bias voltage

2C 3A

Transfer current adjustment Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray)

3B

Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode) Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)

3C 4A

Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment

4B

Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment

ADJ 5 ADJ 6

Scan image focus adjustment

ADJ 7

Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode)

ADJ 8

Image density adjustment

ADJ 10

25-2 8-2 8-1

4C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode)

ADJ 9

Simulation

8-6 50-28 50-28 50-28

64-2 48-1 50-5

8A

Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)

8B

Copy / Image send / FAX image quality adjustment (Individual

8B (1)

Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)

46-2

adjustment)

8B (2)

Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set)

46-19

8B (3)

Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)

46-32

8B (4)

46-63

8B (5)

Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally) (Effective only for the color scan function) Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)

8B (6)

RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust normally)

Paper size sensor adjustment

9A

Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment

9B

RSPFpaperfeedtraydocumentsize(width)sensoradjustment

Document size detection adjustment

10A

Documentsizesensordetectionpointadjustment

10B

Adjustthesensitivityoftheoriginalsizesensor

63-3 (63-5)

46-37 46-9 40-2 53-6 41-1

41-2

ADJ 11

Touch panel coordinate setting

ADJ 12

Print image position, void area, off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)

12A

Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)

50-10/50-1

12B

Print image off-centeradjustment(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)

50-10

Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)

13A

Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

13B

Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

13C

Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)

ADJ 13

65-1

13D

Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)

ADJ 14

Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)

14A

Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

14B

Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)

ADJ 15

Copy image position and image loss adjustment (Manual adjustment)

15A 15B

Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPFmode)

15C

Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)

ADJ 16

Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position)

MX-M316N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

48-1 48-1/48-5 48-1 48-1 50-12 50-12/50-6 50-1 53-8 50-6 3-10

: ‘15/Aug.

1

3. Details of a dju stm ent

ADJ 1 Ad ju st th e develo pi ng un it 1-A 1)

Developing doctor gap adjustment

Remove the doctor cover.

A 9.1mm

1-C

Toner density contr ol reference value setting

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 2) 3)

Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A. Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three screws on the developing doctor as shown.

* When developer is replaced. CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. 1)

Toner cartridge installation Shake the toner cartridge 4 - 5 times horiz ontally.

1 Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner density control reference value setting) Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe of the process UN may be locked.

R A

C A

F A

4)

Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.

5)

Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock.

CAUTION: This is performed only when a new toner cartridge is installed.

4

5



* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scrat ch the developing doctor and the MG roller.

Developing doctor gap +0.1mm

F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm

1-B

MG roller main pole position adjustment

1)

Put the developing unit on a flat surface.

2)

Tie a needle or pin on a string.

3)

Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjustment.)

4)

Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip.

5)

Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 9.1mm. If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

2)

Press the lock release lever and insert it along the guide in the machine until it locks securely.

CAUTION: Before installation, clean and remove dust and dirt from the toner cartridge. 3)

With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.


  

 



4)

Close the front cabinet.

5)

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, [EXECUTE] key is h ighlighted (in black) and the developer adjustment is started. (The adjustment is automatically performed for 3 minutes.)

6)

When the developer adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal state (in white), and the developer adjustment value is displayed.

     





CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment result is not reflected. 

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.



EXECUTE

If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.

EXECUTE

or INTERRUPT   



Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and perform setting again.



   





Error display

Errorname

EE-EL

EL abnormality

Sensor output level than 78

EE-EU

EU abnormality

Sensor output level over 178

7) 



Cancel SIM25-2 with [CA] key.

CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.

Adjustment completed

  





     









Abnormal end   





   







Detailoferror




: ‘15/Aug.

1

3)

ADJ 2 High vol tage values check

Enter the main charger values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ ON. When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved.

2-A

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec.

Check the ma in charger gri d voltage setting

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

This check must be performed in the following cases:

Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five seconds)

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is rep laced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 1)

Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.        





 

2-B

Check the deve lopin g bias vol tage setting

This check must be performed in the following cases:

          

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is rep laced.

    

* U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 1)

Enter the SIM 8-1 mode.

 







 





        



UTE

 

     

    

OK

  





        



 

      

    







OK

 







 





        



2)

1

Butt on TS_ OFF

TS_ ON

 

     

    

Select an item to be checked. Setting range

Default value

Item

Display

Content

A

COPY GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-750

26 31 35 575 575 605

B

PRINTER FAX GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a Print/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-750

575

575

605

A

COPY GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)

0-750

495

495

495

B

PRINTER GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)

0-750

425

425

425






 



1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

2)

Select an item to be checked.

Butt on

1

TS_ OFF

Item A

B

TS_ ON

A

B

3)

Display COPY DVB

PRINTER FAX DVB

COPY DVB

PRINTER DVB

Content

2-C Setting range

Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-650

Developing bias set value in a Print/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-650

Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)

0-650

Developing bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)

0-650

Transfer curr ent adjustment

Default value

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:

26

* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.

400

31 400

35 430

* U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.

400

400

1)

430

Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.  







   

320

320





320

    

250

250

250

Enter the developing bias values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ ON.

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

    

10-key

When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved.

EXECUTE

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec.

EXECUTE

or after 30 sec.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

1



Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five seconds)

 







   





    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

   

 

    

2)



Select an item to be adjusted. Item/Display

1 A B

TC PLAIN SPX W TC PLAIN DPX W

Content Primary transfer bias reference value

Default value

Setting range

26

31

35

5 - 35 16

18 16

18

20

Plain paper Front surface Back surface 35- 5 16

C

TC PLAIN SPX N1

Front surface 35- 5

22

22

24

D

TC PLAIN DPX N1

Back surface 35- 5

20

20

22

E

TC PLAIN SPX N2

F

TCPLAINDPXN2

GT HEAVY1 C W H HEAVY1 TC N1

Front surface 35- 5

352 OHP

N1 K OHPTC N2 L OHPTC MT

ENVELOPE C W

N

ENVELOPE TC N1

O P

ENVELOPE TC N2 THIN TC W

35 35

T LABEL N1TC U LABEL N2TC

52

16 20

22

24

10

10

41 41 35- 5

4 4 14

14

16

518

18

20

35 - 522 35 - 5 14

22 14

24 16

35

-

35

-

185 225

Label paper

35 - 5 35 35

24

14 18

- 1415 - 1415

Thin paper

28 24

14

10 5

35 -

RN2 THIN TC LABEL CW

-

Envelope

QN1 THIN TC ST

35

26 5-35

35- 5 351 58

I HEAVY1 TC N2 JW OHP TC

26

Backsurface Heavy paper

-

18 5 22 5


18 22 14

20 24 14

18 22

16 20 24

26

: ‘15/Aug.

1

Item/Display

1 V

TCTABW

Primarytransferbiasreferencevalue

Tabpaper

N1 WTABTC N2 X TABTC Y Z

Default value

Setting range

Content

POSTCARD TC N2 ADSORPTION TC W

535 -

14

35

- 1815

82

35

- 2225

22

Post card

35- 5 100- 0 50

26 14

31

35

26

24

16

0 4 26 50

50

AA

TC ADSORPTION N1

0 - 100

50

50

50

AB

TC ADSORPTION N2

0 - 100

50

50

50

AC

TC INTERVAL BIAS W

0 - 100

50

50

50

AD

TC INTERVAL BIAS N1

0 - 100

50

50

50

AE

TC INTERVAL BIAS N2

0 - 100

50

50

50

AF

TC FRONTEDGE

0 - 100

60

60

60

AG

TC BACKEND SPX

0 - 100

90

90

90

AH

TC BACKEND DPX

0 - 100

80

80

80

3)

Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the electric current entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped. By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.

ADJ 3 Image lead edge positi on, image loss , void area, image off-center, image magnification ratio adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

3-A

1)

Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engin e) (Each paper feed tray)

Enter the SIM50-28 mode.   



  

The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with SIM50-28.



 

 

 



* ADJ 12 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, offcenter adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) * ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment) * ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)



* ADJ 15 Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Manual adjustment)

2)

Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.

3)

Select [ALL] with the key.

Menu in SIM50-28 mode  Display/Item OC ADJ SPF ADJ

Content Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)

SETUP/ PRINT ADJ RESULT

Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment Adjustment result display

DATA

Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

 





    







CAUTION: By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can be executed individually. * [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment * [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are executed simultaneously.


4)

Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

3-B 

 





     











1)

Copy mode im age le ad edge positio n, image loss, v oid area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnifica tion ratio automatic adju stment (Scanner) (Document table mode)

Enter the SIM50-28 mode.   



  



 



 



 

5)



Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed out.

6)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide. In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjustment pattern.



2)

Select [OC ADJ] with the key.

3)

Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key. (Any paper size will do.)   





    









4)



Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed out.

7)

Press [EXECUTE] key.

5)

The following item is automatically adjustment.

CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.

* Print image lead edge image position adjustment

In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjustment pattern.

* Print image off-center adjustment 8)


Press [OK] key. The adjustment result becomes valid.

Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.


6)


2)

Press the [SPF ADJ] key. 

 

 

 







   

     





  







3)

The following item is automatically adjustment. * Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 7)

SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side

Press [OK] key.

ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides

The adjustment result becomes valid.

4)

Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)

5)

Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of RSPF adjustment patterns.

  

Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corresponding button:





         

* The screen shows a messag e indicating that the machine is self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns. When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you can start RSPF adjustments. 6)

RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. (Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)



3-C

1)

Copy mode image lead e dge posit ion, image loss, v oid area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnifica tion ratio automatic adju stment (Scanner) (RSPF mo de)

Enter the SIM50-28 mode.   



  



 

 

 



* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print RSPF adjustment patterns again. 7) 

Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). * The screen shows a messag e indicating that the machine is reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). The machine thepatterns adjustment amount (for the front side) starts after itcalculating has read the for the front side. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment amount for the front side, the next screen appears where you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).


Adju st ment It em Lis t * RSPF srcinal leading edge adjustment (front side)

ADJ 4 Scan im age distortion adjustment (Docum ent table mode)

* RSPF srcinal off-center adjustment (front side) * RSPF srcinal sub-scan magnification adjustment (front side) 8)

RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. (Set so that the pattern surface faces down.)

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the copy image is distorted.

4-A

Scanner (rea ding) u nit parallelism adjustment

Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table glass. 1)

Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scanner unit A from the drive wire.

2)

Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner

* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print RSPF adjustment patterns again. 9)

Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment amount for the back side, the next screen appears where you can view the results of the adjustments. Adju st ment It em Lis t * RSPF srcinal leading edge adjustment (back side) * RSPF srcinal off-center adjustment (back side)

unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and the rear fr ames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.

* RSPF srcinal sub-scan magnification adjustment (back side) 10) The adjustment result screen appears. This screen shows the current values along with the previous values in parentheses. * By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides) again. * To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key. * To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key. * To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA] key. 11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and

If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

return to the top menu, press the [OK] key. * To return to the res ult screen, press the [BACK] ke y.


3)

Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B.

4)

Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.

5)

Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B. If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures. Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which is not in contact.

6)

With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.

4-B 1)

Scan image (sub scanning di rection) distortion adjustme nt

Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)

Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.

L

L

L

L = 10mm L

2)

Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference position as shown below.) With the document cover open, make a copy on A 3 (11" x 17") paper.

30mm


3)

Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

4-C

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.

La

Lb

1)

Scan image ( main scannin g directio n) distortion adjustme nt

Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)

L

L

L If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform the following procedures. 4)

Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will

L = 10mm

do.)

L 2)

Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.

3)

Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is completed.)

If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform the following procedure. 5)

Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)

6)

Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.

Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3) is satisfied.

4)

Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand and right-hand side images distortions.

Lc

Lc

Copy A

Copy B

Ld There is no difference between the distortion on the right and that on the left. LcLd

Ld There is some difference between the distortion on the right and that on the left.

If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment.

LcLd

If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right. (The distortions are balanced.) If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6). If not, perform the following procedures.


5)

Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front frame side.

2)

Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment chart is at the edge). ? Check with one of the follow ing methods. Check Method 1 (Front side) Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A

B

a

b

Check Method 2 Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0mm.

Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. 6)

Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front frame side, change the overall height.

7)

Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the specified range.

0 - 1.0mm

A

Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range.

ADJ 5 Scanner i mage skew adjustm ent (RSP F mod e)

If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the procedure 3).

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * The RSPF section has been disassembled. * When replacing the RSPF unit.

3)

Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.

4)

Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew adjustment.

5)

Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =  1mm or less) is satisfied.

* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. 1)

Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the selfprint pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2. SIM 64-2 set values A = 1,

B = 1,

C = 254,

D = 255

Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with the paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to the leading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge section.

A

Paper pass direction

B


4)

ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. * The CCD unit has been replaced.

5)

Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale length in terms of length.

6)

Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main scanning direction from the following formula.

* When the copy image focus is not pr operly adjusted.

Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%

* When the copy magnification ratio in the cop y image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.

(Example) Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the copy image.

* U2 trouble has occurred. 1)


Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

  



Make a normal copy on A4 paper.



 

    



  



  



  



  



  



  

100mm (Orignal)scale

10

20

90

100 1 10

1.0mm 

2)

Copy image (1mm (1%) shorter than the srcinal)

Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value). Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

3)

10

20

90

100 1 10

Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the following procedures. 7)

Remove the document table glass.

8)

Remove the dark box cover.

9)

To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the CCD unit base as s hown below.

NOTE: MEMO: This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is replaced.


10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.

ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the registration roller sect ion is disasse mbled. * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. NOTE: This adjustment is perf ormed by the user to incre ase the lead edge void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer mode. 1)

Enter the SIM 50-5 mode.   





   

CAUTION: Never loosen the screws marked with X.

    

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced. 11) Slide the CCD un it in the arrow directi on (CCD sub scann ing direction) to change the installing position.



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   



   

When the copy image is longer than the srcinal scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter than the srcinal scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.

10-key



EXECUTE

One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%. EXECUTE

At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in paral lel with the lin e marked in procedure 9).

End of print 

 





   

    

B



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   



   



A

2)

Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in it.

12) Make a copy and che ck the copy magn ification ratio again. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%, repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied. CAUTION: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.

Display/Item A

DEN-C

Content

Setting range

Default

Printer lead edge image position adjustment Rearedgevoidarea adjustment

1-99

30

B

DEN-B

1-99

30

C

FRONT/REAR

FRONT/REAR void area adjustment

1-99

20

D

DENB-MFT

Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value

1-99

57

E

DENB-CS1

1-99

50

F

DENB-CS2

Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value

1-99

57

G

DENB-CS3

57

DENB-CS4

Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment correction value

1-99

H

1-99

57

I

DENB-ADU

ADU rear edge void area adjustment correction value

1-99

60


Display/Item J

DENB-HV

Heavy paper correction value

K

MULTICOUNT

L

PAPER

M

DUPLEX

MFT

4)

Numberofprint Tray selection

1-999 Manual paper feed

1 2 3

CS3

Tray 3

4

CS4 YES

Tray 4 Yes

01

No

2(CS1)

ADJ 8 Image density adjustment Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG0326FC11), and check that they are proper. Note for checking the monochrome copy

Tray 1 Tray 2

Duplex print selection

Default 50 1

1-5

CS1 CS2

NO

3)

Setting range 1-99

Content

mode density

To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual).

5 0

1(NO) 1


In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center). Check wit h th e gray test c hart (UKOG-0 162FCZZ)

The adjustment pattern is printed.

In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure the following conditions.

Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is

CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.

in the standard adjustment value range. Standard adjustment value: 4.0mm or less

(Black-and-white copy) Patch 2 is slightly copied. 123456789

Patch 3 is copied. Patch 1 is not copied.

4.0mm or less

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. 5)

Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the s croll key.

6)

Change the adjustment value. Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.

Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.


SHARP gray chart

SHARP GRAY CHART 10

W

Monochrome copy check items (C

heck to confirm

the following:)

1)

There are 12 void areas.

2)

The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen.

3)

The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so great.

4)

There are no white and black streaks.

5)

The background density is not so light.

6)

The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.

Void

Void Resolution

Resolution

Density difference between the F and the R sides. No white and black streaks

Resolution

Void

Void

Low-density gradation

Background density

Resolution

Resolution

Void

Void


8-A

Scanner calibration

(CCD calibration )

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the CCD unit is replaced.

2)

Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.

* When a U2 trouble is occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

  





            

(1) Note before adjustme nt ? Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.) ? Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from dirt and scratches. If they are dirty, clean them. If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.



(2) Adjustme nt procedure s 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table. Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on the left side.



NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG- 0280FCZZ or UKOG-028 0FC Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature and low humidity.

If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment method using the SIT chart. CAUTION: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document table. NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-028 0FCZ1.


8-B

Copy / Image send / FAX image quality adjustment (Individual adjustment)

a. General This is used to execute a fine adjustment in each mode when there is a request from the user. Normally, however, there is no need to use it. In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode. This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment. Copy MODE Monochrome mode Au to

IMAGESEND(SCAN)MODE Color mode Monochrome mode

Manual

Au to

Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode) (separately for the lowdensity area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)

46-04

Color image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)

－－○○－－－－

46-05

Monochrome image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)

－－－－○○－－

46-08

Image send mode RGB color balance adjustment (separately for the low-density area and the highdensity area) (No need to adjust normally)

－－○○－－－－

46-09

RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust normally)

○○○○○○○－

46-19

Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set) Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/ FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)

○－－－○－○－

46-37

Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)

○○－－○○○－

46-39 46-40

FAX send image sharpness adjustment FAX send image density adjustment (Collective adjustment of all the modes)

46-41 46-42 46-43

FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) －－－ FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) －－－ FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) －－

46-44

FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode)

－－－

46-45 46-47

FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) Copy image, image send image, FAX send image (JPEG) compression ratio setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)

－－－－－－○－

46-60

Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No need to adjust normally)

－－○－－－－○

46-61

Area separation recognition level adjustment (No need to adjust normally) ACS, area separation, background image process, automatic exposure mode operation conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)

○

Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)

－－○○○○－－

46-32

46-62

46-63

○

Manual

Au to

Manual

FAX

Pri nter

○

－

－

○－－－－－－

46-02

○－－－○－○－

－

－

－

－

－

－

○

－

－－－－－－○－

－－－－－－

○ ○－

－－

○－

－－－－－

－

○－

○○○○○○○－

○

(*1)

○

○

(*1)

－－○○○○－－

*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only


○

(*1)

8-B

(1) Monochrome copy density adjustme nt (for ea ch monoc hrom e copy mode) (sepa rately for the low-density area a nd t he high-density area) (No need to adjust no rmally)

The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.

Display/Item

* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the copy by each the copy mode individually.

AUTO1 (COPY TO COPY)

Auto 1 (Copy document)

LOW

1-99

50

J

AUTO2 (COPY TO COPY)

Auto 2 (Copy document)

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH

1-99

50

K

TEXT (COPY TO COPY)

Text (Copy document)

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH

1-99

50

L

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) TEXT/PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)

Text/Printed Photo (Copy document) Text/Photograph (Copy document)

LOW HIGH

1-99 1-99

50 50

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH

1-99

50

M

3)

* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the copy mode individually. Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.



Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

mode and change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.

  

HIGH

50

When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"

* When there is request from the user. 1)

Default

I

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low density and high density part at each copy density individually.

Setting range 1-99

Content



 

4)

            

Make a copy and check the adjustment result. Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the test mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.

            

Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the test mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

            

8-B 





 OK

  



Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for document density in monochrome auto copy mode.



     

    

(2) Au to mat ic mo no ch ro me (Co py /Scan /FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no n eed to set)



  



  



   



  



   



  



  

When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of document, change the setting. This setting is required in the following cases. * When a proper density copy is not obt ained in the monochrome automatic copy mode. * When a document with images near its lead edge is co pied. * When a document with colored background is copied. 1)

Enter the SIM 46-19 mode. 







 





  

2)

Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Display/Item

Content



Setting range

Default

1 - 99

50

A

AUTO1

Auto 1

LOW

B

AUTO2

Auto 2

EXT

Text

LOW 99 -1 HIGH 1-99 LOW HIGH LOW

1-99 1-99 1-99

50 50 50

HIGH

1-99

50

HIGH LOW HIGH CT

1-99 99 -1

















































 

50 50

1-99

50 50 50 

D

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text/Printed Photo

E

TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph

F

PRINTEDPHOTO

G

PHOTOGRAPH

HM

AP

PrintedPhoto

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH

1-99

50

Photograph

LOW HIGH

1-99 1-99

50 50

Map

LOW 99- 1 HIGH

1-99

50 50

2)

Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART", in s ome cases. Content

Setvalue

Default

AE_MODE

Display/Item

Auto exposure mode

MODE1, MODE2

MODE2

AE_STOP_COPY

Auto B/W exposure Stop (for copy)

REALTIME/ STOP/PRESCAN

STOP


Display/Item

Content

AE_STOP_FAX

Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX)

AE_STOP_SCAN

Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner) Auto exposure filter setting

AE_FILTER

Set v alue ON/OFF

Default

Document table/RSPF mode

ON 3 to 7mm

REALTIME/ STOP/PRESCAN SOFT

STOP NORMAL

NORMAL SHARP

AE_WIDTH

AE exposure width

FULL

PART

AE WIDTH = FULL

PART

NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contras t) MODE2: Normal gamma STOP: Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document, decides the output image density according to the density of that part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)

Document table mode

3 to 7mm

REALTIME: Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides the output image density according to the density of each part of the document. (The output image density may be not constant at whole area.)

100mm

AE WIDTH = PART

PRESCAN: Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the output image density is determined according to the average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the surface.)

RSPF mode

AE WIDTH FULL: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship to PRESCAN MODE

3 to 7mm

AE WIDTH PART: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship to PRESCAN MODE

100mm

AE WIDTH = PART

Operation in monochr ome auto copy mode: When the density of the document of the read area is light, output image density is increased by control. When the density of the document of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased by control. Document density detection area

8-B

(3) Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automa tic monoc hrome (Copy/Scan/F AX) mod e (No need to a djust normally ) (Backgrou nd density adjustme nt in the scanning section)

Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background density in monochrome auto copy mode. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When there is a desire no t to reproduce the background of the document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of the document. * When there is request from the user. 1)



 

 



    

 

 



     



    



     

    



    

    



    

    



    



    



   



      



       



     



    

              



  

    

    

   





10-key

10-key

OK

OK

  





  

            





  

    

    

               



    



   



    



   



   



   



   



    



     



      



    



   



2)

Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

3)

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.

A

Display/Item COPY : OC

B

Content Copy mode (for OC)

Setvalue 1 - 250

Default 196

COPY:RSPF

Copymode(forRSPF)

1-250

196

C

SCAN:OC

Scannermode(forOC)

1-250

196

D

SCAN : RSPF

Scanner mode (for RSPF)

E

FAX:OC

FAXmode(forOC)

F

FAX:RSPF

FAXmode(forRSPF)

8-B

1 - 250 1-250 1-250

196 196 196

(4) Copy/Sca n low densit y image density adjustment (for each mod e) (No need to adjust nor mally) (E ffective only for the color scan function)

This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low density area in the scanner mode. This adjustment is required in the following cases. * When there is a desire not to reprod uce the background of the document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of the document. * When there is request from the user. 1)



  



2)

Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Display/Item

Set value

Content

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

B

COLORCOPY:TEXT

C

COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO

Printed photo (color copy)

9-1

5

D

COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH

Photograph (color copy)

9-1

5

E

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO

F G

COLORCOPY:MAP COLOR COPY : LIGHT

H

Text print (color copy)

Default

A

Text(colorcopy)

1-9 1-9

Text/Photograph (color copy)

3 3

9-1

3

1-9 9-1

5 6

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)

Copy document, 9-1 Text print (color copy)

5

Map(colorcopy) Light document (color copy)

I

COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY)

Copy document, Text (color copy)

9-1

5

J

COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)

Copy document, Printed photo (color copy)

9-1

5

K

COLOR PUSH : TEXT/ PRINTED PHOTO

Text print (color PUSH)

9-1

3

L M

COLORPUSH:TEXT COLOR PUSH : PRINTED PHOTO

Text(colorPUSH) Printed photo (color PUSH)

1-9 9-1

3 5

N

COLOR PUSH : PHOTOGRAPH COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PHOTO COLORPUSH:MAP

Photograph (color PUSH) Text/Photograph (color PUSH) Map(colorPUSH)

9-1

5

9-1

3

O P

1-9

5

* Items A - J are not us ed. (Changes do not affect the picture quality.) 3)

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.


8-B

(5) Monochro me (Copy/Sca n/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustme nt (No need to adjust no rmally)

Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow image when printing color document that included the red/yellow image in monochrome copy mode.

2)

R-Ratio

Gray making setting (R)

B

G-Ratio

Graymakingsetting(G)

3)

     

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

Press [OK] key. Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode (manual), check the copy. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 mode and change the adjustment value.

   



Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

    

8-B   









10-key DEFAULT

 



   

This setting is normally not required, however, in the following cases, make changes to the setting:

* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high. * When the RSPF unit is replaced.

    

(6) RSPF mod e (Copy /Scan/FAX) densi ty adjustment (No nee d to adjust n ormally)

* When copy in RSPF mode dif fers from copy in document table mode.

OK

 

108 678

5) 



0-1000

4) 



Default

0 - 1000

When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.

* When there is request from the user.

 

Adj ust ment range

When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.

* When there is desire to change rep roducibility of yellow /red image in case of making a color copy of the color document in monochrome copy mode. Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.

Content

A

This adjustment is required in the following cases.

1)

Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Display/Item (Copy mode)

  

* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.

    

* The CCD unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * When the MFP PWB is re placed. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. a. Adjustme nt pro cedu re   







1)



EXECUTE


NO  

  









  



  

    

  



  



  

    

    

C

  

D

  



  

F

  

   









10-key YES

OK

  







   

     

    

  

    

    



  







  



  

C



  

D

  



  

F

  






2)

Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

1)

When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D (COPY HIGH)".

Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.   





    

Item/Display A

COPY : LOW

B

SCAN : LOW

C

FAX : LOW

D

COPY : HIGH

E F

3)

Setting range

Content

   

Default

RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)

1-99

48

1-99

48

RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (High density side)

1-99

48

1-99

53

SCAN : HIGH

RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)

1-99

53

FAX : HIGH

RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (High density side)

1-99

53



EXECUTE

 

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.







  

In case of increase of image density, input large numeric value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small numeric value. 4)

Press [OK] key.

5)

Make a copy in the R SPF mode and check the c opy.

  

If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. 

ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjus tment

  





    

9-A

Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment

   

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * The manual paper feed tray section ha s been disasse mbled. * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The PCU PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.



EXECUTE

Repeat the above procedure to adjust the A5R width MIN POSITION.

  





   




2)

Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.

9-B

RSPF pape r f eed t ray doc ument s ize (width) sensor adjustment

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * The RSPF paper feed tray sec tion has been disassembled. * The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * When a U2 trouble occurs. * The scanner PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. 1)

Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.   

3)





     


   

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. The maximum width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized. 4)

Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.

5)

Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. The A4R size width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized.

6)

Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.

7)




2)

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width position.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The maximum width detection level is recognized.

4)

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.

5)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The A4R width detection level is recognized.

6)

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.

7)


8)

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width position.

9)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The minimum width detection level is recognized.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size. 8)

Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.

9)

Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal display. The minimum width position detection level of the manual

paper feed guide is recognized. If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When the operation is completed normally, the above data are saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

When each of the above operations has been completed, the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.


10-B Ad ju st th e sen si ti vi ty of th e or ig in al s ize sensor

ADJ 10 Document size detection adjustment

1)

Enter the SIM41-2 mode.




* When the srcinal size sensor section has bee n disassembled.  

* When the srcinal size sensor section has bee n replaced.





                    

* When U2 trouble has occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

10-A Document size sensor detection poi nt adjustment 1)




  



EXECUTE



   















  





                     



Loosen the srcinal cover switch actuator adjustment screw and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is 20.2 +/- 0.25mm by slowly tilting the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust. (If the ON timing of the srcinal cover switch is shifted, the document detection function may malfunction.)



Adjustment failed

Adjustment completed

EXECUTE

  





         



  

20.2





      

0.25mm





2)

Execute the sensor adjustment without document. With the document cover open, without placing a document on

3)

the table glass, press [EX ECUTE] key. Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.

If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED " is displayed.


ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting

ADJ 12 Print im age posi tio n, void area , off-cente r adjustment (Print engine) (M anual adjustm ent)

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * The operation panel has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.

NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.

* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. 1)

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjustment.


In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 3).

12-A Print image prin t area adjustment (Print engin e) (Manual adjus tment) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the LSU is replaced or removed. * When a paper tray is replaced. 2)

Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds and the display is reversed. When all the four points are pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.

* When the paper tray section is disassembled. * When the manual feed tray is replaced. * When the manual feed tray is disassembled. * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassem bled. * When the registration roller sect ion is disasse mbled.

In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again.

* U2 trouble has occurred.

Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display frame and the detection position when the touch panel is pressed.

* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.

* The PCU PWB has been replaced. 1)

* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (su ch as a needle or a pin).

Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.  





    

  





  

   



  



  



  



  



  

 

     



  

 



   



     

EXECUTE



EXECUTE

End of print   





   

 



  





  

   



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   



     



2)

Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items A J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "L" to select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing test printing.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed.


4)

Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below are in the range of the standard values. Content X Y

Standard adjustment value

Leadedgevoidarea Rearedgevoidarea

Z1/Z2

4.0mmorless 2.0-5.0mm

FRONT/REARvoidarea

Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key. Item/Display

Void area adjustment

2.0 +/-2.0mm

Z1 2.0

6)

2.0mm Sub scanning direction print area correction value

X 4.0mm or less

Y

Content

Setting range

Default value

DENA

Lead edge void area adjustment

1-99

30

DENB

Rear edge void area adjustment

1-99

30

FRONT/ REAR


1-99

20

DENB-MFT

Manual feed correction value

1-99

57

DENB-CS1 DENB-CS2

Tray 1 correction value Tray 2 correction value

1 - 99 1 - 99

50 57

DENB-CS3

Tray 3 correction value

1 - 99

57

DENB-CS4


1 - 99

57

DENB-ADU DENB-HV

ADU correction value Heavy paper correction value

1 - 99 1-99

60 50

2.0 - 5.0mm

When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.

Z2 2.0

NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as follows:

2.0mm

Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area

If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired condition, execute the simulation 50-1. NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. 5)






    





    

  

NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust. The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all paper feed tray. That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray. After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check that the void area is within the specified range.

           

Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.

               

Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

                


10-key

* When the LSU is replaced or removed.

OK

* When a paper tray is replaced. 

 





   



    

* When the paper tray section is disassembled. * When the manual feed tray is replaced. * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.

   



12-B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engin e) (Manual adjus tment)

* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassem bled.

       

* When the registration roller sect ion is disasse mbled.

   


       

* The PCU PWB has been replaced.

   


                

   


1)

Enter SIM 50-10 mode.

6)







   





    



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   



    

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side. When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is changed by about 0.1mm.



Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5) are satisfied.



In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating the above procedures, perform the following procedure.

EXECUTE

EXECUTE

7) End of print

 

Change the adjustment value. Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXECUTE] key.









Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).

   





    



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   



     

2)



Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key. Display/Item NO

Content

Settingrange

Not select

1

3)

Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).

4)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed.

5)

Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct position. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that all the following conditions are satisfied. RV 2.0mm

2.0mm

NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjustment. In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 3).

FV 2.0mm

2.0mm

RV: REAR VOID AREA FV: FRONT VOID AREA RV + FV +/- 4.0mm RV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm FV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. MX-M316N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 29

ADJ 13 Scan i mage ma gnific ation ratio adjustment (Manual a djus tment)

3)

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode, and make a copy. 4)


Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%). If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the c opy magnification ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following procedure.

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjustment. In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 3).

Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

5)

Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.

CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnification ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. Therefore, this adjustment must be executed only when there is a special necessity.

Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%).

13-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning directio n) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

13-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning di rection) (Ma nual adjustment) (Document table mode)


This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the copy magnification ratio in the cop y image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.

* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy imag e sub scanning direction is not properly adjusted. * When the scanner motor is replaced.

* When the scanner motor is replaced.



* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is re placed.

* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.

1)

Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.

2)


Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing position adjustment) must have been completed. 1)

Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.

  

2)

Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.   





        





 

    



  



  



  

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

         

 

 

 






3)


2)

Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.


3)

Measure the images on the copy paper and the original images.

Copy magnification ratio

(Example 1) Copy A (Shorter than the srcinal)

(Original dimension - Copy dimension) Original dimension

10

20

90

100

100%

srcinal copy

110

10

Scale (Original)

10

20

90

100

4)

150

200

250

10

50

100

150

200

250

Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following formula: Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%)

10

20

90

100

Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)

110

If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.

Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%).

If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 5)


If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following procedure. 5)

100

110

4)

(Example 2) Copy B (Longer than the srcinal)

50

  





 

Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.

    

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.



  



  



  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.0%). 

13-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)

RSPF

CCD(MAIN)

SCAN main scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)

1-99

50

B

CCD(SUB)

1-99

50

C

SPF(MAIN)

SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)

1-99

50

D

SPF(SUB)

RSPFdocumentf ront surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)

1-99

50

E

SPFB(MAIN)

1-99

50

F

SPFB(SUB)

RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan) RSPF document back

1-99

50

* When the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is repla ced. * When U2 trouble occurs. * When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy image in the main scanning direction is not proper. * When the RSPF is disassembled. a. Adjustme nt proce dure s 1)

Default value

Display

A


Content

Setting range

Item

Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the document tray of the RSPF. The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.

surface magnification adjustment (Sub scan)ratio

Paper pass direction

A4 size

6)

Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with the scroll key. SPF (MAIN)

10mm

10mm

(Both the front surface and the back surface)

SPFB (MAIN)

Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front surface) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back surface)


7)

Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

5)


When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%. 8)

  





 


Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

    



  



  



  

 

 

 

 

 

 

13-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning d irection ) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.



* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replac ed. * When U2 trouble occurs.

Content

A

CCD(MAIN)


1-99

50

B

CCD(SUB)

SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)

1-99

50

C

SPF(MAIN)

RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)

1-99

50

D

SPF(SUB)

RSPFdocumentf ront surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)

1-99

50

E

SPFB(MAIN)

RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)

1-99

50

F

SPFB(SUB)

RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)

1-99

50

Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the document tray of the RSPF. The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.

10mm Paper pass direction

A4 size 6)

10mm

Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. SPF (SUB) SPFB (SUB)

2)

Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

3)

Measure the images on the copy paper and the srcinal images.

7)

1 5 0

2 0 0

1 5 0

8)

1 0 0

1 0 0

Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10key, and press [OK] key.

When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.

5 0

5 0

Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front surface) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back surface)

When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased.

1 0

1 0

srcinal



copy

2 0 0

4)

Default value

Display

* When the RSPF is disassembled. 1)

Setting range

Item

* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.

Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following formula: Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.


3)

ADJ 14 Scan i mage off-center


adjustment (Manual a djus tment)

 





   


   



  



  



  

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjustment. In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 3). 

14-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

4)

Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.


5)

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

The entered value is set. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.

* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

6)

* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satisfied.

1)

Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the adjustment mode (document table).


14-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the scan control PWB is replaced.

A

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. A=B

* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * When U2 trouble occurs. * When the RSPF section is disassembled.

B

* When the RSPF unit is replaced. CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 14A Scan image adjustment (Document table mode) must haveoff-center been properly adjusted.

2)

1)

Check the copy image center position. If A - B =  1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.

Prepare the adjustment chart. Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back surface of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport direction. Paper transport direction

A'

Frontsurface

Backsurface

A' - B' = 1.0mm (100%) B'

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following procedures.

Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back surface of paper in parallel with the paper transport direction.


2)

Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.

3)

Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.

SIM50-6

original

Item/Display

Content Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)

B

SIDE2

Backsurface document scan position adjustment (CCD)

1-99

50

C

Image loss amount setting SIDE1

LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)

Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting

0-99

20

FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)

Front surface side image loss amount setting

0-99

20

TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)

Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting

0-99

30

LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)

Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting

0-99

20

FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)

Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting

0-99

20

0-99

30

a

b D

E 

2.7mmm there is no

If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. 4)

F

Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. G

SIM50-12


  





H

TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)

   

   



  



  



  

I

OFFSET_SPF1

RSPFfrontsurface documentoff-center adjustment

1-99

50

J

OFFSET_SPF2

1-99

50

K

SCAN_SPEED_SPF1

RSPFbacksurface documentoff-center adjustment RSPFd ocument front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)

1-99

50

L

SCAN_SPEED_SPF2

RSPF document back surface

1-99

50



SIM50-6

 

magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)







                

* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing is delayed.

           

* Item C - H: When the ad justment value is incr eased, the image loss is increased.

           

* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change

   

* The SPF rear edg e image loss set ting is provided for countermeasures against the case when shades are produced.

            

5)

Display

Content

Setting range 1-99

A

OC

Document table image offcenter adjustment

B

SPF(SIDE1)

SPF front surface image offcenter adjustment

1-99

SPF back surface image offcenter adjustment

1-99

C

SPF(SIDE2)

Default value 50

SPF(SIDE1)

Front surface mode

SPF(SIDE2)

Back surface mode

50

OFFSET SPF1

Front surface mode

OFFSET SPF2

Back surface mode

50

A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is shifted to the rear frame side. 1step = 0.1mm

Select an adj ustment mode with th e scroll key. SIM50-12

SIM50-12 Item

Default value 50

SIDE1

copy

If the difference is within the range of 0 need to perform the adjustment.

Setting range 1-99

A

SIM50-6

6)

Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. (Change for change in the adjustment v alue: 0.1mm/step) (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is shifted to the rear.)



ADJ 15 Copy image posi tio n and image

2)

Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. 

loss adjustment (Manual a djus tment)

 





   






    

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjustment. In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 3).



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



  



   

15-A Copy image position , image loss, and void area a djust ment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)

10-key OK

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the scanner (reading) section is disassem bled.

  

* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.





   

* When the LSU is replaced or removed.



  



  



  



  

* The PCU PWB has been replaced.



  



  




  



  



  



* When the registration roller sect ion is disasse mbled.



    


* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been completed normally. 1)



Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead edge can be seen.

  



   

3)

Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below. Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide plate.

  



Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE t o the default values. Item/Display

Content

A

Lead edge adjust-

RRCA

Document lead edge reference position (OC)

B

ment value

RRCB-CS12

Registration motor ON timing adjustment

C D

RRCB-DSK RRCB-MFT

E F G H I

RRCB-ADU Image loss area setting value

LEAD

Void area adjustment

DENA

J

Standard Tray

Setting range 0-99

Default value 50

1-99

50

Desk 99 -1 Manual 1-99 paper feed

50 50

ADU

1 - 99

50

Lead edge image loss area setting Sideimageloss area adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment

0-99

30

0-99

20

1-99

30

Rearedgevoidarea adjustment FRONT/REAR void area adjustment

1-99

30

FRONT/ REAR

1-99

20

SIDE

DENB

K

Off-center adjustment

OFFSET_ OC

OC document offcenter adjustment

1-99

50

L

Magnification ratio

SCAN_ SPEED_OC


1-99

50

DENB-MFT


1-99

57

DENB-CS1

Tray1correction value

1-99

50

DENB-CS2


1-99

57

DENB-CS3


1-99

57

M N O P

correction Sub scanning direction print area correction value


Item/Display Q R S

4)

Sub scanning direction print area correction value

Setting range 1-99

Content

Default value 57

DENB-CS4


DENB-ADU

ADUcorrection value

1-99

60

DENB-HV

Heavypaper correction value

1-99

50

15-B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.

Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and 200% in the document table mode.

* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * When U2 trouble occurs. * When the RSPF section is disassembled.

When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% copy scale.

* When the RSPF unit is replaced.

If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.

If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image

(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of different copy magnification ratios.) Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in the RSPF mode.

in the RSPF mode. 1) Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on the lead edge section of the copy image.

Scale image 4.0mm position Paper lead edge

Papar lead edge Image area

100%

5mm

Shadow image of RSPF

200% 10mm

5mm

If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge section of the copy image, perform the following procedures. 5)

Image loss adjustment

2)

When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, change these adjustment items.

Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.   





    



Paper lead edge

Copy area Maginification ratio : 400%

1

2

3

4

10mm

5mm



3) Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm Item/ Display LEAD

SIDE

Content Image loss adjustment

Adj ust ment range

Default value

Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

Standard adjustment value

When the set value is increased, the distance from the home position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by 0.1mm.

Lead edge image loss adjustment

99 -0

40

4.0 +/-1.0mm

Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Sideimage loss adjustment

99 -0

20

2.0 +/- 1.0mm

CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 15C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode).

When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image loss is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.


15-C Copy image positi on, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mo de)

2)

Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.   





   


       

* When the scan control PWB is replaced.

    

       

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is repla ced.

   

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassem bled.

       

* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

   

* When U2 trouble occurs.

       

* When the RSPF section is disassembled.

   

* When the RSPF unit is replaced.

    

a. Adjustme nt proce dure s 1)

Prepare the adjustment chart. The adjustment chart can be made by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification marks of the front surface and the back surface.

Item/Display A

SIDE1

B

SIDE2

FACE

C


D L

T

E Put the position marks. F F

Draw arrows.

G

BACK

H

T

50

1-99

50

LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)


0-99

20

FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)


0-99

20

TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)

Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting

0-99

30

LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)

Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting Back surface side image loss amount setting

0-99

20

0-99

20

Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting

0-99

30

FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)

I

OFFSET_SPF1

RSPFfrontsurface document offcenter adjustment

1-99

50

J

OFFSET_SPF2

RSPFback surface document off-center adjustment

1-99

50

K

SCAN_SPEED_SPF1

RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)

1-99

50

L

SCAN_SPEED_SPF2


1-99

50

Put the position marks. F

Default value

1-99

Back surface

R

L


Setting range

Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD) Backsurface document scan position adjustment (CCD)

Front surface

R

Content

Draw arrows.

* Item A, B: When th e adjustment value is incr eased, the scan timing is delayed. * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is incr eased, the image loss is increased. * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change * The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for countermeasures against the case when shades are produced.


Lead edge image loss adjustment 1)

2)

Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to the following values.

TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)

(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): 40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)

(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image loss is increased.)

TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): 40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)

2)

Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

(Change for change in the s et value: 0.1mm/step)

(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is increased.)

Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)

Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment

Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0  1.0mm on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.

1)

Paper lead edge

Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the rear frame side are 2.0  2.0mm on the front surface and the back surface. Paper F side edge

The paper lead edge must be aligned with the image lead edge.

Image loss 2.0 2.0mm Copy image

Copy image

Copy image Paper R side edge

Image loss 4.0 1.0mm

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following procedure.

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following procedure. 3)

Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

2)

Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) / FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.

Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the presumed image lead edge.

FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1): Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)

SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment

FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2): Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)

SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image position is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image loss is increased.) (Change for change in the adjustment v alue: 0.1mm/step) Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Rear edge image loss adjus tment 1)

Image loss 2.0 2.0mm

Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the front surface and the back surface. Paper rear edge

Copy image

Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following procedure. MX-M316N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 38

ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple posi tion) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the finisher is disassembled. * When the finisher control PWB is replaced. * When the alignment is improper. * When the staple position is shifted. 1)






 







   



   

    



2)

Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key. Inner finisher Item/Display

Content

A

FPAM ADJUST

Alignment width adjustment

B

FDRLM ADJUST

Paper exit roller descending position adjustment

Setting range 40 - 60 40-60

Default value 50 50

3)

Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] k ey.

4)

Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.


MX-M316N

[6] SIMULATION

Service Manual

1. Genera l and purpose The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine for improved serviceability. 1)

Various adjustments

2)

Setting of the s pecifications and functions

3)

Canceling troubles

4)

Operation check

5)

Counters check, setting, clear

6)

Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data check, clear.

7)

Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data transport.

The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of the operation panel of the machine.

2. Starting the simulation Ente ring the si mulation mode 1)

Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key  Asterisk (*) key  Clear key  Asterisk (*) key  Ready for input of main code of simulation.

2)

Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON. Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.

3)

Entering a sub code with the 10-key

4)

Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.

5)

The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simulation operation.



START key ON.

To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] k ey. Canceling the simulation mode to 1)

return to the normal mode

Press [CA] key.

CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be result. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.

MX-M316N SIMULATION 6 – 1

START (Copy mode)

Press the Program key.

Press the asterisk (*) key.

Press the clear key.

Press the Program key.

Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key

Standby for entry of SIM code. Enter the main code of SIM with the 10-key. The main code of SIM is displayed.

NO

Press the START key. YES

Standby for entry of SIM sub code

YES

You have to exit simulation mode before entering into this mode for self printing type.

Is there a sub code ? NO

Enter SIM sub code with the 10-key.

Select the mode and the item with the scroll key and the item key.

Press the START key.

NO

Is it the same simulation main code? In the power OFF/ON type simulation, OFF/ON message is Press the SYSTEM displayed by the SETTINGS key SYSTEM SETTINGS key. YES Do you want to perform another simulation ?

The simulation mode is canceled.

NO YES

If there is no item.

Operation check ?

NO

Do you want to end the simulation ?

Operation is made according to the selected mode and item.

Operating conditions check ? NO

YES

Press the EXECUTE key and OK key.

The display is made according to the selected some and the item.

YES

Data clear ?

NO

YES


Press the EXECUTE key and OK key. The selected mode and the item are cleared.

Adjustments or setting (counter data change) ?

NO

Operation is made according to the selected mode and the item. (Other modes)

The display is made according to the selected mode and the item. Do you want to change the content ?

NO

The changed content is stored.

YES

Enter the new setting and adjustment values.



YES

Press the clear all key.

3. List of simula tion code s Main Sub 1

2

3

4

Functions

Section

1 2

Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits.

5

Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit.

Scanner (reading)

1

Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.

RSPF

2

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section and the control circuits.

RSPF

3

Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.

RSPF

2

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit.

3 10

Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Used adjust to the finisher.

Scanner (reading) Scanner (reading)

Finisher Finisher Finisher

2

Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those.

3

Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those.

1 2

Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Usedtochecktheoperationoftheheaterlampandthecontrolcircuit.

3

Used to checkthe operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit.

1

Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.

2

Usedtochecktheoperationsofeachfanmotoranditscontrolcircuit.

7

90 1

Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Usedtosettheoperatingconditionsofaging.

6

Used to s et th e ope rating in termittent ag ing cycle.

8

Used to display the warm-up time.

8

12 1

Thedocumentreadingnumberofsheetssetting(foragingoperation) Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit.

2 6

Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging) control circuit. Usedtochecktheoutputofthetransferoutputelectriccurrent. Process(Transport)

5

6

Desk Desk Operation panel Fusing Scanner(reading) Paper transport/Paper exit section

Others Scanner Others

RSPF Process (Developing)

9

3

Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit.

10

1

Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit.

13

3 -

Usedtochecktheoperationofthetonermotorrotationsensor. Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.

14

-

Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.

16

-

Usedtocanceltheself-diag"U2"trouble.

21 22

1 1

Used to set the maintenance cycle. Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.) Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) Used to check misfeed positions and the m isfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.

2 3

23

Duplex Process (Developing)

Process(Developing)

MFPPWBPCU / PWBSCU / PWB

4 5

Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. UsedtochecktheROMversionofeachunit(section).

6

Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and the counter list.

8

Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.

Firmware

9

Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.

10

Used to c heck the system configuration (opt ion, internal hardw are).

11 12

Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)

13

Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the fusing unit

14

Usedtodisplaytheusestatusofthetonercartridge.

18

Used to display the user data delete history.

19 40

Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send. Used to display the error code list and the contents.

41 42

Used to display the JAM code list and the contents. Used to check the JAM/trouble data.

43

JAM data details display.

90 2

Used to o utput the various set data lists. Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.) Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport transport section. Used to output the list of the op eration status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper feed section and the paper transport section.

80

81

Paper feed, ADU FAX RSPF Process

Process

Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory.


: ‘16/Jun.

2

Main Sub

24

25

26

Fun cti on s

Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)

2

Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.

3

Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and th e scan (reading) unit counter.

4

Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)

5

Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)

6

Used to clear the copy counter.

9 10

Used clear the printer mode print counter and t he self print mode print counter. Used to clear the FAX coun ter. (Only when FAX is installed)

12

Used to clear the document filing counter value.

15

Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode an d the i mage send.

30 31

Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password. Used to initialize the service mode password.

35

Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.

1

Usedtochecktheoperationsofthedevelopingsection.

2

Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)

4

Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.)

41

Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing) Process

UsedtosetYes/Noofinstallationofthejobseparator.

Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray. Paper feed (When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)

3

Used to set the specifications of t he auditor. (Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.) Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)

Paperexit

6

Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.

7

Used to set the machine ID.

Auditor

8

Counter mode setting (Long scale).

10 18

Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)

30

Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)

32 35

Used to set the special functions. Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.

38

Used to set Co ntinue/Stop of pr int when the ma intenance life is rea ched.

50 52

Used to set functions. Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.

56

Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.

65 69

Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.

73

Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment

74 78

Used to set the OSA trial mode. Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.

79

Used to set YES/NO of th e pop-up display of user data delete result.

1 2

Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function) Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)

4

Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)

5

Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS function)

6

Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)

Communication (RIC/MODEM)

7

Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)

9

Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. (FSS function) Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)

11

40

Process(Developingsection)

1

10

30

2

2

5

27

Secti on

1

13

Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function) Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)

14

Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.

15

Used to d isplay the FSS connection status.

16

Used to set the FSS alert send.

17 18

Used to set the FSS paper order alert. Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.

1

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the control circuits.

2

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits.

2

Manualpaperfeedtraypaperwidthsensoradjustment.

7

Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.

1 2

Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.

3

Used to check the op erations of the do cument size sensor and the c ontrol circuit.


Paperfeed Paper feed

Main Sub 43 1

44

46

49

50

51

53

55

Section

Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.

10

Used to set the postcard feed cycle

20

Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature setting of each paper (SIM43-01).

22

Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature setting of each paper (SIM43-04).

1

Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.

9

Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation.

14

Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.

43

Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.

Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing/Transfer/Cleaning) Image process (Photoconductor/ Developing/Transfer/Cleaning) Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/LSU Developing system

2

Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.

4

Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. (Color scanner)

5

Used to adjust the density in the im age send mode. (Monochromatic scanner)

8 9

Used to a djust the image send m ode color balance RGB. Used to adjust the scan image density.

19 30

Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents. Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.

32

Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.

37

Used to ad just the rep roduction capability of mo nochrome mode col or.

39 40

Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images. Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)

41

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)

42

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)

43 44

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)

45

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).

47

Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).

60

Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.

61 62

Used to adjust the area separation recognition level. Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the auto exposure mode.

63 48

Functions Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.

4

Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.

1

Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction an d the sub scanning direction).

5

Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).

1

Used to perform the f irmware update.

3 5

Used to update the operation manual in the HDD. Used to perform the watermark update.

Scanner section

1

Copy image position, image loss adjustment

5

Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)

6 10

Usedtoadjustthecopyimageposition andtheimageloss.(RSPFmode) Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)

12 27

Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.) Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.

28

Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.

RSPF

1

Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer current.

2

Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)

9

Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.

6

Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.

7 8

Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor. Used to adjust the document lead edg e reference and th e RSPF mo de document scan position.

9

RSPF dirt detection setting.

10 1

RSPF dirt detection execution. Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)

2

Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)

3

Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)

10

Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)


Main Sub 56 1

Functions Used to transport data between HDD - M FP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)

Section

2

Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)

3

Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.

4

Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.

5

Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.

6

Used to output the JAM/trouble data.

7

Used to backup the SYS log data to the USB memory.

11

Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.

60

12 1

Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine. Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.

61

1

UsedtochecktheLSUpolygonmotorrotationandlaserdetection.

62

3 1

Used to set the laser power Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)

2 3

Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).

6

Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.

7

Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.

8

Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system area)

10

Used to c lear the job completion list data.

63

64

65

11

Used to delete the document filing data.

12

Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard d isk trouble.

13

Used to format th e hard di sk. (Operation Manu al, watermark data only)

14 1

Usedtoinitialize(remake)onlythedatabasefileoftheHDD. Usedtodisplaytheshadingcorrectionresult.

2

Used to perform shading.

3

Used to perform scanner(CCD) colorbalance and gamma auto adjustment.

4 5

Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and ga mma default setting.

2

Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)

4

Printer test print. (Self print)

5 6

Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)

1

Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.

2

Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.

5

Used to check the operation panel key input.


LSU

HDD Scanner Scanner

Operation panel section

Main Sub 66 1

66

Section FAX

2

Used to entera country code and setthe defaultvalue forthe country code.

3

Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result.

4

Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.)

5

Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)

6

Used to pr int th e confi dential registration check table (BOX NO. , BOX name , passcode. (If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)

7 8

Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

9 10

Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) * For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08. Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.)

FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX

11

Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

12

Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) * For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.

13 14

Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time.

15

Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time.

16

UsedtoexecutetheDTFMsignalsendtestandtoadjustthesendlevel.

17

Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

18

Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)

21 22

Usedtoprinttheselecteditems(systemerror,protocolmonitor). FAX Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.) (Japan model only)

24

Used to clear the FAST save data.

29

30

Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table). Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX

31

UsedtosetON/OFFtheportforoutputtoTEL/LIU.

32 33

Used to checkthe fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.

34

FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX

FAX

FAX

Used to e xecute the send test and display the ti me required for sending image data in t he test. Used to

FAX

39

execute send test and display. (Unit: ms) Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX the command line individually. Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX

42

UsedtorewritetheprogramtopowercontrolinstalledintheFAXBOX.

43

Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX.

61

Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking with the LCD.

62

UsedtoimporttheFAXreceivedatainto aUSBmemoryin PDFfiletype.

17 45

Printer reset Usedtoadjusttheprinterimagefilterandtrapping.

36

67

Functions Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking with the LCD.

FAX FAX FAX FAX Printer Printer

4. Details of simula tion

<56opm> Item/Displ ay

1

OCSCAN

300DPI 400DPI

1-1 Purpose

Operation test/check

600DPI

Function (Purpose)


1200DPI

Section

Scanner (reading)

Operati on mo de 300DPI (372.0mm/s)

Defaul t valu e 300DPI (372.0mm/s)

400DPI (279.0mm/s) 600DPI (186.0mm/s) 1200DPI (93.0mm/s)

<31opm>

Operation/Procedure 1)

Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.

2)


OCSCAN

Item/Displ ay 300DPI

Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed).

400DPI

400DPI (186.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (124.0mm/s) 1200DPI (62.0mm/s)

1200DPI


Operati on mo de 300DPI (248.0mm/s)

Defaul t valu e 300DPI (248.0mm/s)

<31opm>

1-2 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits.

Section

Scanner (reading)

Item/Displ ay (SINGLE)

Operation/Procedure The operating status of the sensor is displayed. When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home position.

(DOUBLE)

Operati on mo de

Defaul t valu e

300DPI

300DPI (186.0mm/s)

300DPI (186.0mm/s)

400DPI

400DPI (186.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (124.0 mm/s)

300DPI

300DPI (186.0mm/s)

400DPI

400DPI (186.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (124.0 mm/s)

1-5

300DPI (186.0mm/s)

Purpose


Function (Purpose)


2-2 Purpose

Section

Scanner (reading)

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section and the control circuits.

Section

RSPF



Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed). When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Item/Dis pl ay

OCSCAN

Operati on mo de

300DPI

300DPI (248.0mm/s)

400DPI

400DPI (186.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (124.0mm/s)

1200DPI

1200DPI (62.0mm/s)

Defaul t valu e 300DPI (2480.mm/s)

The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted. Display

2 2-1 Purpose

Operation/Procedure

Content

SSET SOCD

SPF installation detection RSPF open/close sensor

SCOV

RSPF cover open/close detector

SPED

SPF document empty sensor

SPPD1

SPF primary paper transport sensor

SPPD2

SPF secondary paper transport sensor

SPPD3 SPPD4

SPF scan front sensor SPF scan rear sensor

SPLS1

SPF document length sensor 1

SPLS2

SPF document length sensor 2

STMPU SWD_LEN

SPF stamp UN installation detection SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)

SWD_AD

SPF document detection volume output AD value


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.

Section

RSPF

CAUTION: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.


Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed). When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

<56opm> Item/Dis pl ay (SINGLE)

(DOUBLE)

Operati on mo de

Defaul t valu e

300DPI

300DPI (279.0mm/s)

300DPI (279.0mm/s)

400DPI

400DPI (279.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (186.0 mm/s)

300DPI

300DPI (279.0mm/s)

400DPI

400DPI (279.0mm/s)

600DPI

600DPI (124.0 mm/s)

300DPI (279.0mm/s)


2-3

3-3

Purpose


Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.

Section

Finisher

Section

RSPF

Operation/Procedure


Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel key.

2)


1)

Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation.

The selected load performs the operation.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. <56opm>

Inner fi nisher (MX-FN26) Display FCF

Coolingfan

SPUM_F

RSPF paper feed mo tor (normal rotation)

FDRLM

Paper exit roller lift motor

SPUM_R SPFM_F

RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation) RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)

FPAM_F FPAM_R

Paper alignment motor F Paper alignment motor R

SPFM_R

RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)

FPDM

Paper exit motor

SRRC


FPGS

Paper gate solenoid

SPRS

Pressure r elease solenoid ( RSPF)

STMPS

Stamp solenoid

FPS FARLS

Paddlesolenoid Finisher alignment roller lift solenoid

FPTM

Papertransportm otor

Display

Content

<31opm> Display

Content

SPUM_F SPUM_R

RSPF paper feed mo tor (normal rotation) RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)

SPUC

Paper feed clutch (RSPF)

SRRC


SPRS

Pressure r elease solenoid ( RSPF)

STMPS

Stamp solenoid

FSL

Illumination of the staple unit

FSM

Staplemotor

FTLM

Tray liftmotor

3 3-2 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit.

Section

Finisher

Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted. Inner fi nish er (MX-F N26) Display FAPHPS_F

Content Paper al ignment pl ate HP se nsor F

FAPHPS_R

Paper alignment plate HP sensor R

FDRPS

Paper exit roller position sensor

FDTLLS FDTPD

Paper exit tray lower limit sensor Delivery tray paper detector

FPHPS

Punch unit home position sensor

FPLD

Paper height detector

FPLS

Paper surface sensor auxiliary detector

FPMRS FPPD1

Punch motor rotation sensor Papere ntry d etector

FPRD

Compiler paper rear edge detector C

FSED

Staple empty detector

FSHPS FSLD

Staple HP sensor Staple lead edge detector

FSSW

Safetyswitch

FSTPD

Staple tray paper detector

FTPS

Tray position sensor

Content


3-10 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the fi nisher.

Section

Finisher


Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch panel.

2)

Enter the set value with 10-key.

3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Inner fi nish er (MX-F N23) Item/Display

Content

A

FPAM ADJUST

Paper alignment width adjustment

B

FDRLM ADJUST

Paper exit roller descending position adjustment

Setting

Default

range 40 - 60

value 50

increased or decreased When the adjustment value is increased, the width of the alignment plate F/R during alignment operation is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the width of the alignment plate F/R during alignment operation is increased.

40 - 60

50

When the adjustment value is increased, the descending position of the paper exit roller is shifted to the compression side. When the adjustment value is decreased, the descending position of the paper exit roller is shifted to the decompression side.

Change when the adjustment value is changed by 1 0.419mm

0.13mm

4-3

4 4-2 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those.

Section

Desk

Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active are highlighted. Desk Display

Change when the adjustment value is

Content

C3PFD

Cassette 3 paper entry sensor

C3LUD C3PED

Cassette 3 paper upper limit sensor Cassette 3 paper empty sensor

C3SS

Cassette 3 installation sensor

DSW_C3

Cassette 3 door open/close sensor

C4PFD

Cassette 4 paper entry sensor

C4LUD

Cassette 4 paper upper limit sensor

C4PED C4SS

Cassette 4 paper empty sensor Cassette 4 installation sensor

DSW_C4

Cassette 4 door open/close sensor

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those.

Section

Desk


Select the load item that is required to operation check with the

2)

touch panel key. Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

Desk Display CPFM PTRC1

Content Deskmotor Desk vertical transport clutch

C3LUM

Cassette 3 lift-up motor

C3PUC

Cassette 3 paper feed clutch

C4LUM


C4PUC



5-3

5 5-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.

Section

Operation panel

Operation/Procedure

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit.

Section

Scanner (reading)



2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.

The LCD is changed as shown below.


The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX -> MIN -> the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are checked.

SIMULATION TEST

6

NO.05-01

6-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.

Section

Paper transport/Paper exit section



2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

SIMULATION TEST

Load operation check method

NO.05-01

The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation sound. Section Transport/ process

5-2 Purpose

Paper feed


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.

Section

Fusing



2)


Main heater lamp (Paper surface he at roller) Sub heater lamp (Paper surface heat roller)

POM_F*1

Paper exit reverse motor (normal rotation)

POM_R*1

Paper exit reverse motor (reverse rotation)

OSM PTRC2

Shiftermotor Vertical transport clutch 2CS

RRC

PSclutch

PSPS

Process separation pawl solenoid

POGS1

Paper exit gate solenoid

POGS2 C1LUM

Right paper exit keep solenoid Cassette 1 lift-up motor

C1PUC


C2LUM


C2PUC MPFS

Cassette 2 paper feed clutch Manual feedtake-upsolenoid

*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a


HL_US

Content Mainmotor

change rotating direction is accepted only when the operationinisthe stopped.

The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.

HL_UM

Item/Display MM


6-2

7-6

Purpose


Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.

Section

Others

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)

Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10key.

2)


2)

Press [OK] key.

The selected load performs the operation.

The time entered in procedure 1) is set.


* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).

Load operation check method

The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-

The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation sound.

after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

Display

7-8

Content

PSFM

Power cooling fan motor

FUFM OZFM

Fusing fan motor Ozonefan motor

LSUFM

LSUfan motor

Purpose

Operation display

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the warm-up time.

Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key. Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for warm-up is displayed

6-90

* Interruption of counting by pressing [EX ECUTE] key is inhib ited.

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position)

7-12

Section

Scanner

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation)

Section

RSPF


Press [EXECUTE] key. The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.

Operation/Procedure

7

1)

Set document reading quantity with 10-key. (Setting range: 0 - 255)

2)

Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.

The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

7-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operating conditions of aging.

Section

Others


Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.

The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. AGING

Aging operation setup

INTERVAL

Intermittent operation setting

MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE

JAM detection ignoring setting Fusing unit ignoring setting

WARMUP DISABLE

Warming up ignoring setting

DV CHECK DISABLE

Developing unit ignoring setting

SHADING DISABLE

Shading correction operation omitting setting

CCD GAIN FREE

CCD g ain adjustment omitting setting


: ‘15/Aug.

1

8 8-2

8-1 Purpose

Operation test/check/adjustment

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit.

Function (Purpose)

Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control circuit.

Section

Process (Developing)

Section

Process (Charging)

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)

Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch panel.

1)

Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch panel.

2)

Select a target item to be ad justed with scroll keys.

2)

Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.

3)

Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)

3)

Enter adjustment with 10-key. value specified on thethe label of the highvalue voltage PWB must(The be entered.) * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4)

1

4)



The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is output for 30 sec.

The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is output for 30 sec.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Item/Displ ay (Mode) TS_ OFF

TS_ ON

Conte nt

Ad jus t ment range

Default value

A

COPY DVB

Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-650

26 31 cpm cpm 400 400

B

PRINTER FAX DVB

Developing bias set value in a PRINT/ FAX job (Toner save mode

0-650

400

400

430

A

COPY DVB

0-650

320

320

320

B

PRINTER DVB

0-650

250

250

250

OFF) Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON) Developing bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)

35 cpm 430

Item/Displa y (Mode) TS_ OFF

TS_ ON

Con tent

Ad jus t ment range

Default value 26 31 35 cpm cpm cpm

A

COPY GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)

0-750

575

575

605

B

PRINTER FAX GB

Charging/grid bias set value in a PRINT/ FAX job (Toner save mode

0-750

575

575

605

A

COPY GB

0-750

495

495

495

B

PRINTER GB

0-750

495

425

425


OFF) Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON) Charging/grid bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)

1

: ‘15/Aug.

1

8-6 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the output of the transfer charger output current.

Section

Process (Transfer)



2)


3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved and the electric current corresponding to the set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Item/Display

1

Setting range

Content

A

TC PLAIN SPX W

B C

TC PLAIN DPX W TC PLAIN SPX N1

Primary transfer bias reference value

D

TC PLAIN DPX N1

Back surface 35- 5

E

TC PLAIN SPX N2

Front surface

35- 5

F

TCPLAINDPXN2

Backsurface

5-35

G

TC HEAVY1 W

Plain Frontsurface 535 paper Back surface 35- 5 16 Front surface 35- 5 22

Heavy paper 35 35 OHP

KN1 OHP TC LN2 OHP TC M

TC ENVELOPE W

N

ENVELOPE TC N1

O

ENVELOPE TC N2

PT

THIN W C

Thin paper 35 35

S LABEL TC W T LABEL N1 TC U LABEL N2 TC V

TCTABW

W N1TABTC X N2TABTC Y TC POSTCARD N2 ZT ADSORPTION C W

Label paper

Primarytransferbiasreference value

20

22

26

26

35 35

14

24

14 20 24

10

10

14 14

14 14

14

14 18

5 18

35 -

5 22

22

24

14

14

16

18 5 22 5 35- 5 518 522

-

Tab paper

20

18 22 14

20 24 14

18 22

35 -5 18

20

52

22

24

22 50

16

14

58

352 -

35- 5 100- 0

20 24

14

351 Post card

16

35 -

-

26

16

18 22

35- 5

20

28

24

510

35 - 5

Q N1 THIN TC R N2 THIN TC

18

20

54 54

Envelope

18

16 24

5 18 5 22

35 351 351 -

Default value 31cpm 35cpm

16 22

35- 5

H HEAVY1 TC N1 I HEAVY1 TC N2 J W OHP TC

26cpm

22 50

16

24 50

AA

TC ADSORPTION N1

0 - 100

50

50

50

AB

TC ADSORPTION N2

0 - 100

50

50

50

AC

TC INTERVAL BIAS W

0 - 100

50

50

50

AD

TC INTERVAL BIAS N1

0 - 100

50

50

50

AE

TC INTERVAL BIAS N2

0 - 100

50

50

50

AF

TC FRONTEDGE

0 - 100

60

60

60

AG

TC BACKEND SPX

0 - 100

90

90

90

AH

TC BACKEND DPX

0 - 100

80

80

80


10-3

9 9-3 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit.

Section

Duplex



2)


Purpose


Function (Purpose)


Section



Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the toner cartridges.

The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Display ADUM

If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner.

Content

If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black background copy in the copy mode.

ADU motor

Display

10

TM_COUNT

Content Toner motor rotation sensor

10-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)


Section


13 13-Purpose

Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Operation/Procedure

Function (Purpose)

Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.

1)

Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.

Section

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec.

Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.


2)

Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the toner cartridges. If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner. If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black background copy in the copy mode. Display TNM

Content Tonermotor

14 14-Purpose

Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.

Section Operation/Procedure 1)


2)


16 16-Purpose

Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.

Section

MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB



2)



1

: ‘15/Aug. 22-2

21 21-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the maintenance cycle.

Purpose

Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for r epair.)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

* Do not change the default setting value of the ma intenance counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing cleaning roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not clarify.

The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

1)

Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch

2)

panel. Enter the set value with 10-key.

3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display

1 A

MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL)

Maintenance counter (Total)

Machine JAM counter

RSPF JAM

RSPF JAM counter

TROUBLE

Trouble counter

22-3

Setting range

Content

MACHINE JAM

0: Default 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 999: Free

Default value 26CPM: 75K 31/35CPM: 100K

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.

Section Operation/Procedure The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)

22 22-1 Purpose

Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ Check

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.)

22-4 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)

Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel. Item

D isplay

Content

Total output quantity

TOTAL OUT

Total output quantity of black and white

All prints including jams

Total use quantity

TOTAL

Total use quantity of black and white

Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams)

Copy

COPY

Blackandwhite copy counter

Billing target (excluding self print)

Print

PRINT

Blackandwhite print counter


Document filing

DOC FIL

Black and white document filing print counter


Other

OTHER

Blackandwhite other counter

Self print quantity


22-5

22-8

Purpose

Others

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).

Function (Purpose)

Section

Firmware

Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.

Operation/Procedure

Section

The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.

Operation/Procedure The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner related counters are displayed.

S/N

Serial No. (The codes for November and December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)

SPF

Documentfeedquantity (The number of sheets of discharged documents)

ICU (MAIN) ICU (BOOT)

ICU (Main section) ICU (Boot section)

SCAN STAPLER

Numberoftimesofscan Staple counter

ICU (SUB) LANGUAGE GRAPHIC

ICU (Sub section) (ARM9) Language support da ta ve rsion Graphic data for LCD

STAMP COVER HP_ON

Stampcounter Document cover open/close counter Number of scanner HP detection

PCU

PCU

OC LAMP TIME

SCU

SCU

Total lighting time of the scanner lamp (* hour * minutes)

FAX1 (MAIN)

FAX 1-Line (Main section)

FINISHER

Finisher

22-9

NIC POWER-CON

NIC Powerco ntroller

Purpose


E-MANUAL

Operation manual (HDD storage) (except 20cpm machine)

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.

WATER MARK

Watermark (HDD storage)

Section

Paper feed, ADU

ESCP PDL

ESCPfontROM PDL font ROM

Operation/Procedure The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.

22-6

TRAY1

Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)

TRAY2


TRAY3


Purpose


TRAY4


Function (Purpose)

Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the

MFT TOTAL

Manual paper feed counter (Total)

MFT HEAVY

Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)

firmware version, and the counter list.

MFT OHP MFT ENV

Manual paper feed counter (OHP) Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)

ADU

ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)

Section Operation/Procedure * When installing or servi cing, this simu lation is executed to print the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) 1)

Select the print list mode with 10-key. Item/Display A DATA PATTERN

2)

Print list mode

Print content

1

Firmware version, counter data, etc.

2

Data related to the process control

Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step 1).


1

: ‘15/Aug.

22-10

22-11

Purpose


Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the use frequency (send/ receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed)

Operation/Procedure

Section

FAX

The system configuration is displayed.

Operation/Procedure

(The model names of the installed devices and options are displayed.)

The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter are displayed.

Section

1

MACHINE

FAX OUTPUT

FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)

FAXSEND

FAXsend counter

MX-M356N

FAX RECEIVED

FAX receive counter

MX-M356U

SEND IMAGES

FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)

MX-M265N

SENDTIME RECEIVED TIME

FAXsend time FAX receive time

MX-M266N MX-M316N

Mainunit

MX-M315N MX-M265U MX-M315U

RSPF

MX-M3158N MX-M2658N

22-12

MX-M3158U

Purpose


MX-M2658U

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for r epair.)

Section

RSPF

MX-RP19

Reversing single passfeeder

MX-RP20 STAMP

STANDARD AR-SU1

DESK

MX-CS12

1-PaperTray2ndDrawer 1-Paper Tray 4th Drawer

MX-CS13

1-Paper Tray 3rd Drawer

Operation/Procedure

MX-FN26

Innerfinisher

MX-TR18/ STANDARD

Job separator

The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)

FAX1 NETWORK SCANNER

MX-FX11 MX-NSX1 / STANDARD

Facsimileexpansionkit Network Scanner Expansion Kit

PRINTER

MX-PB16

Printer expansion kit (PCL)

FINISHER

Finishstamp

STANDARD PS

MX-PK11

PSexpansionkit

SECURITY AIM

MX-FR48U MX-AMX1

Data s ecurity kit ( commercial v ersion) Application integration module

SDRAM (ICU)

*****MB

SDRAM capacity

HDD

*****MB

Harddiskcapacity

SD NIC

*****MB STANDARD

SDCardcapacity NIC

BARCODE

MX-PF10

Barcodefont

INTERNET-FAX

MX-FWX1

Internet Fa x ex pansion k it

ACM(*) EAM(*)

MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3

Application communication module External account module

AP

-

Air Purifier

RIGHT TRAY

MX-TE10

Paper exit tray unit

(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.


22-13 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the fusing unit

Section

Process

Operation/Procedure The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process section are displayed.

Item/Display

Content

Counter

RPM Notdisplayed Max.8

Number of use days

MAINTENANCEALL FUSINGROLLER

Maintenancecounter(Total) Fusingroller

Max.8 Max. 8

PRESSUREROLLER

Pressureroller

Max.8

Max.8

SEPARATEPAWL(U)

Upperseparatepawl

Max.8

Max.8

0-999

CLEANING FELT

Cleaning felt

Max. 8

Max. 8

999 0-

TC UNIT

Transfer unit

OZONEFILTER

Ozonefilter

Max. 8

Max. 8

Max.8

Notdisplayed

Max.8

Max.8

0-999 999 0-

0-100(%) 100(%) 0365 0-

0999 -

0100(%) 0-100(%) 365 -0

0100(%) -

0365 -

DEVECTRG(K)

DevelopercartridgeK

DRUMCTRG(K)

DrumcartridgeK

Max.8

Max.8

0 999 -

0 100(%) -

0 365 -

MAINCHARGER(K) DRUMBLADE(K)

MainchargerK Drum blade K

Max.8 Max. 8

Max.8 Max. 8

0999 999 0-

0100(%) 100(%) 0 -

0365 365 0 -

TONERCTRG(K)

TonercartridgeK

Max.8

Max.8

0-999

0-365 365 0 -

100(%) -0

0999 -

0100(%) -

0-999

0-365

0365 -

100(%) 0 -

999 -0

Number of remaining days

Life meter (Unit: +/-1%)

0365 -

0-100(%)

Notdisplayed

22-14 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge.

Section

Process

Operation/Procedure The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.

Display item

Ac cum ul ated No . of installed cartridges (Unit) INSTALL

Content

TONER (K)*1

Toner number counter (K)

LARGE*2

Toner number counter (K LARGE)

SMALL*2

Toner number counter (K SMALL)

510 -0 255 -0

Ac cum ulat ed No. of near near end (Unit) NNEND 510 -0 255 -0

Acc umu lated No . of end (Unit) END

510 -0 255 -0

*1: The sum total of LARGE/SMALL is displayed. For the remaining amount, it is common to LARGE/SMALL. *2: The remaining amount is not displayed.

22-18 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the user data delete history.

Section Operation/Procedure The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. Display item Item name

Date

Content

START

Year/month/day/hour/min.

Delete h istory (Date a nd t ime of operation start)

END

Year/month/day/hour/min.

Delete history (Date and time of operation end)


Remaining quantity (Unit: %) RESIDUAL

0-25% 25-50% 50-75% 75-100%

22-19 Purpose


22-40

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.

Purpose

Error contents display

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the error code list and the contents.

Section Operation/Procedure

Section

Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner Change the display with scroll key. Item/Display Network scanner

Internet FAX

1)

Select the main error code.

The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

Content

NET SCN ORG_B/W

Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job)

NET SCN ORG_CL

Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job)

22-41

INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT

Number of internet FAX output

Purpose Function (Purpose)

INTERNET FAX RECEIVE

Number of internet FAX receive

INTERNET FAX SEND

Number of internet FAX send

Number of internet FAX sending page

JAM contents display Used to display the JAM code list and the contents.


Select the main error code.

The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

E-Mail

MAIL COUNTER

Number of times of E-MAIL send

FTP

FTP COUNTER

Number of FTP send

Other

Operation/Procedure

SMB SEND

Numberof SMB send

USB CNT

Number of times of USB storage

TRIAL MODE_B&C

Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)

SCAN TO HDD_B/W

SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)

SCAN TO HDD_CL

SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)

22-42 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the JAM/trouble data.


Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 2)Printable with [START] keys. Counter Display data

PAPER JAM

SPFJAM

TROUBLE

Display

Cont ent

Content JAM CODE/ TROUBLE CODE

PAPER JAM COUNT

Number of machine JAM troubles

Generated JAM code (Machine)

SPFJAM COUNT

Number of SPF JAM troubles

Generated JAM code (SPF)

Number of troubles

Generated trouble code

TROUBLE COUNT

DATE/TIME Generated date/time (YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

TOTAL COUNT(BW) Total ou tput quantity of black and white


Max. number of histories

Remarks

50

The head is the latest, and the bottom is the oldest. The max. number of histories is 50.

50

When 50 is exceeded, the oldest one is not displayed sequentially.

30

The head is the latest, and the bottom is the oldest. The max. number of histories is 30. When 30 is exceeded, the oldest one is not displayed sequentially.

22-43

22-90

Purpose


Purpose


Function (Purpose)

JAM data details display

Function (Purpose)

Used to output the various set data lists.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)

Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.

1)

Change the display with scroll key.

When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is displayed. When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and humidity data are displayed.

2)

Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the l ist.

All setting list (*) Printertestpage

2)Printable with [START] keys.

PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST

Display data and co ntents (COUNTER) Item

PS FONT LIST PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)

Content

PAPER JAM COUNT

Number of machine JAM troubles

PAPER FEED COUNTER

Paper feed counter (Similar with SIM22-09 display content) Paper feed retry counter (Similar with SIM27-18 display content)

PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER

PS EXTENDED FONT LIST Address registration list (*)

NO JAMCODE DATE/TIME TOTAL_BW

Content No JAMCode Date/Time Total Count (BW)

PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable) MEMORY BOX LIST ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST

Description History number

Document filing list (*)

DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST

System setting list

ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)

Jamcodemain

ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)

Occurrenced ate Total counter (B/W)

P_S(*1)

PaperSize

Papersize

P_T(*1) JOB(*1)

PaperType JobMode

Papertype Jobmode

NIC PAGE INDIVIDUAL LIST GROUP LIST

Display data and contents (HISTORY1) Item

ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST PCL SYMBOL SETLIST PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST

ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)

FirstafterJOBstartornot

ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST

JN

JobNo

OF

Offset

Paperexit:Offset

Receive rejection number table

EP

ExitPosition

Paperexit:Exitposition

Punch Staple

Paperexit:Punch Paperexit:Staple

Receive rejection/allow address domain table

ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST

PC SP

To E-mail Transfer table list

INBOUND ROUTING LIST

To administrator Transfer list

DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST

Websettinglist

WEBSETTINGLIST

Meta data setlist

METADATA SET LIST

* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK model, this setting is invalid.


23

24

23-2

24-1

Purpose


Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and miss feed. (If the number of troubles of miss feed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)

Section Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.


Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.

2)


3)

Press [YES] key.

The trouble history of paper jams and miss feed is printed. Error content Item DATA PATTERN

Button display

Content

NO.1

JAM/Trouble historyprint

NO.2

Paper feed counter, JAM history details, and temperature/humidity history print

The target counter is cleared. MACHINE

MachineJAMcounter

SPF

RSPFJAMcounter

TROUBLE

Troublecounter

24-2 23-80 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper feed section and the paper transport section.

Section

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.



2)


3)

Press [YES] key.

Paper feed, Paper transport

The target counter is cleared.

Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and paper transport is outputted. Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and transport section.

TRAY1

Tray1paperfeedcounter

TRAY2 TRAY3

Tray2paperfeedcounter Tray3paperfeedcounter

TRAY4

Tray4paperfeedcounter

MFT TOTAL

Manual paper feed counter (Total)

The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.

MFT HEAVY MFT OHP

Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) Manual paperfeed counter(OHP)

Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sensor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.

MFT ENV

Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)

ADU

ADU paper feed counter

JAMCODE DATE / TIME

JAMcode JAM occurrence date/time

MODE

Printing mode when JAMoccurs

SIZE

Papersize

TYPE

24-3

Papertype

PICTRAY

Paperfeedtray

OUTTRAY INF1 (ILLEGAL)

Paperexittray Illegal detection information

INF2(SENSOR)

23-81 Purpose Function (Purpose)

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.


Sensor information

1)


2)


3)

Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.

Data backup Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory.

Section Operation/Procedure Insert the USB memory into the main unit, and press [OK] key and [EXECUTE] key.

Purpose

SPF

RSPFdocumentfeedcounter (No. of discharged sheets)

SCAN

Scancounter

STAPLER STAMP

Staple counter Stampcounter

COVER

Document cover open/close counter

HP_ON

Number of scanner HP detection

OC LAMP TIME

Total lighting time of the scanner lamp


2

: ‘16/Jun.

24-4

24-5

Purpose

Data clear

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)


3)

Press [YES] key.

3)

Press [YES] key.


The target counter is cleared. Item/Display Maintenance

Fusing

Content

MAINTENANCE ALL

Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)

FUSING ROLLER

Fusing roller (Counter)

PRESS ROLLER

Maintenance counte r (Total) (Number of use days)

SEPARATE PAWL(U)

CLEAN FELT

TC UNIT

24-6

Pressure roller (Counter)

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the copy counter.

Pressure roller (Number of use days)

Main charger

DRUM CTRG K

MAIN CHARGER K


Upper separation pawl (Number of use days) Upper separation pawl (Accumulated traveling distance)

1)


2)


3)


Clean felt (Counter) Clean felt (Number of use days)

Transfer unit (Counter)

COPYBW

Other

Copycounter(B/W)

24-9

Drum cartridge (K) (Counter) Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use days) Drum cartridge (K) (Accumulated traveling distance)

2

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.



Main charger (K) (Counter)

2)


Main charger (K) (Number of use days)

3)

Press [YES] key.

Main charger (K) (Accumulated traveling distance) Drum blade

2

Upper separation pawl (Counter)

Transfer unit (Number of use days) Transfer unit (Accumulated number of rotations) Drum

Number of day that used developer (Day) K

Fusing roller (Accumulated number of rotations)

Clean felt (Accumulated number of rotations) Transfer

Developer cartridge print counter (K) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)

K

Fusing roller (Number of use days)

Pressure roller (Accumulated number of rotations) Separation

NOTE: The "Developer cartridge life meter" count er displayed in SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is cleared in conjunction with this simulation.


DRUM BLADE K

Drum blade K (Counter)

OZONEF ILTER

Ozonef ilter( Counter)

24-10

Ozone filter (Number of use days)

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)

Drum blade K (Number of use days) Drum blade K (Accumulated traveling distance)

PRINTBW OTHERBW

Printcounter(B/W) Othercounter(B/W)

2



2)


3)


FAX OUTPUT FAXSEND

FAX Print quantity counter FAXsendcounter

FAXR ECEIVED

FAXreceivecounter

SEND IMAGES SENDTIME

FAX send quantity counter FAXsendtime

RECEIVED TIME

FAX receive time


: ‘16/Jun.

2 2

24-12

24-30

Purpose

Data clear

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the document filing counter value.

Function (Purpose)

Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)

Press [YES] key.

3)

Press [YES] key.

The administrator password is initialized.

The target counter is cleared. DOC FIL (BW)

2

Black-white d ocument filing p rint counter

24-31 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to initialize the service mode password.

24-15 Purpose

Data clear

Section

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.

Operation/Procedure

Section

1)


2)

Press [YES] key.

Operation/Procedure

Used to initialize the service mode password.

1)


2)


3)

Press [YES] key.

24-35

The target counter is cleared. Division Network scanner

Internet Fax

Item/Display NET SCN ORG_B/W

Content Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job)

NET SCN ORG_CL

Network scanner document read quantity counter (COLOR scan job)

INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT INTERNET FAX

Number of Internet FAX output Number of Internet FAX sending page Number of Internet FAX receive

E-mail

RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND MAIL C OUNTER

Number of times of E-MAIL send

FTP

FTPCOUNTER

NumberofFTPsend

Other

Number of Internet FAX send

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.



2)

Press [YES] key.

The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.

25 25-1

SMBSEND

NumberofSMBsend

USB CNT

Number of times of USB storage

TRIAL MODE_B&C

Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)

SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD_CL

SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the developing section.

Section

Process (Developing section)


Press [EXECUTE] key. The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is displayed.

Sensor name (Display) TCS_K


Sensor name Tonersensoroutputvalue(K)

: ‘15/Aug.

1

25-2

Item/Display

Setting

AUTO DEVE AREA

Function (Purpose)

Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)

CURRENTAREA

Section

1

Display range -128 - 127

Content

Purpose

Area in the auto development adjustment Currentarea

-128-127

Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)

Operation/Procedure

26

Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner density control reference value setting) Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set Yes/No of installation of the Job separator.

Section

Paper exit

of the process UN may be locked. 1)


26-1

Operation/Procedure

The developing motor rotates and the toner density sensor makes sampling of the toner density, displaying the detected l evel.

1)


2)


After stopping the developing motor, it is set as the reference toner density control level.

This setting is required to use the Job separator.

CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is not set normally. CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble. Item/Display AT DEVE ADJ

Display range

Content Automatic development adjustment value

Default value

1-255

TCS

YES

Job separator provided

1

NO

Jobseparatornotprovided

26-2 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray. (When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)

Section

Paper feed

Operation/Procedure Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.

Content Toner sensor outputvalue

Item

Error content

LEGAL SET Display

Error name

Content

0

128

Display during execution of the simulation Item/Display

Item/Display A

Setting value

Content

0

Error content

8.5 14 x 8.5x13.4

1

EE-EL

EL abnormality

Sensor output level less than 78

EE-EU

EU abnormality

Sensor output level over 178

2 G/LBS SET

8.5x13.5

0

GRAM 1

25-4

Destination

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.)

Section

The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. Content

TONER DEN_LT

Current toner density sensor output value (final value)

TONER DEN_ST

Current toner density reference value display (the value including all the correction values) Automatic development adjustment value All correction reference value

AUTO DEVE ALL

INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE

Process

Operation/Procedure

Item/Display

U.S.A CANADA

LIFE

Lifecorrectionvalue

ENV

Environmentcorrectionvalue

Display range 1 - 255

U.K.

1 - 255 -128-127

Duplexcorrectionvalue

-128-127 -128 - 127 -128 - 127

14 8.5 x 8.5 x 14 8.5 14 x 148.5 x 8.5 x 14

-128-127

Printratio correction value Area correction value

14x8.5

8.5 x 14

1 - 255

PRINT RATE AREA

148.5 x 14 8.5 x

AB_A

1 - 255

DUPLEX

Setting value LEGAL SET

AUS.

CHINA


LBS

14 8.5 x

G/LBS SET LBS LBS LBS GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM

26-3

Item/Display

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the s pecifications of the auditor. (Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)

Section

Auditor

COUNTUP TIMING

Content

FUSER_IN

Operation/Procedure

FUSER_OUT

Select an item to be set with the touch panel. Item/Display

Default value

Content

BUILT-IN AUDITOR

P10

Built-in auditormode (standard mode) operation.

OUTSIDE

NONE

No external connection

AUDITOR P VENDOR1

P VENDOR3

P OTHER

VENDOR-EX (*1) VENDOR-EX (MULTI) (*1) DOCADJ

S_VENDOR ON

PFADJ

ON

OFF

OFF

VENDOR MODE (*2)

P10

EXIT_OUT

Mode in which the detection timing of the paper rear edge by the paper exit sensor of the right paper exit tray or of the after process unit is used as the money charging timing.

MODE1

All the items in OUTSIDE AUDITOR and VENDOR MODE are allowed to select. (“OUTSIDEA UDITOR”i s always set to “P VENDOR1”. Other buttons are grayed out. “VENDOR MODE” is always set to “MODE3”. Other buttons are grayed out.)

NONE

vendor is used. Coin vendor mode (Only the copy mode can be controlled.) Vendor mode in which signals for the intercard connected to the PCU are used for communication in parallel I/F. Mode for an external auditor connected to the SCU. Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC

PRINTER CONTROL

MODE2

VENDOR-EX + Multi job cueing Enable mode Serial vendor mode Supportfortheauditorin document filing print

MODE3

Nosupportfortheauditorin document filing print OFF

print mode. If the remaining money expires during continuous printing, the sheets in the machine are discharged without being printed on the back surfaces. Continuous printing is not performed in the duplex print mode. (The remaining amount is checked for printing every surface in all the printing process.) If the remaining money expires during printing, the sheet is discharged without printing on the back surface.

MODE1

Vendormode1

MODE2

Vendormode2

MODE3

Vendormode3

Default value EXIT_ OUT

MODE 1

“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is always set to “P OTHER”. Other buttons are grayed out. “VENDOR MODE” is always set to “MODE3”. Other buttons are grayed

OFF

Continuousprintingis performed in the duplex

Mode in which the detection timing of the paper lead edge by the sensor after the paper passes the fusing section is used as the money charging timing. Mode in which the detection timing of the paper rear edge by the sensor after the paper passes the fusing section is used as the money charging timing.

out.

(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC. (*2) Details of the vendor mode Details of the vendor mode Completion of the specified quantity. (Money remaining)

MODE 3

Insufficient money during copy job BW (no money remaining)

BW (money remaining)

Completion of the specified quantity. (No money remaining)

Condi tio n 1

Condi tio n 2

Conditi on 3

Condi tio n 4

MODE1 MODE2

Operation 1 Operation 1




MODE3

Operation 1

Operation 3

Operation 2

Operation 3

Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, which can be changed in the system setting. Operation 2: Auto clear is not made. Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen.


26-5

10-key

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/ 11x17 size)

1 2

Number of times of key input 1

2

1 A

3

4

5

6

--B

C

ab

F

d

3

D

E

4

G

HIg

Operation/Procedure

5 6

J M

K N

Ljkl5--O m

1)

Select an item to be set with scroll keys.

7

P

Q

R

2)

Enter the setting value with 10-key 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2

8

T

U

Vtu

9

W

X

YZ

0

0

---

Section

3)

Press [OK] key.

7

8

9

10

---

--c2--

-

ef3-

--

hi4--

-

no6-

Sp

qr

-

s7-

v8

--

-

wxyz9

-

---

---

The set value in step 2) is saved.

A

Item/Display TOTAL (B/W)

Content Total counter (B/W)

B

MAINTE (B/W)

Maintenance counter (B/W)

C

DEV (B/W)

Developer counter (B/W)

Default value 1 (Japan) 2 (Except Japan) 2

26-8 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Counter mode setting (Long scale)


Select a setting item with the scroll key.

2)

Enter the set value with 10-key. 1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up.

26-6

3)

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.


Select an item to be set with the touch panel.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected set content is saved.

U.S.A.

UnitedStates of America

CANADA

Canada

INCH

Inch series, other destinations

JAPAN

Japan

AB_B EUROPE

AB series (B5 detection), other destinations Europe

U.K.

UnitedKingdom

AUS. AB_A

Australia AB series (A5 detection), other destinations

CHINA

China

Item/Display

Content

Default value

TOTAL(B/W) LONG SIZE(S)

Long scale (Small) Total counter (B/W)

10 -1

3

B

MAINTE (B/W) LONG SIZE(S)

Long scale (Small) Maintenance counter (B/W)

10 -1

3

C

DEV(B/W) LONG SIZE(S)

Long scale (Small) Developer counter (B/

10 -1

3

D

TOTAL(B/W) LONG SIZE(L)

W) Long scale (Large) Total counter (B/W)

10 -1

5

E

MAINTE (B/W) LONG SIZE(L) DEV(B/W) LONG SIZE(L)

10 -1

5

10 -1

5

Long scale (Large) Maintenance counter (B/W) Long scale (Large) Developer counter (B/ W)

26-10

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the machine ID.

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.


Section

1)

Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.

Operation/Procedure

Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be

1)


inputted. To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. Refer to the following list and enter characters.

2)

Press [OK] key.

Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is inputted. To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key

The set value in step 1) is saved. TRIAL MODE (0: YES 1: NO)

and enter the correct character. 2)

Setting range

A

F

26-7

Press [OK] key.

Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). NOTE: The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode function. Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simulation mode. MX-M316N SIMULATION 6 – 27

0

Trial mode setting

1

Trial mode cancel (Default)

26-18

26-35

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.



2)


3)

Press [OK] key.



The set value in step 2) is saved. Item

Display

A

Content

COPY

B

Default

PRINTER

0

Copy toner save mode is inhibited.

1

Copy toner save mode is allowed

0

Printer toner save mode is inhibited.

1

Printer toner save mode is allowed.

value 0

2)

0

Onlyonce display.

1

Anytimedisplay.

Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.

0

26-38

26-30 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.



2)



Item/Display

Enter the set value with 10-key. A 0 1

2)

MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER (0: CONTINUE 1: STOP)

Controlallowed Controlinhibited

Content 0

1

Default value

Setting of Print Continue/ Stop when the maintenance life is over (Print Continue)

0

Setting of Print Continue/ Stop when the maintenance life is over (Print Stop)

Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved. * Even in Enable state, the control may not be exec uted due to the power frequency, etc.

U.S.A

1 (CE not supported)

EUROPE

0 (CE supported)

26-49

CANADA

1 (CE not supported)

U.K.

0 (CE supported)

Purpose

Setting

INCH

1 (CE notsupported)

AUS.

0 (CE supported)

JAPAN AB_B

1 (CE not supported) AB_A 1 (CE not supported) CHINA

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.

0 (CE supported) 0 (CE supported)

Section Operation/Procedure Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)

26-32 Item

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the special functions.

POSTCARD



2)

Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved. Item/Display

A

CLEANING PRINT SET

Content

Setting range

The screen of the cleaning mode self print execution is displayed. (ON)

0

YES

The screen of the cleaning mode self print execution is not displayed. (OFF)

1

NO

Default value 1(NO)


Setting value

Content

LOW

Postcard copy speed LOW

HIGH

Postcard copy speed HIGH

Default value LOW

26-50

26-51

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set functions.

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation.


Section

1)

Operation/Procedure

Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch panel.

2)


3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display A

BW REVERSE

B

FINISHER FUNCTION

Content 0

BW reverse copy Disable

1 0

BW reverse copy Enable Finisher special paper The number of paper exit is limited. Finisher special paper The number of paper exit is not limited.

1

C

26-52 Default value

FEED TRAY COLOR

0 1

D

LONGSIZEPRINT

0

E

WIRELESSSET

0

1 1

0 Refer to *2

Paper feed tray color display ON during paper feed

U

Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.



0

2)

Paper feed tray color display OFF during paper feed Longsizeprintdisable

0

Countup

1

Nocountup


0

Long size print enable WirelessLANdisable

0

Wireless LAN enable

Destination S

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Refer to *1

(*1) Default values for each destination of item A

A

Purpose

ItemA 1

Destination U.S.A CANADA INCH

0(Counted)

JAPAN AB_B

1(Notcounted) 0 (Counted)

EUROPE

0(Counted)

U.K.

0 (Counted) 1 (Not counted)

CANADA

1

AUS.

INCH JAPAN

1 1

AB_A

0 (Counted)

CHINA

0(Counted)

AB_B EUROPE UK

1 1 0

AUS

1

AB_A

1

CHINA

1

(*2) Target paper Inner finisher

Default 0(Counted) 0(Counted)

Target paper setting 0

1

Postcard, envelope

The operation is stopped when 10 sheets of a same kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of sheets are mixed and discharged and 10 or less sheets of a kind are continuously discharged, the operation is stopped by the paper exit tray full detection.

If it is set to "1," the operation is stopped when the paper exit tray is full or when 250 sheets (35.5mm thick) are discharged.

Label sheet,

The operation is stopped when 100 sheets of a same kind are

tab sheet, OHP

discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of sheets are mixed and discharged and 100 or less sheets of a kind are continuously discharged, the operation is stopped by the paper exit tray full detection.


26-56

26-69

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.


Section

1)


Operation/Procedure

2)


1)


3)


2)


3)

Press [OK] key.

Item/Display A

AUTO1

Setting range

Content Life correction of Auto 1 is turned ON.

0-1

1

AUTO2

Item/Display

TEXT

A

Life correction of Auto 2 is turned ON.

0-1

1

1(ON)

E

Life correction of Text is turned ON.

0-1

1

TEXT/ PRINTED PHOTO

Life correction o f Text/Printed Photo is turned ON.

TEXT/ PHOTO

Life correction o f Text/ Photograph is turned ON.

0-1

1

Life correction o f Text/Printed Photo is turned OFF.

The toner preparation message is displayed.

1

The toner preparation message is not displayed.

B

5%

0

Toner 9-0 preparation at remaining toner level of 5%

0(OFF)

10%

1

Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 10%

15%

2


20%

3


25%

4


30%

5


35%

6


40 %

7


45%

8

Toner 9-0 preparation at remaining toner level of 45%

50 %

9

Toner preparation at remaining toner

TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1:NO)

0

REMAINING TONER LEVEL

0 0-1

1

0(OFF) 0

F

PRINTED PHOTO

G

PHOTOG

Life correction of Printed Photo is turned ON.

Life correction of Photograph

RAPH

is turned ON. Life correction of Photograph is turned OFF.

MAP

Life correction of Map is turned ON.

0-1

1

0-1

1

1(ON)

Life correction of Printed Photo is turned OFF.

0 1(ON) 0 0-1

Life correction of Map is turned OFF.

1

0(OFF) 0

26-65 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the finisher alarm mode.

Section Operation/Procedure B

Use the touch key to set. Item LIMIT COPIES

Set value

Content

ON

Number of sets of stapling: Max. 50 sets

OFF

Number of sets of stapling: Not Limited

Setting range

0

0(OFF) 0

Life correction o f Text/ Photograph is turned OFF.

H

TONER PREPARATION (0:YES 1:NO)

0

Life correction of Text is turned OFF. D

Content

Default value

0

Life correction of Auto 2 is turned OFF. C

The set value in step 2 is saved.

1(ON)

Life correction of Auto 1 is turned OFF. B

Default value

Setting range

Default value

ON or OFF

ON

REMAINING TONER LEVEL

NOTE

C

1

D

TONEREND

1 2 3


level of 50% The toner near end message is displayed.

01 -

01 -

0

4

4

0

The toner near end message is not displayed. Operationsetup 3 - 1 1 Operation setup 2 Operation setup 3

-

Item/Display E

F

TONER END COUNT

TONER E-MAIL ALERT

Setting Content range Setting of the 5-1 number of copy/print/ FAX outputs Enable after TONER NEAR END. 0 Low status send 1 - 0 of E-mail alert (When the toner preparation message is displayed) (in near near toner end) 1

Default value 4

1

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment



2)


3)

Press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss (shade delete quantity) is increased.

Low status send of E-mail alert (near toner end)

Item/Display

Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quantity Setting value

26-73

A

DELETING SHADOW ADJ (M)

Printable quantity at A4/6% equivalent conversion

1 2

0 20

3

40

4

80

5

160

B

DELETING SHADOW ADJ (S)

Content

Setting range

Rear frame side image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment Lead edge image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment

0-50

Default value 0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step)

0-50

0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step)

Contents of set items A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.

26-74

B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation message is displayed.

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the OSA trial mode.

C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display when the toner near end status is reached.


D: Machine operation at toner end

1)


E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 160 sheets)

2)

Press [OK] key.

The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%. (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper size and the print ratio.) CAUTION: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result depending on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner end display is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.

Item/Display A

OSA TRIAL MODE (0: YES 1: NO)

Content 0

Used to set the OSA trial mode.

1

OSA trial mode is canceled.

Setting Default range value 1-0 1

26-78 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.


Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 di gits) The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.

2)

Press [SET] key.


26-79 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.


Enter the set value with 10-key. The value for the display operation specification after completion of user data delete is set.

2)

Press [OK] key.

Item/Display A

DISP SET

Content

Setting range

User data delete result pop-up display ON

YES

1

User data delete result pop-up display OFF

NO

0

Default value 0(NO)

27 27-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)


2)

Enter the set value with 10-key. 0

Notdetection

1

Detection


27-2 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)


Select an item to be s et with touch panel. [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]

2)


3)

Press [SET] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.

USER FAX_NO.

Sender registration n umber (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO.

Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits) * If the connection process is not completed normally when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may be continuously made every time when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted. In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the HOST.


27-4 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)



2)


3)


Item/Display A

FSS MODE

Setting range 0-3 0

Content NEB1

Set the FSS MODE

Exclusive for send in NE-B mode

NEB2

Send/Receive in NE-B mode

NFB1

ExclusiveforsendinNE-Fmode

NFB2

Send/Receive inNE-F mode

Forconvenience stores 3

B

RETRY_BUSY

Resendnumbersettingwhenbusy

015 -

TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY RETRY_ERROR

Resendtimersetting(minute)whenbusy Resendnumbersettingwhenerror

1-15 0-15

E

TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR

Resendtimersetting(minute)whenerror

1-15

F G

FAXRETRY TONER ORDER TIMING(K)

NEAR_END

ResendnumbersettingwhenFAXinitialconnection Tonerorderauto send Empty timing setting (K) Near end

For convenience stores 2

0-15 11 - 00

2

2

10%

3

15%

15%

4

20% 25%

20% 25%

5 6

30%

30%

7

35%

35%

8

40% 45%

40% 45%

9 10

50%

50%

LOGOUTPUTCAPACITY(PCU) TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL

11

Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history Logoutputcapacity Toner order timing control

1 - 1440

0-50 Toner order alert send at the fixed 1 - 0 toner remaining q uantity. Toner under alert send when 50 -0 presuming the toner consumption.

27-5

Unit:Numberoftimes

6 1

5%

TEMP HISTORY CYCLE

0:Noretry 1

10%

I J

0:Noretry 3

1

5%

H

Remarks

1 2

C D

EMPTY

Default value 1

60 30 0

Unit: min. Unit:[KB] 0

1

27-6

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS function)

Function (Purpose)

Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)

Section

Communication (RIC/MODEM)

Operation/Procedure


1)


Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.

2)

Section

Press [SET] key.

0 1

2)

Allow(Default) Inhibit



27-7

27-10

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)

Press [YES] key.

3)

Press [OK] key.

The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.

The set value in step 2) is saved. Item/Display

Content

A

FUNCTION (0:YES 1:NO)

FSSfunctionenable FSSfunctiondisable

B

ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Alert call enable (*1)

C

CONNECTION (0: FAX 1: No Use 2: HTTP)

FAXconnectionenable

Target history Setting range 0 1

Not used. HTTP connection enable

Paper transport time between sensors

0 (YES)

27-11

1 0

0(FAX)

1 2

*1 Alert send timing

Purpose

Others

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function)

Section

No alert cause

Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

Maintenance

When the maintenance timing is reached.

Service call

When pressing Service call.

Toner s end re quest

When the toner order automatic send setting i s reached.

Toner collection request

Revision of the toner installation date (only for a new product)

Alert resend

27-9 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. (FSS function)

Section

Operation/Procedure The serial communication retry number history and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. Display Item Item name

1)


2)


3)


8d igits

LSU2

Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.

8 digits

DESK1

Year/month/day

8 digits

DESK2

hour: min.: sec. Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.

8 digits

FINISHER1


8 digits

FINISHER2


8 digits

SCAN GAIN ADJ1


8 digits

SCAN GAIN ADJ2


8 digits

SCAN GAIN ADJ3


8 digits

Year/month/day hour: min.: sec. Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.

8 digits

Setting range

Default value

SCAN GAIN ADJ4

FEED TIME2

Threshold value of paper transport time between sensors (SPF)

0 -100

50(%)

SCAN GAIN ADJ5

B

GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY

Threshold value of the gain adjustment retry number

0-20

11 (TIMES)

C

JAM ALERT

Continuous JAM alert judgment threshold value

1-100

10 (TIMES)

1-99

30 (DAYS)

(Alert judgment threshold value for continuous JAM's) (Setting of the number of JAM's continuously made at which it is judged as an alert.) D

JAM ALERT PERIOD

Continuous JAM alert period setting

Retry number


A

Content

Occurr ence date (Display)

LSU1

Operation/Procedure

Item/Display

Serial communication retry history Scanner gain adjustment retry history

1(NO) 0

Alert call disable

Default value

* Items A, B: 0%, stand ard passing time between sheets of paper; 100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. * Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of retry is actually not registered.


8 digits

Content Serial communication retry number history display

Scanner gain adjustment retry history

Scanner gain adjustment retry history

27-13 Purpose

Others

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)

Section Operation/Procedure Change the display with scroll key.

5 digits (ms)

Reference passing time 5 digits (ms)

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

Year/month/day hour: min.: sec. Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8


5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)



5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)



5 digits

5 digits (ms)

5 digits (ms)

Item/Display RSPF

Content

Occurrencedate

FEED TIME1 (SPF)



FEED TIME2 (SPF)

History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4

Year/month/day hour: min.: sec. Year/month/day hour: min.: sec. Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.

FEED TIME5 (SPF)



FEED TIME6 (SPF)

History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7

FEED TIME8 (SPF) FEED TIME9 (SPF) FEED TIME10 (SPF)

FEED TIME3 (SPF) FEED TIME4 (SPF)

FEED TIME7 (SPF)

27-14 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.


2)

Enter the set value with 10-key. 0

Disable(Default)

1

Enable


27-15 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the FSS connection status.

Section Operation/Procedure The FSS operating status is displayed. Item/Display FSS CONNECTION

Content Used to display the FSS connection status.

Setting range 0 1

Not operated Operated

Default value 0


Code between sensors 5 digits

Passing time

Item/ Display A3: FIRST

27-16 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the FSS alert send.



2)

Press [OK] key.

A4: FIRST

The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set. B4: FIRST

Item/Display A

B

C

D

E

F

Content

Setting range

Default value 0

MAINTENAN CE ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Maintenance alert send Enable setting

Alert send Enable

0

Alert send Disable

1

TONER ORDER ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Toner o rder alert send Enable setting

Alert send Enable

0

Alert send Disable

1

TONER CTRG ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Toner cartridge replacement alert send Enable setting

Alert send Enable

0

Alert send Disable

1

JAM ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Continuous JAM alert send Enable setting

Alert send Enable

0

Alert send Disable Alert send Enable

1

Alert send Disable Alert send Enable Alert send Disable

1

TROUBLE ALERT (0:YES 1:NO) PAPER ORDER ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)

Trouble alert send Enable setting Paper order alert send Enable setting

B5: FIRST

Content Paper order alert number setting (A3) (Number of used sheets) Paper order alert number setting (A4) (Number of used sheets) Paper order alert number setting (B4) (Number of used sheets) Paper order alert number setting (B5) (Number of used sheets)

Setting range 500 10000

Default value 1000

500 10000

1000

Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time

500 10000

1000


500 10000

1000


NOTE Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time

0

27-18 0

0

0

0

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.


Select an item to be cleared.

2)


3)


0

1

1

Item/Display TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3

Content Tray 1 paper feed retry counter Tray 2 paper feed retry counter Tray 3 paper feed retry counter

TRAY4

Tray 4 paper feed retry counter

MFT

Manual paper feed retry counter

27-17 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the FSS paper order alert.

30


30-1

1)

Select an item to be set.

2)

Enter the set value with 10-key. The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification is set.

3)

Press [SET] key.

Item/ Display PAPER TYPE SET

Content Setting of paper kind for paper order alert

0-2

Default value 0

NOTE 0:Standard paper and recycled paper

2: Recycled paper only

A4

B4

B5

Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (A3)


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the control circuits.

Section Setting range

1: Standard paper only

A3

Purpose

500 5000

1250

2500

Unit: No. of sheets for a box

Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (A4)

500 5000


Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (B4) Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (B5)

500 5000

2500


500 5000

2500


Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted. PPD1 POSD

Registration front detector Paper exit branch detector

POD1

Paper exit detector 1

POD2 POD3

Paper exit detector 2 Paper exit detector 3

TFD1

Paper exit tray full detector 1

TFD2


TFD3


SHPOS

Shifter home positions sensor

DSW_R DSW_POC

Front/side cover open/close detector Paper exit cover open/close detector


30-2

40-7

Purpose


Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits.

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.

Section

Paper feed

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)

Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.

The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.

2)


3)

Press [OK] key.

The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.

The set value in step 2) is saved. Item/Display

Default value

Content

C1PFD

Cassette 1 paper entry detector

C1LUD

Cassette 1 p aper upper limit detector

C1PED

Cassette 1 paper empty detector

A B

MAX POSITION P1 (A4R) POSITION

Cassette 1 detector Cassette 2 paper entry detector

Manual feed max. width Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)

235 143

C1SS C2PFD

C

P2 (A5R) POSITION

78

D

MIN POSITION

Manual feed P2 position width (A5R) Manual feed min. width

C2LUD

Cassette 2 p aper upper limit detector

C2PED C2SS

Cassette 2 paper empty detector Cassette 2 installation detector

DSW_C2

Cassette 2 door open/close detector

MPED

Manual feed paper empty detector

MPLD1

Manual feed paper length detector 1

MPLD2

Manual feed paper length detector 2

MTOP1 MTOP2

Manual feed tray detector 1 Manual feed tray detector 2

27

41 41-1

40

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.


40-2 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.

Function (Purpose)

Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment.

The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.

Section

Paper feed


Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).

2)


OCSW

Document cover status

PD1 - 7

Document detection sensor status

Open: Normal d isplay Close: Highlighted No document: Normal display Document present: Highlighted

The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. 3)

Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).

4)


41-2

The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.

Purpose

Adjustment

5)

Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R).

Function (Purpose)

6)


Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.

The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized.

Section

7)

Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).

Operation/Procedure

8)


1)

The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. MAX POSITION

Manual feed max. width

P1(A4R)POSITION

Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)

P2(A5R)POSITION

Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)

MIN POSITION

Manual feed min. width

Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without place a document on the document table. The sensor level without document is recognized.

2)

Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press [EXECUTE] key. The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.

When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. Sensor name PD1 -7


Content Documentdetection sensor1 - 7

Setting range 0 -255

Defaul t value 128

: ‘15/Aug.

1

41-3 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.

Section Operation/Procedure The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128) Item/Display

Content

Detection level range

OCSW

OriginalcoverSW

PD1

Documentdetection1

0-255

PD2

Documentdetection2

0-1("1"toClose) 0-255

PD3

Documentdetection3

0-255

PD4 PD5

Documentdetection4 Documentdetection5

0-255 0-255

PD6

Documentdetection6

0-255

PD7

Documentdetection7

0-255

43 43-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.



2)


3)


Default value

1 Item/Display

26cpm

Setting range

Content

Group A SW- SWA B

31cpm

Group B SW- SWA B

35cpm

Group A Group B Group A Group B SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SWA B A B A B A B

A

HL_UM READY

Ready standby TH_UM set value

70-220

185

185

190

190

185

185

190

190

195

195

195

195

B

HL_US READY

Ready standby TH_US set value

70-220

180

180

200

200

180

180

200

200

195

195

195

195

C

HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW

Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value

70-220

190

195

195

200

190

195

195

200

195

200

195

200

D

HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW

Black-White plain paper TH_US set value

70-220

190

195

195

200

190

195

195

200

195

200

195

200

E

WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T

Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value

0-200

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

F

WARMUPFUMOFF HL_UM T

Fusing motor previous rotation 60 complete time

G

WARMUPEND TIME

Warm-upcompletetime

00

H

HL_UM THIN PAPER

ThinpaperTH_UMsetvalue

70220 -

190

195

190

195

185

185

I

HL_US THIN PAPER

ThinpaperTH_USsetvalue

70220 -

190

195

190

195

185

185

020 -

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

0 18

18

J

HL_UM HEAVY PAPER

HeavypaperTH_UMsetvalue

70-220

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

K

HL_US HEAVY PAPER

HeavypaperTH_USsetvalue

70-220

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

L

HL_UML ABEL PAPER

LabelpaperTH_UMsetvalue

70220 -

200

200

200

200

200

200

M

HL_US LABEL PAPER

LabelpaperTH_USsetvalue

70220 -

200

200

200

200

200

200

N

HL_UM OHP PAPER

OHP-TH_UM set value

70 220 -

190

195


190

195

195

195

: ‘15/Aug.

1 1

Item/Display

Default value 31cpm

26cpm

Setting range

Content

Group A SWA

SWB

Group B

Group A

SWA

SWA

SWB

35cpm

Group B

SWB

SWA

Group A SWB

SWA

Group B SWB

SWA

O

HL_US OHP PAPER

OHP-TH_US set value

70 220 -

190

195

190

195

195

P

HL_UM ENV PAPER

EnvelopeTH_UMsetvalue

70220 -

205

205

205

205

210

210

Q

HL_US ENV PAPER

EnvelopeTH_USsetvalue

70 220 -

205

205

205

205

210

210

R

HL_UME-STAR

PreheatingTH_UMsetvalue

70-220

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

S

HL_USE-STAR

PreheatingTH_USsetvalue

70-220

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

95

T

HL_UM PRE-JOB

TH_UM set value when recovery from Warm-Up

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

U

HL_UM

TH_UM set value when Warm-

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

205

205

205

205

V

WARMUP_120L HL_US WARMUP_120L

Up at 120 degree C or below TH_US set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or below

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

205

205

205

205

W

LO_WARMUP_TIM E

U, V applying time (Timer from 255- 0 0 completion of Ready)

X

HL_UM WARMUP_120H HL_US WARMUP_120H

TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or above TH_US set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or above

HI_WARMUP_TIM E HI_WU_FM_ON_T MP

X, Y applying time (Timer from 255- 0 0 completion of Ready) FM prior rotation start TH_US220- 0 0 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above Warm-Up completion time 60 -0 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above

Y Z AA

195

95 95

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

AB

HI_WU_END_TIME

AC

HI_WU_JOB_SET_ TMP 1

Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above

30-220

AD

HI_WARMUP_BOR DER

Threshold value alpha to which U - W is applied

119 -1

AE

LO_WU_JOB_SET _TMP 1

Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below

70-220

18

18

180

60

18

180

60

180

190

60

180

190

18

18

190

60

180

60

190

180

0

18

180

60 180

18

190

60 190

18

190

60 190

18

205

60 205

18

18

205

60

205

60

205

205

18

205

60 205

AF

JOBEND_FUMON_ TIME

After rotating time when a job60 is completed

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

AG

HI_WU_JOB_SET_ TMP 2

Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

AH

LO_WU_JOB_SET _TMP 2

Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below

70-220

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

180

180

190

190

Code descriptions TH_UM

Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)

HL_UM

Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

TH_US

Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)

HL_US

Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

List of destination groups

1

SWB

Group Group A Group B

Destination AS. U. EUROPE

CANADA U. K

INCH AUS.

-

AB_A

AB_B


: ‘15/Aug.

1

43-4 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.


Select an item to be s et with the scroll key.

2)


3)

Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved. Default value

1

26cpm Ite m

A B C

D E F

Display

Setting range

Content

Group A SWA

HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT

Black and white plain paper duplex TH_UM set value Black and white plain paper duplex TH_US set value Black and white plain paper 255 duplex applying number of sheets

220 70 -

190

220 70 -

190

HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP

Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_US set value

220 70 -

190

220 70 -

190

HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT

Black and white heavy255 paperduplex applying number of sheets

00

00

SWB

31cpm

Group B

Group A

SWA

SWA

SWB

195

190

195 0

SWA

195

190

195

195 0

195

195 0

SWA 195

195

195 0

Group B SWB

195 0

195

190 0

SWA 195

195 0

Group A SWB

195

190 0

0

SWB

35cpm

Group B

195 0

Code descriptions TH_UM


HL_UM


TH_US


HL_US


List of destination groups

1

Group

Destination

Group A

AS. U.

Group B

EUROPE

CANADA

INCH U. K

-

AUS.

AB_A

AB_B


SWB

43-10 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the postcard feed cycle



2)


Item A

Display

Content

POSTCARD CYCLE

Postcard feed cycle

Setting range 1 - 99

Default value 50


Used to perform the low-temperature, lowhumidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature setting of each paper (SIM43-01).



2)


3)


Item

Display

Setting range

Content Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment

Default value

A

HL_UM READY LL

1 - 99

B

HL_USREADYLL

Correction valueforTH_USsetvaluein readystandbyunderLLenvironment

C

HL_UM PLAIN BW LL

Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment

1 - 99

55

D E

HL_US PLAIN BW LL WARMUP FUMON HL_US T

Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under LL environment

1 - 99 1 - 99

55

F

LL WARMUPFUMOFFLL

FusingmotorpriorrotationcompletiontimeunderLLenvironment

G

WARMUPENDTIMELL

Correctionvalueforwarm-upcompletetimeunderLLenvironment

H I

HL_UMTHINLL HL_USTHINLL

CorrectionvalueforthinpaperTH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment CorrectionvalueforthinpaperTH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment

J

HL_UMHEAVYLL

Correction valueforheavypaperTH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

55

K

HL_USHEAVYLL

CorrectionvalueforheavypaperTH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

55

1-99

55

55

1-99

50

50

1-99

50

1-99 1-99

55 55

L

HL_UMLABELLL

CorrectionvalueforlabelpaperTH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

55

M N

HL_USLABELLL HL_UMOHPLL

CorrectionvalueforlabelpaperTH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment CorrectionvalueforOHP-TH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99 1-99

55 55

O

HL_USOHPLL

CorrectionvalueforOHP-TH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

55

P Q

HL_UMENVLL HL_USENVLL

CorrectionvalueforenvelopeTH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment CorrectionvalueforenvelopeTH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment

R

HL_UME-STARLL

CorrectionvalueforpreheatingTH_UMsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

S

HL_USE-STARLL

CorrectionvalueforpreheatingTH_USsetvalueunderLLenvironment

1-99

T

HL_UM PRE-JOB LL

Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL environment

1 - 99

U

HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL

Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree Cor below under LL environment

1 - 99

55

V W

HL_US WARMUP_120L LL LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL

Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or below under LL environment Correction value for O, P applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment

1 - 99 1 - 99

55 50

X

HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL

Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or above under LL environment

Y

HL_US WARMUP_120H LL

Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C o r above under LL environment

Z

HI_WU_TIME_LL

Correction value for R, S applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment

HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL

Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL 1-99 environment Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL 1-99 environment

AA AB

HI_WU_END_TIME_LL

AC

HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL

AD

HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL

AE

LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL

1-99 1-99

55 55 55 55 50

1 - 99

55

1-99 1 - 99

55 50 50 50

Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above 1-99 50 under LL environment Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-U - W under LL environm ent 1 - 99 Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below 1-99 under LL environment

AF

JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL

Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment

AG

HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL

Correction value for Job enable TH_ UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha deg ree C or above 1-99 under LL environment

50

AH

LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL

Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below under LL environment

50


1 - 99

1-99

50

50 50

* WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 count = 1s change Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change * Items C/D: Correction of "-5" is made for item C and I tem D in the cas e of B5 size Code descriptions TH_UM


HL_UM


TH_US


HL_US


* Correction value: (-49 - +49), Inpu t value: Actual input value (1 - 99) Correctionvalue

-49

-25

Input value

1

25

-5 45

0 50

+5 55

+25

+49

75

99


Used to perform the low-temperature, lowhumidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature setting of each paper (SIM43-04).



2)


3)


Item

Display

Setting range

Content

Default value

A

HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL

Correction value for the upper TH_UM black and white plain paper duplex und er the LL environment

1-99

55

B

HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL

1-99

55

C

PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL

Correction value for the upper TH_US black and white plain paper duplex under the LL environment Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex under LL

1-99

50

D

HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL

1-99

55

E

HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL

1-99

55

F

HEAVY BW DU P APP CN T LL

1-99

50

environment Correction value for the upper TH_UM set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the LL environment Correction value for the upper TH_US set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the LL environment Correction value for ap plying number of sheets in bl ack and white heavy paper duplex under LL environment

* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL: 1 count = 1s change Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change

Code descriptions TH_UM TH_US

Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)

HL_UM HL_US

Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper) Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

* Setting value: Target value (-49 - +49), Input value: (Actual input value) 1 - 99 Settingvalue

-49

-25

Input value

1

25

-5

0

+5

+25

+49

45

50

55

75

99


44 44-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.

Section

Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)


Select an item to be set with the touch panel. (The selected item is highlighted.)

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The s et value is saved.)

CAUTION: Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially required. Item/Display

Content

MD_VG

Membranedecrease(GB)Enable/Disablesetting

MD_DV_LIFE

DVlifecorrection(GB,DVB)Enable/Disablesetting

MD_ENV MD_DUPLEX

Environmentcorrection(GB,DVB)Enable/Disablesetting Duplexprintcorrection(GB,DVB)Enable/Disablesetting

MD_LD

Membranedecreaselifecorrection(laserpower)Enable/Disablesetting

MD_LD_ENV

Environmentcorrection(laserpower)Enable/Disablesetting

TN_LIFE TN_ENV

Enable/Disablesettingofthetonerdensitylifecorrection Enable/Disablesettingofthetonerdensityenvironmentcorrection

TN_DUPLEX

TonerdensityduplexprintcorrectionEnable/Disablesetting

TN_COV

Enable/Disablesettingofthetonerdensityprintratiocorrection

TN_AREA

Enable/Disablesettingofthetonerdensityareacorrection

TN_DRIP TC

Enable/Disablesettingofthetonerdensitycorrection unconditionalsupply Enable/Disablesettingofthetransferoutputcorrection


Operation data display Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation.

Section

Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)

Operation/Procedure Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.


Settingrange Blacktexton white background (Inhibit: 0=NO) White text on black background (Allow: 1=YES)

Defaultvalue Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable disable Enable Enable Enable Enable

NOTE

1

: ‘15/Aug. Mode

CPY/ PRN*1

1/2 (PROCESS)

Item/Display (*: Correction value)

Pagenumber

REF(TS_OFF)

Left

Right

DVB ***

Left

GB ***

Right

DVB ***

Left Right

GB *** DVB ***

Left

GB ***

Right

DVB ***

Left Right

GB *** DVB ***

MD_VG

Left

GB***

MD_DV_LIFE

Left Right

GB *** DVB ***

Process developer life correction amount -127 +127 GB/DVB value +127 -127 0

0

MD_ENV

Left

GB***

0

Right

DVB ***

EnvironmentcorrectionamountGB/DVB -127 +127 value +127 -127 0

Left Right

GB *** DVB ***

Duplex printcorrection amount GB/DVB value 255-

ALL (TS_ON_P)

MD_DUPLEX

1/2 (TN/TC/MD)

REF (TS_OFF)

Left

LD(CP)

400

GB/DVB value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when Copy TS is ON.

400

390

Laserpowerdefaultvalue when TSis OFF (CP/PRT)

LD (CP) (PRT) LD

REF (TS_ON_C)

Left

LD (CP)

ALL (TS_ON_C)

Right Left

(PRT) LD LD (CP)

Right

(PRT) LD

MD_LD

Left Right

LD(CP) (PRT) LD

Drum membrane decrease laserpower correction amount (CP/PRT)

MD_LD_ENV

Left

LD (CP)

Right

(PRT) LD

Environment laserpowercorrection amount (CP/PRT)

0

-127 +127 -

0

+127 -127 -

TonercontroldisplaytemperatureAD value TonercontroldisplayhumidityADvalue Transferdisplaytemperature/humidity area

TC_TMP_DATA

***

TransferdisplaytemperatureADvalue

0-1023

TC_HUD_DATA MD_VG_AREA

*** ***

TransferdisplayhumidityADvalue Membranedecreasedrumtraveling distance area

0-1023 15 - 1

MD_DV_LIFE_AREA

***

Developerlifeareaforprocess

0-15

MD_ENV_AREA

***

Environment correction area

81 -

MD_DUPLEX_COUNTER MD_LD_AREA

*** ***

Duplex counter Laser power area

300 -0

Model type of the machine

8

1

4

4 0

0-1023 8 1

4 0

0

0

0

1

1 1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

08 -

*1: The left of the correction amount indicates the execution result, and the right indicates the reference value.

0

4

4

-

4

0

-

0

0

15 -0

1-0

0 0

1023 -0

Crumdestination


-

0

0

0

*** ***

xx

For default values refer to "Default values for each item".

+127 +127 -127 - -127 0

***

xx

0 0

0 - 255

TN_HUD_DATA TC_TMP_AREA

Right

0

0 - 255

TN_TMP_DATA

CRUMDEST_K

0 0

255 - 0

Tonercontroldisplaytemperature/ humidity area

Laserpowerenvironmentarea

0 0

0 - 255

***

MachinesidemanagementCRUM destination

0

0 - 255

TN_TMP_AREA

***

0

255 - 0 0 0

Laser power default value when TS is ON (CP/PRT) 255 - 0 Laser power value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount 255 - 0 when Copy TS is ON (CP/PRT)

xx

390 250

255 - 0

Laser power value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when TS is OFF (CP/PRT)

390 250

250

255 - 0

540 400

750 0 650 - 0

460 320

540

390

(PRT) LD

MODEL TYPE

460

750 0 650 - 0

605 430

GB/DVB value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when Printer TS is ON Drummembranedecreasecorrection amount GB value

Left Right

Left

575

Printer GB/DVB default value when TS is 750 0 ON 650 - 0 250

Right

DESTINATION

430

GB/DVB value after addition or 750 0 subtraction of the correction amount 650 - 0 400 when TS is OFF Copy GB/DVB default value when TS is 750 0 ON 650 - 0 320

ALL (TS_OFF)

MD_LD_ENV_AREA 2/2 (CRUM/CNT)

650 - 0

35cpm

605

GB ***

REF (TS_ON_P)

OTHER

575

DVB ***

ALL(TS_ON_C)

1

26/31cpm

0-750

Left

REF (TS_ON_C)

2/2 (LD)

GB/DVBdefaultvaluewhenTSisOFF

Right ALL (TS_OFF)

CPY/ PRN*1

GB***

Default value

Display range

Content

0

-

-

Default v alues for each item Mode CPY/ PRN

Item/Display REF (TS_OFF)

LD (CP) LD (PRT)

ALL (TS_OFF) REF (TS_ON_C) ALL (TS_ON_C)

LD (CP)

Default value 35cpm machin e 170 170 170

31cpm machine 160 160 160

26cpm machin e 160 160 160

LD (PRT) LD (CP)

170 170

160 160

160 160

LD (PRT)

170

160

160

LD (CP) LD (PRT)

170 170

160 160

160 160


: ‘15/Aug.

1

46

44-14 Purpose

Operation data display

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.

46-2 Purpose

Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)

Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ LSU

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.

The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.

Operation/Procedure


Item/ Display TH_UM

Section

Content

1)


2)


Display range

Fusing upper thermistor main detection temperature Fusing upper thermistor main detection temperature A/D value

Temperature: 0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1 degree C) AD value: 0-1023

3)

TH_US

Fusing upper thermistor sub detection temperature Fusing upper thermistor sub detection temperature A/D value

Temperature: 0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1 degree C) AD value: 0-1023

To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" mode and change the adjustment v alue. To adjust the copy density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the adjustment value.

TH_RA

Temperature thermistor Temperature thermistor A/D value

Temperature: - 40.0-60.0 degree C (+/ - 0.1 degree C) AD value: 0-123

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.

HUD_RA

Humidity sensor Humidity sensor A/D value

Humidity: 5.0-90.0% (+/- 0.1%) AD value: 0-1023

* When the

key is pressed, the setting value of each

item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display

Content

A

AUTO1

Auto 1

B

AUTO2

Auto 2

EXT

Text

LOW

Setting range 1 - 99

HIGH

44-43 CT

Purpose

Data display

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.

D

Developing system

Section

Operation/Procedure The identification number and the identification signal level of the developing unit are displayed. Item/Displ ay A

B

C

DVCH KIND K

Con tent K developing unit identification number

Display range 1-9

DV_TYP_ SEL_K

K developing unit identification detection

0-1

DVCH_ AD_K

K developing unit identification AD value

0 - 255

NOTE The model identification number of the developing unit which is backed up in the EEPROM of the machine. 0 = High (Open) 1 = Low (GND) AD value of the developing unit identification voltage

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text/Printed Photo

E

TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph

F

PRINTEDPHOTO

G H I

PHOTOGRAPH MAP AUTO1

LOW

Default value 50

1-99 99 -1

50 50

HIGH

1-99

LOW HIGH

99- 1 1-99

50

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH LOW

1-99 1-99

50 50

50 50

HIGH LOW

1-99 1-99

50 50

HIGH

1-99

50

Photograph

LOW

1-99

50 50

Map

HIGH 1-99 LOW 99- 1

PrintedPhoto

Auto1(copy to copy)

50

HIGH

1-99

50

LOW

1-99

50

HIGH LOW

1-99 1-99

50 50

HIGH

1-99

50

LOW

1-99

50

J

AUTO2

Auto 2 (copy to copy)

K

TEXT

Text (copy to copy)

HIGH

1-99

50

L

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text printed photo (copy to copy)

LOW HIGH

1-99 1-99

50 50

M

PRINTED PHOTO

Printed photo (copy to copy)

LOW HIGH

1-99 1-99

50 50


1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

46-4

1

46-8

Purpose

Adjustment (Color scanner mode)

Purpose

Adjustment (Color scanner mode)

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)

Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch panel.

2)


2)

* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed wi th 1up (1down) collectively.


3)



4)


3)

When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is

The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density

increased, and vice versa.

area and the high density area. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the target color is increased, and vice versa.

Mode LOW

HIGH

Item/Display AA

UTO

Content

Setting range

Auto

99 -1 99- 1

Default value 50

Item/Display

Text Text/Printed Photo

1 - 99

50

D

TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph

1-99

50

E

PRINTEDPHOTO

F

PHOTOGRAPH

Photograph

G

MAP

Map

99- 1

A B

AUTO TEXT

Auto Text

99 -1 99- 1

C

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text/Printed Photo

1 - 99

50

D

TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph

1-99

50

1)

E F

PRINTEDPHOTO PHOTOGRAPH

1-99 1-99

50 50


2)


G

MAP

PrintedPhoto Photograph Map

1-99

50

1-99

50 50 50 50

99- 1

A

LOW DENSITY POINT

Low density correction amount

B

HIGH DENSITY POINT

High density correction amount

46-9 Adjustment (RSPF mode)

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the scan image density.


* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

Purpose

Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.

3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy mode, and the fax mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.

Section

Item/Display

Operation/Procedure

2)

3)

A

COPY : LOW

B

SCAN : LOW

* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed wi th 1up (1down) collectively.

C

FAX : LOW


D

COPY : HIGH

E

SCAN : HIGH

F

FAX : HIGH

Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch panel. Enter the set value with 10-key.

When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa. Mode LOW

HIGH

Item/Display

Content Auto/Text

Setting range 1-99

Default value

A

AUTOTEXT

B C

TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

50

D

TEXT/PHOTO

E

PRINTEDPHOTO

F

PHOTOGRAPH

G

MAP

A B

AUTOTEXT TEXT

C

TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text/Printed Photo

1 - 99

50

D

TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph

1-99

50

E F

PRINTEDPHOTO PHOTOGRAPH

1-99 1-99

50 50

G

MAP

Text 99- 1 50 Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 Text/Photograph PrintedPhoto Photograph Map Auto/Text Text

PrintedPhoto Photograph Map

1-99

50

1-99 99- 1

50 50

1-99 99- 1

99- 1

50 50

1-99

50 50

Purpose

50

46-5

1)

Default value

TEXT TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

PrintedPhoto

50

Content

B C

50 50

50


Content

Setting range

Default value

RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)

1-99

40

1-99

40

RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side) RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (High density side) RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)

1-99

40

1-99

50

1-99

50

RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (high density)

1-99

50

1

46-19

46-32

Purpose

Setting

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents.

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

Select an item to be set with touch panel.

1)

When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is saved.

Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch panel.

2)


3)


Item/Display

Content

Default value

Set value

AE_MODE

Auto exposure mode

MODE1, MODE2

MODE2

AE_STOP_COPY

Auto B/W exposure Stop (for copy)

REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN

STOP

AE_STOP_FAX

Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX) Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner)

ON/OFF

ON

REALTIME/ STOP/ PRESCAN

STOP

Auto exposure filter setting

SOFT

NORMAL

AE_STOP_SCAN

AE_FILTER

NORMAL SHARP

AE_WIDTH

AE exposure width

FULL/PART

When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased. Item/Display

Content

A B

COPY : OC COPY:RSPF

Copy mode (for OC) Copymode(forRSPF)

C

SCAN:OC

D E

SCAN : RSPF FAX:OC

Scanner mode (for RSPF) FAXmode(forOC)

F

FAX:RSPF

FAXmode(forRSPF)

Scannermode(forOC)

Setting range

Default value

1 - 250 196 1-250 196 1-250

196

1 - 250 196 1-250 196 1-250

196

FULL

46-37 46-30 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)

Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.

1)

Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corresponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.

2)


3)


2)


4)

Press [YES] key.

Item/Display A

SCAN RESOLUTION SW

Setting range

Content Scan resolution selection (COPY: COLOR)

Mode1 Mode2

01 -

Default value

0

0

This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow images when copying color documents with red and yellow images in the monochrome mode. Applied to the copy mode only.

1

Item/Display Resolution in the sub Mode

Mode1 Mode2

Scan mode

scanning direction

(DPI)

25-99% [Magnification ratio] 600


RSPF

600

600

-

OC

300

600

1200

RSPF

400

600

-

OC


Content

A

R-Ratio

Gray making setting (R)

B

G-Ratio

Graymakingsetting(G)

B-Ratio

Setting range 0 - 1000 0-1000

Default value 108 678

Gray making setting (B) (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)

* B-Ratio: The value of gr ay making setting (B) is obta ined from the formula below. 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial values (Default). When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased, the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is increased. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.


46-39

46-41

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)

Set the document on the document table.

2)


2)


3)


3)

Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key

Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large numeric value to decrease moire. Item/Display A B

Content

200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF

C

200 x 200 [DPI] ON

D

200 x 400 [DPI] OFF

E

200 x 400 [DPI] ON

F

400 x 400 [DPI] OFF

G

400 x 400 [DPI] ON

H

600 x 600 [DPI] OFF

I

600 x 600 [DPI] ON

200 x 100 [DPI] halftone OFF

Setting

Default

range 2-0

value

1 1

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted. Item/Display Auto

EXPOSURE1

Exposure1

199 -

50

C

EXPOSURE2

Exposure2

199 -

50

D

EXPOSURE3

Exposure3

199 -

50

199 199 -

50 50

2-0

1

E F

EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5

Exposure4 Exposure5

200 x 400 [DPI] halftone OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] halftone ON 400 x 400 [DPI] halftone OFF

2-0

1

G

EXECUTE MODE

Print mode

2-0

1

2-0

1

400 x 400 [DPI] halftone ON

2-0

1

600 x 600 [DPI] halftone OFF 600 x 600 [DPI] halftone ON

2-0

1

2-0

1

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Section Operation/Procedure Enter the set value with 10-key.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.

A

EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)

Content Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Setting range 1-99

AUTO EXP1 EXP2

Auto

1-6

1

Exposure 1 Exposure 2

2 3

EXP3

Exposure 3

4

EXP4

Exposure 4

5

EXP5

Exposure 5

6

1 (AUTO)

To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the document and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, and press [EXECUTE] key.

Purpose


value 50

AUTO

B 2-0

2)

Default

range 1 - 99

200 x 200 [DPI] halftone OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] halftone ON

1)

Setting

A

46-40

Item/Display

Content

Default value 50


46-42

46-43

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)


3)


3)


When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted. Item/Display

Content

Setting

Default value 50

A

AUTO

Fine/Automatic

range 1 - 99

B

EXPOSURE1

Fine/Exposure1

1-99

50

C

EXPOSURE2

Fine/Exposure2

1-99

50

D

EXPOSURE3

Fine/Exposure3

1-99

E F

EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5

Fine/Exposure4 Fine/Exposure5

1-99 1-99

G

AUTOH _TONE

Fine/Automatic/ Halftone

199 -

50

H

EXPOSURE1 H_TONE

Fine/Exposure 1/ Halftone

199 -

50

1-99

50

50

C

EXPOSURE2

1-99

50

50 50

D

EXPOSURE3

SuperFine/ Exposure 3

1-99

50

E

EXPOSURE4


1-99

50

F

EXPOSURE5


1-99

50

G

AUTOH_TONE

SuperFine/ Auto/Halftone

1-99

50

H

EXPOSURE1 H_TONE

Super Fine/ Exposure 1/Halftone

1-99

50

EXPOSURE3 H_TONE


199 -

50

K

EXPOSURE4 H_TONE


199 -

50

L

EXPOSURE5 H_TONE


199 -

50

EXP1 EXP2 EXP3 EXP4 EXP5 AUTO H_TONE EXP1 H_TONE

Fine/ Exposure 1 Fine/ Exposure 2 Fine/ Exposure 3

1 2

value 50

SuperFine/ Exposure 1 SuperFine/ Exposure 2

J

112

Default

Super Fine/Auto

50

Fine/Auto

range 1 - 99

EXPOSURE1

199 -

Print mode

Setting

AUTO


AUTO

Content

B

EXPOSURE2 H_TONE

EXECUTE MODE

Item/Display A

I

M

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and the scanned document image is outputted.

1 (AUTO)

3 4

I

EXPOSURE2 H_TONE


1-99

50

J

EXPOSURE3 H_ TONE

Super Fi ne/ Exposure 3/Halftone

1-99

50

K

EXPOSURE4 H_TONE


1-99

50

L

EXPOSURE5 H_ TONE

Super Fi ne/

1-99

50

EXECUTE MODE

Exposure 5/Halftone Print Super Fine/ mode Auto

M

AUTO

112

1

Fine/ Exposure 4 Fine/ Exposure 5 Fine/ Automatic/ halftone

5

EXP1


2

6

EXP2


3

7

EXP3


4

EXP4

5

Fine/ Exposure 1/ Halftone

8


EXP5


6

Super Fine/ Auto/ Halftone

7

EXP2 H_TONE


9

AUTO H_TONE

EXP3 H_TONE


10

EXP1 H_TONE

Super Fine/ Exposure 1/ Halftone

8

EXP4 H_ONE


11

EXP2 H_TONE

9

EXP5 H_TONE


12

EXP3 H_TONE

Super Fine/ Exposure 2/ Halftone Super Fine/ Exposure 3/ Halftone Super Fine/ Exposure 4/ Halftone

EXP4 H_TONE

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the document and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, and press [EXECUTE] key.

EXP5 H_TONE

Super Fine/ Exposure 5/ Halftone

1 (AUTO)

10

11

12



46-44

46-45

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)


3)


3)



Content

Setting

Default

range 1 - 99

value 50


Content

Setting

Default

A

AUTO

Ultra Fine/Auto

A

AUTO

600dpi/Auto 1

range 1 - 99

B

EXPOSURE1

UltraFine/Exposure1

1-99

50

B

EXPOSURE1

600dpi/Exposure1

1-99

50

value 50

C

EXPOSURE2

UltraFine/Exposure2

1-99

50

C

EXPOSURE2

600dpi/Exposure2

1-99

50

D

EXPOSURE3

UltraFine/Exposure3

1-99

50

D

EXPOSURE3

600dpi/Exposure3

1-99

50

E F

EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5

UltraFine/Exposure4 UltraFine/Exposure5

1-99 1-99

50 50

E F

EXPOSURE4 EXPOSURE5

600dpi/Exposure4 600dpi/Exposure5

1-99 1-99

50 50

G

AUTO H_TONE

Ultra Fine/Auto/ Halftone

1-99

50

G

AUTOH_TONE

600dpi/Auto/ Halftone 1

1-99

50

H

EXPOSURE1 H_TONE

Ultra Fine/ Exposure 1/Halftone

1-99

50

H

EXPOSURE1 H_ TONE

600dpi/Exposure 1/ Halftone

1-99

50

I

EXPOSURE2 H_TONE


1-99

50

I

EXPOSURE2 H_TONE


1-99

50

J

EXPOSURE3 H_TONE


1-99

50

J

EXPOSURE3 H_TONE


1-99

50

K

EXPOSURE4 H_TONE


1-99

50

K

EXPOSURE4 H_TONE


1-99

50

L

EXPOSURE5 H_TONE


M

EXECUTE MODE

Print mode

AUTO

Ultra Fine/ Auto

1-99 112

1

50

L

EXPOSURE5 H_TONE


1 (AUTO)

M

EXECUTE MODE

Print mode

AUTO

600dpi/ Auto

1-99 112

50 1

EXP1

UltraFine/ Exposure 1

2

EXP1

600dpi/ Exposure 1

2

EXP2


3

EXP2

600dpi/ Exposure 2

3

EXP3


4

EXP3

600dpi/ Exposure 3

4

EXP4


5

EXP4

600dpi/ Exposure 4

5

EXP5


6

EXP5

600dpi/ Exposure 5

6

AUTO H_TONE

Ultra Fine/ Auto/ Halftone

7

AUTO H_TONE

600dpi/ Auto/ Halftone

7

EXP1 H_TONE

Ultra Fine/ Exposure 1/ Halftone

8

EXP1 H_TONE

600dpi/ Exposure 1/Halftone

8

EXP2 H_TONE


9

EXP2 H_TONE


9

EXP3 H_TONE

Ultra Fine/ Exposure 3/ Halftone Ultra Fine/ Exposure 4/ Halftone

10

EXP3 H_TONE

10

11

EXP4 H_TONE

600dpi/ Exposure 3/Halftone 600dpi/ Exposure 4/Halftone


12

EXP5 H_TONE


12

EXP4 H_TONE EXP5 H_TONE


1 (AUTO)

11



46-47

46-60

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)


2)


3)

Press [OK] key.

3)

Press [OK] key.

The set value is saved. Operation

Item/Displ ay

mode

FILLING (COLOR) (COLOR mode)*1

FILLING (GRAY) (Monochrome halftone mode)*1

PUSH SCAN (COLOR) (Scanner (Color mode))

PUSH SCAN (GRAY) (Scanner (Monochrome halftone mode))

A

B

C

D

FILLING (C)

FILLING (G)

SCAN (C) *1

SCAN (G) *2

The set value is saved. Cont ent

Setting

Default

range

value

0(LOW)

LOW

Low compression (Color)

0

MIDDLE

Medium compression (Color)

1

HIGH

High compression (Color) Low compression (Gray)

2

MIDDLE

Medium compression (Gray)

1

HIGH

High compression (Gray)

2

MIDDLE 1

Medium compression mode 1 Low compression

0

MIDDLE 2

Medium compression mode 2 Medium compression

1

MIDDLE 3

Medium compression mode 3 High compression Medium compression mode 1 Low compression

2

Medium compression mode 2 Medium compression

1

Medium compression mode 3 High

2

LOW

MIDDLE 1

MIDDLE 2

MIDDLE 3

Item/Display A

SCREEN FILTER LEVEL

H L AUTO

B 0

0(LOW)

1 (MIDDLE 2)

C

CPY PUSH AUTO FILTER LEVEL

SOFT

B/W COPY

OFF

CENTER HIGH

ON

Content Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto copy mode Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) Softfilter applying setting in

Setting

Default

range

value

Strong emphasis

1

3(Auto)

Soft emphasis

2

Auto

3

SOFT

1

2

CENTER HIGH

2 3

(CENTER)

(ON) 1

OFF

0

ON

1

OFF ON

0 1

(ON) 1

OFF

0

(ON) 1

ON

1

monochro me copy mode

0

1 (MIDDLE 2)

D

COLOR PUSH : RGB

OFF ON

Softfilter applying setting to image in push scan color mode

E

B/W PUSH

OFF

B/W PRINT

OFF

Softfilter applying setting to image in push scan monochro me mode Settingof ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochro me print images

F

compression

*1: Disable without HDD. *2: Setting of compression rate for imag es when the image compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode. NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, however, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably reduced.


ON

ON

OFF

0

ON

1

0 (OFF)

46-61

Item/Display

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.

Section Select an adjustment mode.

2)

Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch panel.

3)

Enter the adjustment value using the 10 -key.

4)

Press [OK] key.

Detection level adjustment: High density dots

Q

SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 MIDDLE]

Detection level adjustment: Medium density dots

149 -

25

R

SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 LOW]

Detection level adjustment: Low density dots

149 -

25

S

SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 2] SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 3]

Detection level adjustment: Dot 2 Detection level adjustment: Dot 3

15 1 -

8

15 1 -

8

SEGMENT: ADJUST

Detection level

149 -

25

[LINE HALFTONE]

adjustment: line screen

T

The set value is saved.

U

CAUTION: This mustrequired. be set to the default unless any change is specially When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents. Item/Display COLOR AUTO

MONO

Content [Color/Gray]Auto

TPP

[Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)

COPY(TPP)

[Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)

AUTO

[Monochrome]Auto

TPP

[Monochrome] Manual (Text print)

COPY(TPP)

[Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)

Default value 25

SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 HIGH]


Setting range 149 -

Content

P

46-62 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the auto exposure mode.


Item/Display A

Content

Setting range

Default value


2)

Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.

3)

Press [OK] key.

SEGMENT: SWITCH [TXT ON SCR] SEGMENT: SWITCH [LINE SCR]

Detection ON/OFF: Text on do t Detection ON/OFF: line screen

1 -0 1 -0

0

C

SEGMENT: SWITCH [SMALL SCR]

Detection ON/OFF: Dot in a small area

1 -0

0

CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.

D

SEGMENT: SWITCH [HIGH LPI]

Detection ON/OFF: High line number judgment select

1 -0

0

E

SEGMENT: SWITCH [TXT ON SCR IMAGE SEND]

Detection ON/OFF: Text on image send dots

1 -0

0

When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents.

F

SEGMENT: AD JUST [BK TXT 1]

Detection level adjustment: Black text 1

199 -

Detection level adjustment: Color text 1 Detection level adjustment: Black text 2, Color text 2

199 -

50

149 -

25

B

0

1)


Item/Display 50

G

SEGMENT: ADJUST [CL TXT 1]

H

SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]

I

SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON SCR 1]

Detection level adjustment: Text 1 on dots

199 -

50

J

SEGMENT: AD JUST [TXT ON SCR 2]

Detection level adjustment: Text 2 on dots

199 -

50

K

SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON SCR AREA]

Detection level adjustment: Detection

15 1

8

L

SEGMENT: AD JUST [HIGH LPI]

area of text on dots Detection level adjustment: High line number judgment

149 -

25

M

SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK]

Detection level adjustment: No chrome judgment

199 -

50

N

SEGMENT: ADJUST [CL]

199 -

50

O

SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON BG]

Detection level adjustment: Chrome judgment Detection level adjustment: Text on background

199 -

50

Content

Setting range

Default value

A

SW_ACS

ACS judgment reference area select

1-0

1

B

TEXT_IMAGE

Text/Image judgment priority level adjustment

6-0

3

C

TEXT_BLANK

4

HT_LV

Text/Blank judgment priority level adjustment Dotareajudgment threshold value adjustment

6-0

D

6-0

1

E

AE_AREA_LV

ColorAEjudgmenttarget area adjustment

6-0

3

F

AE_LV_CC

AEb ackgroundd etection division result adjustment: For color copy

8-0

4

G

AE_LV_MC

8-0

4

H

AE_LV_CS

AEbackground detection division result adjustment: For monochrome copy AEb ackgroundd etection division result adjustment: For color scan

8-0

4

I

AE_LV_MS

8-0

4

J

AE_JUDGE_ LV_L_U

AEbackgrounddetection division result adjustment: For monochrome scan Color AE background density threshold value adjustment (lower limit)

4-0

0


Item/Display

Content

K

AE_JUDGE_ LV_L_O

Color AE background density threshold value adjustment (upper limit)

L

AE_JUDGE_ LV_C

Color AE background detection level adjustment (chroma)

M

AE_ ONOFF_ CC

ON

AE mode ON/ OFF switch: For color copy

AE_ ONOFF_ MC

ON

AE_

ON

ONOFF_ CS

OFF

OFFcolor switch : For scan

OFF

AE_ ONOFF_ MS

ON

AE mode ON/ OFF switch : For monochrome copy

ON

N

O

P

OFF

OFF

OFF

AE mode ON/ OFF switch: For monochrome copy AE mode ON/

ON

Setting range 10 -0

0

J

COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)

Copy document, Printed photo (color copy)

10 -0

5

K

COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

Text print (color PUSH)

0-1

0

OFF

Default value

0(ON)

Item/Display

0-1

0

ON

0-1

0

COLORPUSH:TEXT

Printed photo (color PUSH) Photograph (color PUSH)

9-1

5

9-1

5

O

COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PHOTO

Text/Photograph (color PUSH)

9-1

3

P

COLORPUSH:MAP

0-1

0

Map(colorPUSH)

1-9

3

COLOR PUSH : PRINTED PHOTO COLOR PUSH : PHOTOGRAPH

0(ON) 1

9-1

L

N ON

Text(colorPUSH)

Setting Default range value 9-1 5

M

1

OFF

Content

1-9

3

5

0(ON) 1

OFF

0(ON)

48

1

Q

BLANK_JUDGE_ LV_L

Blank judgment level adjustment (value)

10 -0

0

R

BLANK_JUDGE_ LV_C

Blank judgment level adjustment (chroma)

10 -0

0

S

MODE0_UNDER

Mode 0 d eveloping paper mode select

6-0

0

T

MODE1_UNDER


6-0

0

U

MODE5_UNDER

Mode 5 de veloping paper mode select

6-0

0

V

MODE6_UNDER


6-0

0

48-1 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction).



2)


3)


46-63 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased.

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.

A change of "1" in the adjustment value of i tem A, C, or E corresponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of i tem B, D, or F corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.



2)


3)


When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased. Item/Display A

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

B C

COLORCOPY:TEXT COLOR COPY :

D

PRINTED PHOTO COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH

E F

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO COLORCOPY:MAP

G

COLOR COPY : LIGHT

H

COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY) COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY)

I

Content Text print (color copy) Text(colorcopy) Printed photo (color copy) Photograph (color copy) Text/Photograph (color copy) Map(colorcopy) Light document (color density) Copy document, Character print (color copy) Copy document, Character (color copy)

Setting range

Default value

9-1

3

1-9 9-1

3 5

9-1

5

9-1 1-9

Item/Display

9-1

5

9-1

5

Default value

CCD (MAIN)


1-99

50

B

CCD (SUB)


1-99

50

C

SPF (MAIN)

1-99

50

D

SPF (SUB)

1-99

50

E

SPFB (MAIN)

RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)

1-99

50

F

SPFB (SUB)


1-99

50

3

6

Setting range

A

5

9-1

Content


: ‘15/Aug.

1

48-5

49

Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).

Section

Scanner section


Operation/Procedure Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch panel.

Operation/Procedure

2)


1)

Save the firmware to the USB memory.

3)

Press [OK] key.

2)

Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the operation panel section.)

3)

Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.

4)

Select a target firmware.

5)

Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. Press [EXECUTE] key.

6)

Press [YES] key.

The set value is saved. When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is specified, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform this adjustment. When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction, change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change the adjustment value in the low speed mode. Item/Display

Content

A

MR (HI)

Scanner motor (High speed)

B C

MR(MID) MR(LO)

Scanner motor (Reference speed) Scannermotor(Lowspeed)

D

SPF(HI)

E

SPF(MID)

Setting range

The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.

Default value

1 - 99

50

1 - 99 1-99

50 50

Document feed (SPF) motor (High speed)

1-99

50

Document feed (SPF) motor (Reference speed)

1-99

50

Item/Display

ICUMainsection ICU Boot section main

ICU (BOOTCN)

ICU Boot section CN

ICUCN

ICU (SUB) LANGUAGE

ICU Sub section (ARM9) Language support data program

ICUS LANG

48-6 Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.


Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO] [HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.

2)

ICUM ICUBM

Graphicdata forL-LCD

SLIST

Purpose

Error display in case of abnormality

Content

ICU(MAIN) ICU (BOOTM)

GRAPHIC

1

Used to perform the firmware update.

Section

1)

SLISTdataforL-LCD

GRAPH SLIST

PCU(BOOT)

PCUBootsection

PCUB

PCU(MAIN)

PCUMainsection

PCUM

FIN (BOOT)

Inner finisher boot section

FINB

FIN (MAIN) SCU(BOOT)

Inner finisher main section SCUBootsection

FINM SCUB

SCU(MAIN) FAX(BOOT)

SCUMainsection FAX1Bootsection

SCUM FAXB

FAX(MAIN)

FAX1Mainsection

FAXM

ANIMATION

Animation data

WEBHELP

WEBhelp

ANIME WEBHP


3)


4)

Press [OK] key.

49-3


Purpose

When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. Item/ Display

Content

Setting range

Default value

A B

POM ADUM

Paper exit motor correction value ADUmotorcorrectionvalue

1 - 99 1-99

50

C

MM

Mainmotorcorrectionvalue

1-99

50

Function (Purpose)

Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.


Insert the USB memory into the main unit. * When the USB is not ins erted, "INSERT A STORANGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.

50

2)

Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The display is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) The current version and the update version are displayed.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes active from gray out.

4)

When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is updated. When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.


: ‘15/Aug.

1

49-5

Item/Display

Purpose

M

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform the watermark update. N


3)

The current version and the update version are displayed.

4)


5)

Press [YES] key. The selected watermark is updated.


Setting range 199 -

Default value 50

DENBCS1


1 - 99

50


1 - 99

50

DENBCS3 DENBCS4


1 - 99

50


1 - 99

50

R

DENBADU

ADU correction value

1 - 99

S

DENB-HV

Heavypaper correction value

199 -

Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark update.

Content

DENBMFT

DENBCS2

O

2)

Sub scanning direction print area correction value

P Q

55 50

A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)

50

* When the value is decr eased, the timing is advanced. When the value is increased, the timing is delayed. B - F. (RRC-B) The timing to turning ON the registration roller after receiving the registration signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)

50-1

1

Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Copy image position, image loss adjustment

Section Operation/Procedure Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch panel.

2)

Enter the set value with 10-key. Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default. RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment SIDE: Side image loss adjustment

Item/Display

Content

Setting range

Default value

RRCA

Document lead edge reference position (OC)

099 -

B

RRCBCS1

Cassette

1-99

C

RRCBCS234

Cassette 2,3,4*

199 -

40

D

RRCBMFT

Registration motor ON timing adjustment

Manual paper feed

199 -

40

ADU

1 - 99

E F G H I

RRCBADU

I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ step)

* When the value is incre ased, the void is increased. K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)

50

40

40

Image loss area setting value

LEAD

Lead edge image loss area setting

099 -

30

SIDE

Sideimagelossarea adjustment

099 -

20

Void a rea adjustment

DENA

Lead edge void area adjustment

199 -

30

DENB

Rearedgevoidarea adjustment

199 -

40

J

* When the value is increased, the image loss is increa sed. (0.1mm/step)

J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edg e void amount is adju sted. (0.1mm/ step)


Lead edge adjustment value

H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.

* When the value is incre ased, the void is increased.

LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment

A

G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ step) * When the value is incre ased, the image loss is in creased.

1)

3)

* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the value is increased, the timing is advanced.

FRONT/ REAR


199 -

20

K

Off-center adjustment

OFFSET_ OC

OC document offcenter adjustment

199 -

50

L

Magnificati on ratio correction

SCAN_ SPEED_ OC


199 -

50


50-5 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)



Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the touch panel.

2)


3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is printed.

4)

Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is in the standard adjustment value range. Standard reference value: 4.0±2.0mm

When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm. Item/Display

Content

Setting range

Default value

1 - 99

30

A

DEN-C


B

DEN-B

Rearedgevoidareaadjustment

C

FRONT/REAR


1 - 99

D

DENB-MFT

Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value

99 1

50

E

DENB-CS1

Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value

99 1

50

1-99

40

20

F

DENB-CS2

99 1

50

G

DENB-CS3

Tray 3 rear edge void area a djustment correction value

99 1

50

H

DENB-CS4

50

DENB-ADU

Tray 4 rear edge void area a djustment correction value ADU rear edge void aria adjustment correction value Heavypapercorrectionvalue

99 1

I

99 1

55

J

DENB-HV

K

MULTI COUNT

L

PAPER

MFT

Number of print Trayselection

DUPLEX

1 Tray

2

2 Tray 3 Tray

3 4

YES

4 Tray Duplexprintselection

50 1

CS2 CS3

NO

Yes No

Void amountgeneratedatthepaperrearedge.When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm. Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.

1

1-5

CS1

CS4 M

1-99 999 1 -

Manualpaperfeed

NOTE Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.

2(CS1)

5 0-1

0

1(NO) 1

When adjustment is increased, the distance from the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment value isthe decreased, thevalue distance from the paper lead edge tothe the paper imagelead leadedge edge to is decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.


: ‘15/Aug.

1

50-6 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode)

Section

RSPF



2)


3)


Content

Setting range

Default value

A

SIDE1

Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)

1-99

50

B

SIDE2

Backsurface document scan position adjustment (CCD)

1-99

50

C


LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)


0-99

20

D


FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)


0-99

20

TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)

0-99

40


LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)

Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting

0-99

20

Back surface side image loss amount setting Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting SPFfrontsurface document offcenter adjustment

0-99

20

0-99

40

1-99

50

1

E

F

G

H

FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)

I

OFSET_SPF1

J

OFSET_SPF2

SPFbacksurface document offcenter adjustment

1-99

50

K

SCAN_SPEED_SPF1

1-99

50

L

SCAN_SPEED_SPF2

RSPF document front surface magnification ratio (Sub scan) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio (Sub scan)

1-99

50

Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing is delayed. Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge, increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow. Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change


50-10 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)



2)


3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The s et value is saved.)

Item/Display A

Content

MAIN-MFT

Settingrange

Defaultvalue

1 - 99

50

Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed)

B

MAIN-CS1

Printoffcenteradjustmentvalue(Tray1)

1-99

50

C D

MAIN-CS2 MAIN-CS3

Printoffcenteradjustmentvalue(Tray2) Printoffcenteradjustmentvalue(Tray3)

1-99 1-99

50 50

E

MAIN-CS4

Printoffcenteradjustmentvalue(Tray4)

1-99

F

MAIN-ADU

Print off center adjustment value (Duplex)

NOTE Adjustment Item List

50 99 -1

50

CAUTION: If the adjustment items A - F are not properly adjusted, this adjustment cannot be executed properly. G

SUB-MFT

HS

RegistrationmotorONtimingadjustment

SUB-DSK SUB-ADU

K

MULTI COUNT

L

PAPER

40 1

40 40

999 -1

Trayselection

Manualpaperfeed

1

1 5-

1

CS1

1

Tray

2

CS2 CS3

2 3

Tray Tray

3 4

4

YES NO

40

99- 1 99 - 1 99 -

Number of print MFT

DUPLEX

1-99

Standard cassette DESK ADU

CS4 M

Manualpaperfeed

UB-CS12

I J

Duplex print selection

Tray Yes No

2(CS1)

Adjustment pattern print conditions setting

5 10 -

0

(NO) 1 1

Item A - F: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to the rear frame side. 1 step = 0.1mm change

50-12 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)



2)


3)


When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. 1step = 0.1mm Item/Display

Content

Settingrange

Document table image off-center adjustment

Defaultvalue

A

OC

B

SPF(SIDE1)

SPFfrontsurfaceimageoff-centeradjustment

199 -

50

C

SPF(SIDE2)

SPFbacksurfaceimageoff-centeradjustment

199 -

50


1 - 99

50

1

: ‘15/Aug.

50-27 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.


Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] key.

2)


3)


4)


Item/Display FAX send

A B C D E F G H I

When image send mode (Except for FAX and copy)

A B C D E F G H I

1

Content

Settingrange Defaultvalue

Image loss amount setting OC

LEAD_EDGE(OC)

OCleadedgeimagelossamountsetting

FRONT_REAR(OC) TRAIL_EDGE(OC)

OCsideimagelossamountsetting OCrearedgeimagelossamountsetting

Image loss amount setting SPF SIDE1

LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)


FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)

Frontsurfacesideimagelossamountsetting

0-100

20(2mm)

TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)

Frontsurfacerearedgeimagelossamountsetting Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting

0-100 0 - 100

30(3mm) 20 (2mm)



0-100 0-100 0-100

Backsurfacesideimagelossamountsetting Backsurfacerearedgeimagelossamountsetting

LEAD_EDGE(OC) FRONT_REAR(OC)

OCleadedgeimagelossamountsetting OCsideimagelossamountsetting

TRAIL_EDGE(OC)

OCrearedgeimagelossamountsetting


LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)



Frontsurfacesideimagelossamountsetting

TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)

Frontsurfacerearedgeimagelossamountsetting Back surface l ead edge i mage l oss amount setting


Backsurfacesideimagelossamountsetting

TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)

0 - 100

20 (2mm)

0-100

TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)

Image loss amount setting OC


30(3mm) 20(2mm) 20(2mm)

20(2mm)

0-100

30(3mm)

0-100 0-100

0(0mm) 0(0mm)

0-100

0(0mm)

0 - 100 0-100

0-100

Backsurfacerearedgeimagelossamountsetting

0 (0mm) 0(0mm)

0-100 0 - 100 0-100

0 (0mm) 0 (0mm) 0(0mm) 0(0mm)

A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased. 1step = 0.1mm 50-28

Item/Display

Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.

SPF ADJ (RSPF)

ALL

Section

MFT

SIDE2 (Back surface)

CS1

* ADJ 13 Scan image mag nification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment) * ADJ 14 Scan image of f-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)

1) 2)

Select an adjustment item with t he menu button. Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.

3)


4)

Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.

5)

Press [OK] key.

CS2

Sub scanning magnification ratio

CS2

Item/Display SETUP/ PRINT ADJ

ALL

LEAD

Content MFT CS2 ADU CS3 CS4

OFF SET

MFT CS1 CS2 ADU CS3

Content Document lead edge Document off-center Sub scanning magnification ratio

Section Scanner


Print off center

CS1

* ADJ 15 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (Manual adjustments)

CS1

Document off-center

CS1

* ADJ 12 Print imag e position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)

MFT

Section Scanner

MFT

The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with SIM50-28.

OC ADJ

Document l ead e dge

CS2

Operation/Procedure

Item/Display

Content

SIDE1 (Front surface)

Print lead edge

Section Engine

1 1

: ‘15/Aug.

51

2)


3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF timing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 2ms. The setting range is -98 - +98ms.

51-1 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer current.

Section 1)

Display

A

TC ON TIMING

Transfer current ON timing setting

B

TCOFF TIMING

Transfer current OFF timing setting


4)

51-2 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)

Default value

Item

Operation/Procedure

Content

50 50



(When RSPF model) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or [ENGINE] keys.

2)


3)


Mode SIDE1

SIDE2

ENGINE

Display/Item A

Setting

Content

Default

NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)

-

range value 99- 1 50

B

NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW

RSPF f ront surface d ocument d eflection amount a djustment value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)

-

99- 1

50

C

NORMAL_THIN_HIGH

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)

-

99- 1

50

D

NORMAL_THIN_LOW

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)

-

99- 1

50

E

RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/HIGH)

-

99- 1

50

F

RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)

-

99- 1

50

G

RANDOM_THIN_HIGH

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/HIGH)

-

99- 1

50

H

RANDOM_THIN_LOW

RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)

-

99- 1

50

RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH) RSPF b ack surface do cument deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)

-

99- 1

50

-

99- 1

50

A

NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1

B

NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1

A

TRAY1(S)

Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)

LT size (216mm) or less

199 -

25

B

TRAY1(L)

25

TRAY2(S)

199 -

50

D

TRAY2(L)

LT size (216mm) or above LT size (216mm) or less LT size (216mm) or above

199 -

C

Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)

199 -

50

E

MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S)

Manual feed tray/deflection ad justment value (Plain paper/Small size)


199 -

50


Mode

Display/Item

ENGINE

Content

Setting range 199 -

Default value 50

F

MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L)

Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value ( Plain paper/Large size)

LT size (216mm) or above

G

MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S)

Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)


199 -

H

MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L)

Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)


199 -

I J

MANUALOHP MANUALENV

Manualfeedtray/deflectionadjustmentvalue(OHP) Manualfeedtray/deflectionadjustmentvalue(Envelope)

K

MANUALLBL

Manualfeedtray/deflectionadjustmentvalue(Labelpaper)

L

ADU PLAIN PAPER (S)

ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)


199 -

50

M

ADU PLAIN PAPER (L)

ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)


199 -

50

N

DESK(S)

DESK/deflectionadjustmentvalue

LT size (216mm)

199 -

50

O

DESK(L)

(Plain paper/Small size) DESK/deflectionadjustmentvalue (Plain paper/Large size)

or less LT size (216mm) or above

199 -

50

Note on “Large size” and “

-

1-99 1-99

-

1-99

50 50 50 50 50

Small size”

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm). Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm). Ad ju st ment v alue When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is decreased. (When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

6)

51-9


Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.

Section

7)

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.

8)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The minimum width detection level is recognized.

Operation/Procedure

When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,

1) 2)

Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. Enter the set value with 10-key.

"COMPLETE" is displayed.

3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Content

Setting range

Default value

Item

Display

A

DHV ON

Separation voltage ON/OFF timing adjustment

1-99

50

B

DHV OFF

Separation voltage OFF timing adjustment

1-99

50

1

TRAYVOLMAX

Tray size volume maximum value

2

TRAYVOLA4R

Tray volume A4R size adjustment value

3

TRAYVOLA5R

Tray volume A5R size adjustment value

4

TRAYVOLMIN

Tray size volume minimum value

53-7

When the adjustment value is increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 4ms. The setting range is -196 - +196ms.

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.


53 53-6 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.


Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.

2)


1)


2)


3)


Item/Display A B

AD_MAX AD_P1

C D

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.

4)


509

AD_P2

A5Rwidthposition

0-1023

808

AD_MIN

Min.widthposition

0-1023

961

The A4R width detection level is recognized. 5)

Default value

0 - 1023 0-1023

The maximum width detection level is recognized. 3)

Setting range

Max. width position A4Rwidthposition

Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.


84

53-8

Item/Display

Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.

Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key. AUTO: Doc um ent lead edg e ref erence (RRCA) adjus tm ent (Auto adjustment)

2)

MEASUREMENT DISTANCE

Document lead edge measurement distance

RRCA

Documentleadedge reference position

Default value

0-255 (0.1mm unit) 99 0 -

50

MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment

Operation/Procedure

1)

Setting range

Content

Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document table.

1)


2)


A

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the

ADJUST VALUE

Setting range

Content RSPF mode document scan position adjustment (Scanner stop position adjustment)

99 1 -

Default value 5

adjustment value is saved.) * When the adjustment value is increase d, the scanner stop position in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right. * When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by 0.1mm.

53-9 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Set dirt detection for SPF scanning position.



2)


3)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display item,Details of display

Setting range

Content

A

DIRT_ALARM_SET

SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (when

OFF

1-0 0

B

SIDEA_SCAN_POSIION _SET_START

starting) SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (After a job)

ON OFF

1-0 0

C

SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB

SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level setting

D

SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV

OC dirt level setting

0 1

WEAK MIDDLE

0-1

OC_DIRT_LV

SPFfrontsurfacedirtalarmlevelsetting

F

SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV

SPFbacksurfacedirtalarmlevelsetting

WEAK

0

SPFfrontsurfacestreakdeleteshadingsetting

1 1

STRONG

2

2 0MIDDLE

0

OFF

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

SPF dirt detection execution.


Press [EXECUTE] key. Item/Display

Content

SPF SIDEA

SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt

OC

OC surface dirtdetection position (main scan position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, "*": Dirt


(MIDDLE)

1 (MIDDLE)

1 2

WEAK 0-2 MIDDLE

0

1 1

(MIDDLE)

2 0-1

ON

53-10

1

MIDDLE

STRONG SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET

(OFF) 1 (ON)

2

2-0

STRONG

G

1 0

STRONG

E

(OFF) 0

ON

WEAK

Default value

0

1 1

(ON)

55

Item/Display H

TYPE

55-1 Purpose

(Do not use this function unless specially required.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)

PATTERN 2

Print composing method

PATTERN 3


Setting range

Content

PATTERN 1

Edging type

0

OR process type

1

Nodeletecomposition type

2

Default value 1

Input value Print

55-2 Purpose

(Do not use this function unless specially

Function (Purpose)

required.) Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)

Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)

Section

F

G

69

70

71

Print Input value

H 72

I 73

J 74

K 75

L 76

M 77

N 78

Print

Function (Purpose)

E

67

Input value

(Do not use this function unless specially required.)

C

66

Print

Purpose

B

65

Input value

55-3

A

32


Blank

Input value

Print Input value

O

P

79

80

W

Q 81

X

87

88

3

Y 89

5

51

53

6 54

R 82 Z 90 7 55

T 84 0 48 8 56

U 85 1 49

V 86 2 50

9 57

Operation/Procedure

56

55-10

Purpose

Backup

Function (Purpose)

Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)

56-1 Purpose

Adjustment/Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)

Operation/Procedure


1)

Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.

1)

Select a target content of data transfer.

2)

Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.

3)


Section

Item/Display

Content First digit (left edge)

Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed. Setting range 1 - 90

A

1ST DIGIT

B

2NDDIGIT

Seconddigit

C

3RDDIGIT

Thirddigit

32[blank: 20H]

D

4THDIGIT

Fourthdigit

E

5THDIGIT

Fifthdigit

65-90 [Alphabet: 41H("A) 5AH("Z")] 48-57 [Numeral: 30H("0") 39H("9")]

F

6THDIGIT

G

COLOR

Default value 1

When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. EEPROM -> HDD

Transfer from EEPROM to HDD

HDD -> EEPROM

Transfer from HDD to EEPROM

Sixth digit(right K C

edge) Colorspecification input

0 1

M

2

Y R

3 4

G

5

B

6

0


56-2 Purpose

Data backup

Function (Purpose)

Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)


Classification Operation manual

NOTE

56-3 Purpose

Data backup

Function (Purpose)

Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.

Section

1)

Insert the USB memory into the main unit.

2)

Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.

Operation/Procedure

From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD

1)


2)

Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD

From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY 3)

Content E-manual

From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed

3)

When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

Machine with the DSK installed 1)


2)

Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.

56-4

* IMPORT

Purpose

Data backup

Function (Purpose)

Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.

From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD * EXPORT From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE

Section

3)

Enter the password with 10-key.

Operation/Procedure

4)

Press [SET] key.

1)


5)

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.

2)

Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.

Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.

3)



Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

Data lis t outsi de the backup targets EEPROM/SD Card PWBType Controller

Content

NOTE

Machine serial No. Product key information Variouscounter

Copycounter/FAX send counter etc.

Trouble history PCU


Function (Purpose)

Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.

Section

MachineserialNo. Variouscounter Machine adjustment execute history

SCU

56-5 Purpose

Maintenancecounter

Trouble history Variouscounter

Maintenancecounter



2)

Select a kind of data to be imported.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.

Trouble history


HDD Classification Japanese FEP Job end list

Log New N /A

Content

NOTE

56-6

User dictionary Job end list display data (The image send series include the preserved job list.) Job log * * * *

Print h istory i nformation JAM history information Trouble his tory infor mation Same po sition continuous jam count value * Charging information * Life inf ormation

Read from WEB is enable.

Purpose

Operation data check

Function (Purpose)

Import the SIM23-2 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.

Section

HDD



2)

Select a kind of data to be imported.

3)



1

: ‘15/Aug.

56-7 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Import the syslog data to a USB memory.

Section

HDD



2)

Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] k ey.

60 60-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.


Press [EXECUTE] key. Start the test.

56-11 Purpose

Data copy

Result display OK

Success

Function (Purpose)

Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.

NG

Fail

NONE INVALID

Not i nstalled ( Including D IMM t rouble) Execution disable

Section

1

Description


Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] k ey. The data are saved temporarily to the HDD. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Errordisplay

SLOT ICUSLOT-1

Description ICUstandardmemory

DIMM1

ICUSLOT-2

ICUexpansionmemory

DIMM2

PCL SLOT-1

Printerstandard memory

DIMM3

Content

61

COMPLETE WARNING

Normalcompletion HDDunmounting

ERROR (HDD ACCESS ERROR)

HDD access disable

ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK WRITE ERROR)

Low level block IO error: write

ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK READ ERROR)

Low level block IO error: read

ERROR (NO DA TA ADJUSTMENT)

Inconsistent data

TROUBLE(U2-42)

U2-42occurrence

61-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check the LSU polygon m otor rotation and laser detection.

Section

LSU


Press [EXECUTE] key. When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.

56-12 Purpose

Data copy

Function (Purpose)

Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine.

Display LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG

Content Polygon mirror rotation abnormality

LSU TESTRESULT NG: K

Laser abnormality (K)


Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] k ey. The set values are copied from the HDD to the SD card. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Errordisplay

Content

COMPLETE

Normalcompletion

WARNING

SD/HDDunmounting

NO DATA No data ERROR (EXP ORT DATA ILLEGAL) Export data illeg al ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK READ ERROR)

Low level block IO error: read

ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT)

Inconsistent data (Error at the verify check) SD access error (File IO error)

ERROR (SD ACCESS ERROR)


61-3 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the laser power


Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/ FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.

2)


3)


4)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are increased, the print density is increased and the line width of line images are increased.

Default value Mode

COPY PR600/FAX PR1200

Item/Display

Setting range

Content

Laserpowersetting/BW

0-255

26/31 cpm machine

A

LASERPOWER(BW)

B

LASERPOWERTS(BW)

Laserpowersettingtonersave/BW

0-255

160 160

A B

LASERPOWER(BW) LASERPOWERTS(BW)

Laserpowersetting/BW Laserpowersettingtonersave/BW

0-255 0-255

160 160

A

LASERPOWER(BW)

Laserpowersetting/BW

0-255

B

LASERPOWERTS(BW)

Laserpowersettingtonersave/BW

0-255

160 160

35cpm machine 170

Destination linkage ✕

170

✕

170 170 170 170

✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

62 62-6 62-1 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.


Section

1)

Select the self diag area.

Operation/Procedure

2)


1)


2)

Press [YES] key.

The self diag operation is performed. NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If the re may be a trouble in the HDD, use this simulation to cheek the HDD.

Used to execute the HDD format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

SHORTS.T

Partialareadiag

EXTENDED S.T

All area diag

When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

62-2 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).

Section

Normal completion -> "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. Abnormal end -> "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed. * If the simulat ion cannot be executed or termin ated abnormally for some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding section.



2)

Press [YES] key.

62-7

62-3 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).



2)

Press [YES] key.

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.



ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and the result is printed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

Read/write operations are performed. MX-M316N SIMULATION 6 – 67

62-8

62-13

Purpose

Data clear

Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system area)

Function (Purpose)

Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)

Press [YES] key.

2)

Press [YES] key.

The operation manual data are deleted.

Used to execute the hard disk format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.


* When the HDD formatting (except for the syst em area) is not completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) NG" is displayed.

62-10 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the job completion list data.


62-14 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD.

Section

HDD



2)

Press [YES] key. The database file is initialized

1)


2)

Press [YES] key.


Used to delete the job log data. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

62-11 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose) Section

Used to delete the document filing data.



2)

Press [YES] key. Used to delete the document fil ing data.


62-12 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.



2)

Press [OK] key.

The set value is saved. When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system data storage area is cleared. A

0

Enable

1

Disable (Default)


Operation/Procedure

63

1)

Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the document table.

2)

Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and press [OC] key.

3)


63-1 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the shading correction result.

Section

Scanner


Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch panel. Item/Display

Content

ANALOG GAIN ODD ANALOG GAIN EVEN

Analog gain adjustment value (odd number) Analog gain adjustment value (even number)

DIGITAL GAIN ODD

Digital gain adjustment value (odd number)

DIGITAL GAIN EVEN

Digital gain adjustment value (even number)

SMP AVE ODD

Reference plate sampling average value (ODD)

SMP AVE EVEN

Reference plate sampling average value (EVEN)

TARGET VALUE

Target value

BLACK L EVEL

Black o utput l evel

ERROR CODE

NOTE

The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is performed. When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initial screen.

63-4 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the SIT chart patch density.


Error code (0, 1-14) (for debug)

0 1

1)

Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.

2)

Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and press [OC] key.

3)

Select a data display mode.

GAMMA THROUGH

SIT chart scan data

COPY GAMMA

Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart scan data

SCANNER GAMMA

Image sen d mode ga mma process data of the S IT chart scan data

SIT CHECK

SIT chart scan data/Check result

2 3 4 5 6

4)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.

7 8

When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initial screen.

9 10

63-5

11

Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.

12 13 14 RSPF WHITE LEVEL 1ST RSPF WHITE LEVEL 2ND

First scan SPF front surface white reference level SPF front surface white reference level of the second or later scanning


Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key

3)

The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the default.

63-2 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform shading.


(When RSPF model) Press [EXECUTE] key. Used to perform shading.


63-3 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment.

Section

Scanner


64 64-2 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)


Set the print conditions. Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys. Change the set values with 10-key.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed. Item/Display

A

Content

Settingrange

Defaultvalue

Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to the description below.) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)

1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 17 - 19) 1-255 (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)

1

B

PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 17 - 19) DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2)

C

DOT2 (DOT1>=2 IFA:2)

Setting of blankdotnumber (N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)

0-255 (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)

254

D E

DENSITY(DOT1>=2IFA:2) MULTI COUNT

F

EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19)

Usedtospecifytheprintgradation. Number print of

THROUGH

Exposuremode specification

CHAR/PIC CHAR/PRPIC

Printed Photo

PRINT PAPER

Photograph

DUPLEX

7 8 5-1

1

1

Tray

2

CS2

2

Tray

3

YES

PAPER TYPE

4 6

Dither without correction Manual paper feed

Tray selection

PLAIN

3 4

Tray Tray

Duplexprint selection Paper type

Yes

2 (CS1)

4 5 1

-

0

0

1

No Standard paper

HEAVY OHP

Heavy paper OHP

ENVELOPE

Envelope

8 (STANDARD DITHER)

5

CS1

NO I

2 3

Map

STANDARD DITHER MFT

CS3 CS4 H

1

Text

PRINT PIC MAP PAPER

255 1

1-8 (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 except above: 1-8)

Text/Printed Photo Text/ Photograph

CHAR

G

1-255 999 - 1

Noprocess(through)

1

1 6-1

1

(NO)

1 (PLAIN)

2 3 4

Print pattern of Item A Pattern No. 1 2

Content Gridpattern

Pattern genera ting section LSU-ASIC

print Dot

17

All b ackground ( halftone)

18

256g radationsp attern (Other dither)

19

256g radationsp attern (For text dither)

NOTE * Printisstartedat4mmfromthepaperleadedge. * Writing regardless of void. The first one is f ixed to LD1. -

Halftone (IMG-ASIC rear process)

* 16 gradation s are printed in the main scan dire ction, and the fol lowing 16 gradati ons are printed in the next line. (16 x 16 patch print) * Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge. * Printing is made from 255 gr adation, an d 0 - 254 gradations ar e printed.

-


64-4 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Printer test print. (Self print)



2)


3)

The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display A B

DENSITY

C D

MULTI COUNT PAPER

E

Content

PRINT PATTERN

Settingrange

Specification of the print pattern (* For details, refer to the description below.) Used to specify the print gradation. Number print of Paper feed tray selection

MFT

PAPER TYPE

3

Defaultvalue 3

255 -1

128 1 1

1

Tray

2

CS2

2

Tray

3

CS3

3

Tray

4

CS4

4

Tray

5

Paper type

1

999 - 1 Manual paper feed

CS1

PLAIN HEAVY

-

Standard paper Heavy paper

3 (CS2)

0

0 1

Print pattern of Item A PatternNo.

Content

1

256 gradations pattern (B/W)

2

Halftone pattern (B/W)

3

Background dot print


Operation test/check Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)



2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.

A

Item/Display PRINT PATTERN

B

MULTI COUNT

C

PAPER

Content Print pattern specification Number print of

MFT

Paper feed tray selection

CS1

D

PAPER TYPE TONERSAVEMODE

999 - 1 2

CS2

2

Tray

3

CS3 CS4

3 4

Tray Tray

4 5

Paper type

OFF ON

Standard paper

Monochrometoner save

set. not set.

2

Content B/W Service chart (B/W)


2 (CS1)

0

Heavy paper

Print pattern of Item A PatternNo. 1

1

Tray

PLAIN

Defaultvalue 2

1

Manual paper feed 1

HEAVY E

Settingrange 1-2

0 (PLAIN)

1 0

0 1

(OFF)

64-6 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)



2)

Press [EXECUTE] key. The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display A

PRINT PATTERN

B

MULTI COUNT

C

PAPER

Content

MFT CS1

Paper feed tray selection

PAPER TYPE

2

CS2

2

Tray

3

CS3

3

Tray

4

4

Tray

5

Paper type

HEAVY E

TONERSAVEMODE

OFF ON

1

2 (CS1)

Standard paper

0

Heavy paper Monochrometoner save

1 1

Manual paper feed Tray

PLAIN

Defaultvalue

1 999 - 1

1

CS4 D

Settingrange

Print pattern specification Number print of

0 (PLAIN)

1

set. not

0

0

set.

(OFF)

1

Print pattern of Item A PatternNo. 1

Content B/W

65-2

65 65-1 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.

Section

Operation panel section

Purpose

Operation check/test

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.

Section Operation/Procedure Touch the touch panel. The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of the touched position is displayed in real time.

Operation/Procedure Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the screen.



When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to the simulation sub number entry menu.











 

 

In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 



















 

 






65-5

66-2

Purpose

Operation check/test

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to check the operation panel key input.

Function (Purpose)

Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX

Section

Section

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on the screen.

1)

If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following screen is displayed. * When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the country code list screen. * The currently set country code is displ ayed in the column of "PRESENT:".

2) JOB STATUS SYSTEM SETTINGS

Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and [SET] key becomes active.

HOME

* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared.

1 2

3)

When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code, [EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is displayed in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of "NEW:" is cleared.

4)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is displayed on the tile line.

5)

When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW corresponding to the country code is initialized.

6)

After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE], [YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUDIT CLEAR 0 PROGRAM CLEAR STOP

Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)

CLEAR ALL/RESET

* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on th e initial screen, the display is shifted to the country code list s creen.

START (MONO)

Use scroll keys to select the country select page. Country code list JAPAN U.S.A. AUSTRALIA

66 66-1 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking with the LCD.

Section

FAX

00000000 10110101 00001001

U.K.

10110100

FRANCE

00111101

GERMANY

00000100

SWEDEN NEWZEALAND

10100101 01111110

CHINA

00100110

SINGAPORE

10011100

Operation/Procedure

TW MIDDLEANDNEAREAST

11111110 11111101

1)

Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.

SLOVAKIA

11111100

* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is cleared.

OTHER3

11111011

FINLAND NORWAY

00111100 10000010

DENMARK

00110001

NETHERLANDS

01111011

* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the initial screen.

ITALY

01011001

SWITZERLAND

10100110

Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with 10-key.

AUSTRIA INDONESIA

00001010 01010100

* [1] -> [0]

THAILAND

10101001

[0] -> [1]

MALAYSIA INDIA

01101100 01010011

2)

Press [DATA] button. The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.

3)

4)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the setting is saved. After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.

PHILIPPINES

10001001

HONGKONG

01010000

RUSSIA

10111000

SOUTHAFRICA

10011111

SPAIN PORTUGUESE

10100000 10001011

LUXEMBURG

01101001

BELGIUM CZECH

00001111 00101110

HUNGARY

01010001


GREECE POLAND

Signal send table

01000110 10001010

BRAZIL

00010110

KOREA

01100001

VIETNAM

10111100

NOSIGNAL

66-3 Purpose

Operation test/Check

Function (Purpose)

Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result.

Section

FAX

33.6V34

31.2V34

26.4V34

24.0V34

21.6V34

16.8V34 7.2V34

14.4V34 4.8V34

12.0V34 2.4V34

12.0V33

14.4V17

7.2V17

9.6V29

2.4V27t 0.3V21

0.3FLG ANSam

DPMAKE

DPBRK

12.0V17 7.2V29 CED2100 RINGER

28.8V34 19.2V34 9.6V34 14.4V33 9.6V17 4.8V27t CNG1100 NoRBT

NOMSG

66-5 Operation/Procedure 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following screen is displayed.

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)

Section

FAX

* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key. 2)

When the memory check item button is selected, the display is shifted to the memory check screen.

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the memory check of the selected item is started.

4)

After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the result of memory check is displayed.

Memory check status NO CHECK CHECKING


* Use scroll keys to switc h the send mode select page. 2)

When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal display.

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signals are sent.

4)

To end signal send:

No check During checking

OK

CheckcompleteOK

NG A##

Check complete NG

Error occurring address or data line is displayed for each item.

When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following screen is displayed.

* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted.

Check item Check memory item

Remark

1

All Memory Device Check (once)

2

MFPSRAM(once)

All the items are checked once. Checkonlyonce

66-6

3

MFPSRAM(repeat)

Repeatcheck

Purpose

Data output/Check

4

MODEM EEPROM <1> (once)

Check only once in LINE1

5

MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat)

Repeat check in LINE1

Function (Purpose)

6 7

MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)

Check only once in LINE1 Repeat check in LINE1

Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)

Section

FAX

The number in < > indicates the line.

Operation/Procedure 66-4

1)

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.)

Section

FAX

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the confidential checkable is printed. * If there is no con fidential registration, no print is made e ven though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.

2)

After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.


2)

3) 4)

When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.) * Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal display.

66-7 Purpose

Data output/Check

Function (Purpose)

Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.)

Section

FAX


Operation/Procedure

To end signal send:

1)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted.

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all image data saved in the image memory are outputted.

2)



66-8

66-11

Purpose


Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

Section

FAX

Section

FAX

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)


1)


2)

When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

2)

When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a

4)

sound message is sent. To end signal send:

NONE (Mute)

PAUSE (Pause melody)

MESSAGE1 (Message 1)




MESSAGE5 (Massage 5)


ALARM (Alarm)

RINGER (Ringing sound (Speaker))

EXT.TEL.RING ER (External telephone call)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted. 300bps send si gnal table NO SIGNAL 010101

11110

00000

00001

66-12

66-9 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) * For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.

Section

FAX


11111

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) * For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.

Section

FAX

Operation/Procedure

When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following

1)

When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following

screen is displayed. When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

2)

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound message is sent.

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound message is sent.

4)

To end signal send:

4)

To end signal send:

2)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted.

screen is displayed. When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted. 66-13

66-10 Purpose

Data clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.)

Section

FAX

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to register dial numbers for SIM6614/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.)

Section

FAX

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1)

1)

Press [EXECUTE] button.

2) 3)

Press [YES] button. After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the machine.

When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following screen is displayed. * The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)

2)

Enter a number with 10-key. The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:]. After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only [C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by one digit))

3)

When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of [PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.


66-14

66-18

Purpose

Adjustment

Purpose


Function (Purpose)


Function (Purpose)

Section

FAX

Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)

Operation/Procedure

Section

FAX

1)



2)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.


2)

3)

To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The button returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.

When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button r eturns to the normal di splay.

3)


4)

To stop signal sending: When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal display and signal sending is interrupted.

66-15 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)


Section

FAX

66-21



2)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.

3)

Purpose

Check

Function (Purpose)

Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor).

Section

FAX

Operation/Procedure

* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered with SIM66-13.

1)

When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The button returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.

2)

Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.

3) 66-16 Purpose

Adjustment

Function (Purpose)

Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level.

Section

FAX


FAX information print c ontent table REGISTERED FILE MANAGEMENT

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1

PROTOCOL LINE 1



2)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low group of the signal send level.

3)

66-22 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.) (Japan model only)

Section

FAX

To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.

66-17 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)

Operation/Procedure

Section

FAX

1)

When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as the default sound volume.)



2)

Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-

2)

When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal display.

3)

DLE 2:MAX) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.

3)


4)

To stop signal sending:

* If, however, the handset is not installed , the sound volume cannot be checked. Execution is possible. 4)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and delivery of the on-hold tone is stopped.

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal display and signal sending is interrupted.


66-24

66-32

Purpose

Data clear

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to clear the FAST save data.

Function (Purpose)

Section

FAX

Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result.

Operation/Procedure

Section

FAX

1)


Operation/Procedure

2)

Press [YES] button.

1)

The FAST save data are cleared. 3)

* Fixed data check procedure

After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.

* The data received from the line is che cked of the following fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with “OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.

66-29

* The judgment is made in 2 minutes.

Purpose

Clear

Function (Purpose)

Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/ Desktop expansion table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).

Section


2)

Press [YES] button.

Receive speed: 300BPS Receive data: 00H Judgment data: 100byte 2)

After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. The result is dis played as "OK" or "NG."

66-33

FAX


Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.

Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.

Section

FAX

The telephone book data area cleared. 3)

After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.

66-30 Purpose


Function (Purpose)

Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change.

Section

FAX



2)

The signal to be checked can be selected from the two options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."

3)

When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected, they are normally displayed.



2)

HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not detected.

Signal used for signal detection check (When "FNET " i s selected) FNET

(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)

TEL/LIU status change item description HS1 HS2

Polarityinversionsignal Polarityinversionsignal

RHS

HandsethookSW

EXHS

ExternaltelephonehookSW

BUSY TONE

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU.

Section

FAX


Function (Purpose)

Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)

Section

FAX

1)

FAX send is performed.

2)

Enter the SIM 66-34 mode. The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.

Change the port setting. When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.

3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.

4)

To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.

Port which outputs to TEL/LIU MR

EC

DTMF

Purpose

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following screen is displayed.

CION

CED

66-34

66-31

2)

CNG

S.


66-36

66-43

Purpose


Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or the command line individually.

Function (Purpose)

Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX.

Section

FAX

Section

FAX




2)

Operation check

* Use scroll keys to select the se lect item of the p ower control adjustment value. 2)

Select an item to be checked on the screen. MFP contr oller I/F check item table MFP <- MDMC (DATA once) Data line Once

MFP -> MDMC (DATA once) Data line Once

MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line Repeat

MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line Repeat

MFP <- MDMC (CMD once) Command line Once

MFP -> MDMC (CMD once) Command line Once

MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line Repeat

MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line Repeat


3)

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing to the power control is executed. When writing is normally completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is displayed. After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

Set range and default value of each set v Item A

CI_LEVEL_JUDGE

2 to 15

B

CI_CYCLE_MIN

to 1 254

C

CI_CYCLE_MAX

DC

66-39 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.

Section

FAX

2)

When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set destination button is highlighted. (In the default s tate, JAPAN is set as the destination.) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the normal display. * When the destination button is changed, the new destin ation setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.

Destination setting table JAPAN

U.S.A/CANADA

CHINA

ASIA&OTHERS

Default value 6 10

2 to 255

I_COUNT

142

15 to2

E

RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE

F G H

3

2to15

15

EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE

2to225

240

RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE SON_TIMEOUT

2to15 to 1127

2 20

66-61


alue

Set range

Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing


Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.

2)

Press [DATA] button. The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.

3) EUROPE

the soft SW while checking with the LCD. FAX

Section

AUSTRALIA

Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with 10-key. * [1] -> [0] [0] -> [1]

4) 66-42 Purpose

Setting

Function (Purpose)

Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX.

Section

FAX


Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted

2)

and YES] and [NO] buttons become active. Press [YES] button.

66-62 Purpose

Backup

Function (Purpose)

Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type.

Section

FAX

Operation/Procedure

The power control program is rewritten. 3)

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the setting is saved.

When rewriting of the power control program is normally completed, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.

1)


2)

Select data to be imported.

3)

Press [EXECUTE] key. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2). When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed. Errordisplay

ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE ERROR: NOIMAGE DATA ERROR


Content No USB memory installed No image data Other errors

67 67-17 Purpose

Reset

Function (Purpose)

Printer reset

Section

Printer



2)

Press [YES] key. The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the NIC setting.)


67-45 Purpose

Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose)

Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping.

Section

Printer



2)

Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Displ ay

A

SHARPNESS: B/W PRINT

Cont ent Monochrome print

Setting range 0-4

Default value 2

NOTE Thegreater the set value is, the stronger the filer enhancement is. The smaller the set value is, the stronger the filter smoothness is. (0: Soft High, 1: Soft Low, 2: Center, 3: Sharp Low, 4: Sharp High)


[7] TROUBLE SHOOTING

D. Self dia Manual g opera tion Service

1. Error code and troubl eshoo ting

When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and displays the trouble message.

A. Gener al

A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is nearly expired or is expired.

MX-M316N

The machine always monitors its own state.

When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the machine to minimize the damage.

B. Funct ion a nd purp ose

When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or may not be stopped. The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by the LCD and lamp. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.

1)

Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.)

2)

The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.)

3)

By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, improving the repair efficiency.)

Monitors the machine conditions.

4)

Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)

Detects/analyzes the content.

Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.

C. Self diag messa ge kinds The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Class 1

Class 2

Warning 

 Trouble/Warning

User

Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, etc.)

Service

Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)

 The machine is stopped.

Others Warning

Warning to the user, not a machine trouble (Preliminary warning of life expiration of a consumable part, etc.) Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is stopped.

 The content is displayed.

Trouble Others

 Trouble

-

 Trouble/Warning

Warning 

 Trouble  Troubleshoot the cause.

 Repair

Cancel the self-diagnostic  message with the  commands). diagnostic (test

 Reset

Standby state 

MX-M316N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1

A consumable part has reached its lifetime  YES

Replace or supply  the consumable part.

No 

E. Brea kdown seque nce (1)

Error cod e and ope ratable m ode

Trouble content

FAX board trouble

* FAX board breakdown

HDDtrouble

* SDcard breakdown

Judgment block

MFP

* HDDbreakdown * HDD-ASIC breakdown

Trouble code (26cpm/ 31cpm/ 35cpm) machine)

Operatable mode Copy scan (including interruption)

Scan (Push)

Scan (Pull)

ScanTo HDD

Print

List print

FAX Send

FAX print

O

O

O

O

O

O

-

-

O

O

✕

O

O

O

O

✕

✕

F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30, 97, 98) E7 (07)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

E7(03) E7 (04)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Scanner

* SCU

A0 (02)

communication trouble Engine communication trouble

communication error * PCU communication error

E7 (80)

Backup battery voltage fall trouble

* Backup battery voltage fall

U1 (01)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Operation disable trouble 2

* External serial I/F communication error (RIC)

U7 (50, 51)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

* Memory error (included not installed the expansion RAM)

U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, 23, 24, 40, 41, 42)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

* Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (MFPC detection)

A0 (11, 15, 20) E7 (60, 61, 62)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

* Serial number data error * HDD regi stration data check sum error

U2 (30)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

U2 (50)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

* Memory check error when booting

E7 (96)

* Image mem ory trouble, decode error

E7 (01, 49, 91, 92, 93, 94)

Operation disable trouble 4

* Personal co unter connection trouble

PC (00)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Power controller trouble

* Power con troller error

L8 (20)

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Special function trouble

* Watermark data error

U2 (60) P1 (00, 01, 02)

O

Lasertrouble

* LSUbreakdown

E7 (20,21, 28) L6 (10) A0 (21) E7 (50) F1 (50, 95)

✕

Operation trouble 3 disable

Engine t rouble 1

* Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (PCU detection)

A0 (01) E7 (90)

PCU

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

O

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

O

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

O

✕

✕

✕

O

✕

*10 ✕

✕

✕

✕


✕

✕

✕

✕

Trouble content

Engine trouble 2

Trouble code (26cpm/ 31cpm/ 35cpm) machine)

Judgment block

* PCU troubles (motor, fusing, etc.)

PCU

Operatable mode Copy scan (including interruption)

F2(40,64, 70,74) H2(00,01) H3(00,01) H4(00,01) H5(01) L4(01,11,32, 34,35,40, 44,70) L8(01,02) U2 (90, 91) F3 (12)

✕

Scan (Push)

✕

✕

ScanTo HDD

Scan (Pull)

✕

✕

Print

List print

✕

FAX Send

FAX print

✕

✕

O

3

*10

O

3

O

O

3

3

Paper feed tray 1 trouble

* Paper feed tray 1 breakdown

Paper feed tray 2 trouble

* Paper feed tray 2 breakdown

F3 (22)

3

O

O

O

3

3

O

3

Paper feed tray 3 trouble Stapletrouble

* Paper feed tray 3 breakdown * Staplebreakdown

F3 (32, 42)

3

O

O

O

3

3

O

3

4

4

Finishert rouble

* After-process breakdown

4

4

*10

F1(10)

4

4

4

4

4

*10 4 *10

F1 (00, 03, 15, 19, 20, 29, 37) EE(EL,EU)

4

4

4

4

4

4

*10

Othertroubles

* Othertroubles

Process control trouble

* Process con trol breakdown (PCU detection)

Operation disable trouble

SCU CPT ASIC trouble

* Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (SCU detection) * SCU CPT ASIC error

SCU ASIC trouble (SCU detection)

* SCU ASIC error (SCU detection)

UC (20)

✕

✕

✕

Scanner trouble 1

* SCU EEPROM error

U2 (80, 81)

✕

✕

✕

Scanner trouble 2

* Scanner section breakdown (mirror motor, lens, copy lamp)

L1 (00) L3 (00)

✕

✕

✕

CCD trouble

* CCD breakdown (shading, etc.)

E7 (10, 11, 14)

✕

✕

✕

O: Operation enabled

✕:

*10

O

F2(39,58)

SCU

A0 (22)

O O OOOOOOO

O *11 ✕

✕

9

UC (02)

O

O

O

O

O

O

9

O

✕

O

O

✕

O

✕

O

O

✕

O

✕

O

O

✕

O

✕

O

O

✕

O

✕

✕

✕

9

O

✕

9

✕

✕

9

Operation disabled

1:

The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.

3:

When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.

4:

When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid only when the escape tray setting has been made. 9:

When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.

*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred. *11: The trouble display is "Display to a 2 -line message." (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble) 15:

FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)


(2)

Trouble dete ction sequence and trouble ca ncel se quence when turning on the power MFP event manager (Power ON sequence) H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check Trouble check is preformed in each block, and the result is sent to the MFP. H3, H4, H5 U1 U2 F3,U6

Each block

When the power is turned on, check is made in each block. Communication of trouble status [Trouble code] [Trouble status]

Saved in the PCU SavedintheMFP Savedineachblock SavedinthePCU

(Trouble cancel sequence) When executing SIM 13, 14, 16

sim task

SIM13: U1 trouble cancel SIM14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode inhibition) cancel SIM15: LCC/LCT(U6)trouble cancel, F3 cansel SIM16: U2 trouble cancel

Trouble cancel command

Trouble cancel (The trouble memory is initialized.)

Trouble cancel status is communicated.

The process has pri ority when the power is turned ON with th e MFP. When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed. Process sequence

Error code U2

First (Low priority) 

A0

Watermarkcheckerror

50 30

HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed) MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency

24 10

MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error

23

Individual data check sum error of SRAM memory

22

SRAM memory check sum error

15

Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware

20

Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)

U2

11 00

MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP EEPROM read/write error

E7

96

MFPC PWB DIMM memory checkerror

U1 E7

01 60

Batterytrouble MFPconnectiontrouble

i (High priority)

Content 60


F. Error code lis t Trouble code Main code A0

E7

PCU PWB ROM error SCU PWB ROM error Firmwareversioninconsistency (MFP PCU) IncompatibleDSKBOOTandprogram firmware

MFP MFP

20

ConflictfirmwareandEEPROMdataversion(MFP)

MFP

O

21

ConflictfirmwareandEEPROMdataversion(PCU)

PCU

O

22

ConflictfirmwareandEEPROMdataversion(SCU)

SCU

O

MFP

F6

H2 H3 H4

O O

O MFP

HDD-ASIC error

O

MFP

O

MFP

O

10

Shading error (Black correction)

SCU

11 14

Shading error (White correction) CCD-ASIC error

SCU SCU

20

LSU laser detection error

21 28

LSU LD deterioration trouble LSU control Asic connection error

O O O

PCU

O

PCU PCU

O O

MFP

O

50

PCU connection trouble

PCU

60

MFP connection trouble

MFP

61

MFP connection trouble (PCU)

O

62

MFP connection trouble (SCU)

80

MFP SCU - PWB communication error

MFP

O

90 91

MFP PCU - PWB communication error FAX reception image data error

MFP MFP

O

MFP

O

O

MFP

O

MFP

opy image data error

93

Copy,imagesend,FAX,filing,printimagedataprocesserror

94

Imagefiledataprocesserror(whenimportingfiledata)

96

MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error

EL EU

Autodeveloperadjustmenttrouble(Over-tonerabnormality) Autodeveloperadjustmenttrouble(Under-tonerabnormality)

Supply

O

MFP

ater Mark data error

FAX

O

MFP

01M image FPdata error 03 trouble HDD

92C

F3

Electricity

11 15

49W

F2

Option

01

07error card SD

F1

Mechanism

02

04

EE

Trouble detection

Trouble content

Sub code

O

O

MFP

O

MFP

O

MFP

O PCU PCU

O O

00

Finisher PCU - PWB communication error

03 10

Finisherpaperexitrollerliftingoperationtrouble Staple operation trouble

PCU

O

15

Finisherpaperexittrayliftoperationtrouble

19

Finisher alignment operation trouble F

PCU

20

Finisher alignment operationtrouble R

PCU

O

29

Finisher cooling fanmotor abnormality

MFP

O

37 50

Finisher data backup RAM error Main unit Finisher combination error

95

Paper exit option configuration error

39 40

Process thermistor trouble Toner density sensor trouble

58

Temperature/humidity sensor trouble(HUD_M/TH_M)

64

Toner supply operation trouble

70

Improper toner cartridge detection

74

Toner cartridge CRUM error

12 22

Paperfeedtray1liftoperationtrouble Paperfeedtray2liftoperationtrouble

32

Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble

42

Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble

00 01

MFPC PWB FAX - communication trouble FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error

04

FAX MODEM operation trouble

FAX

O

21

ImpropercombinationofTEL/LIUPWBandFAXsoftswitch

MFP

O

30 97

FAX1-chipmicroprocessoraccesserror(FAXdetection) IncompatibilitybetweenFAXcontrolPWBandthemainmachine

98 00

Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the ma in MFP machine destination Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU

O

01

Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)

O

00 01

Fusingsectionhightemperaturetrouble(TH_UM) Fusingsectionhightemperaturetrouble(TH_US)

PCU PCU

O O O

PCU PCU

O O

PCU

O O

PCU PCU

O O

PCU

O

PCU PCU

O O

PCU

O

PCU

O

PCU

O

PCU

O

PCU PCU

O O

MFP FAX

O O

MFP MFP

O O O

PCU

00

Fusingsectionlowtemperaturetrouble(TH_UM)

PCU

01

Fusingsectionlowtemperaturetrouble(TH_US)

PCU

H5

01

5-time continuous jams of POSD

L1

00

Scanner feed trouble

PCU SCU


O O O

Trouble code Main Sub code code

Trouble detection

Trouble content

Option

L3

00

Scanner return trouble

L4

01 11

Main motor lock trouble Shift motor trouble

32

Power source cooling fan trouble

34

LSU cooling fan trouble

35 40

Fusing cooling fan trouble Ozone trouble fan

43

Paper exit cooling fan trouble

PCU

O

70

Toner motor lock trouble

PCU

O

10 02

Polygon motor trouble Full wave signal width abnormality

20

Power controller communication trouble

00

PCI communication error

L6 L8 P1

SCU

Mechanism

O O

PCU

O

PCU

O

PCU PCU

O O

PCU PCU

O O

MFP

O

MFP

O

MFP

PC

02 -

Plasma generating device error Personal counter not detected

U1

01

Battery trouble

U2

00 05

MFP EEPROM read/write error SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency

10

MFPCPWBSRAMuserauthenticationindexchecksumerror

O MFP MFP

O O

MFP

O

MFP MFP

O O

MFP

11

MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error

22

SRAM memory check sum error

23

IndividualdatachecksumerrorofSRAMmemory

24 30

MFPCPWBSRAMmemoryuserauthenticationcounterchecksumerror MFPCPWBandPCUPWBmanufacturingNo.datainconsistency

40

SD card system storage data area error

MFP

41 42

HDD system storage data area error Machineadjustmentdata(systemstoragedataarea)error

MFP

O

MFP

O

MFP

O

MFP

O

MFP MFP

O O O O

MFP

50

HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed) 60W atermark check error

U7

O

PCU PCU

01 error fan PCI

O MFP

O

MFP

O

80

SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error

81

SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

SCU

O

90 91

PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

PCU PCU

O

50

MFPCPWB Vendor machinecommunicationerror

51V UC0

SCU

O O

MFP

endor machine error

2 ASIC error -CPT 20 DOCC ASIC error

Electricity

O

MFP SCU

O O

SCU


O

FAX

Supply

G. Details of error codes a nd countermea sures

A0-01

PCU PWB ROM error

A0-22

Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU)

Trouble content Detail Cause

MFP The firmware version-up is not completed properly by interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc. PCU PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

A0-02

Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up procedure again. Replace the PCU PWB.

SCU PWB ROM error

Detail Cause Check & Reme dy

E7-01

SCU Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and the EEPROM data version. Check the co mbination of the f irmware.

MFP image d ata error

Trouble content

Trouble content Detail

MFP

Cause

The firmware version-up is not completed properly by interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc. SCU PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

Trouble content

Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up procedure again. Replace the SCU PWB.

Detail

MFP

Cause

Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. MFPC PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

E7-03

Check connection of the connector and the harness of the MFPC PWB. Check or replace the MFPC PWB.

HDD troub le

Trouble content

A0-11

Firmwa re version inconsistency (MFP - PCU)

Detail

MFP

Cause

Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC PWB and HDD. HDD (error file management area) data abnormality (FAT breakage ). MFPC PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

Check connection of the connector and the harness of the MFPC PWB and HDD. Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the HDD. Replace the HDD. Check or replace the MFPC PWB.


MFP Firmware combination e rror between t he MFP and the PCU.

Check & Remedy

Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up mode.

A0-15

Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware

Detail

MFP

Cause

Installation of the normal firmware was performed with a security kit enable. Stop installation of the normal firmware.

A0-20

HDD-ASIC error

Trouble content

Trouble content

Check & Remedy

E7-04

Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)

Detail Cause

MFP HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.) An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when booting.

Check & Remedy

E7-07

Check or replace the MFPC PWB.

SD card error

Trouble content Trouble content Detail Cause

Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and the EEPROM data version.

Check & Reme dy

A0-21

MFP

Detail

MFP

Cause

SD card trouble or contact error MFPC PWB trouble.

Check & R emedy

Check the co mbination of th e firmware.

Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU)


PCU

Cause

Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and the EEPROM data version.

Check & Reme dy

Check the co mbination of th e firmware.


Replace the SD c ard. Check the SD card socket. Replace the MFPC PWB.

E7-10

Shading error (Black correction)

Trouble content

E7-21

LSU LD deterioration trouble

Trouble co ntent

Laser trouble

Detail

SCU

Detail

PCU

Cause

Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the scanner lamp is turned OFF. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. CCD unit abno rmality. SCU PWB abn ormality.

Cause

Laser deterioration, power reduction Disconnection or improper connection of harness and connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.

Check & Remedy

E7-11

Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check the CCD unit. Check the SCU PWB.

Shading error (White correction)


E7-14

Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp unit. Check or replace the scanner lamp. Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB. Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the reference white board. Check or replace the CCD unit. Check or replace the SCU PWB.

Detail Cause

Detail

Check & Remedy


Check & Remedy

Check the SCU PWB. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check or replace the CCD unit. Check or replace the SCU PWB.

E7-50

PCU connection trouble

Trouble conte nt Detail

PCU A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the machine specifications is connected. Check the kind and the version of the firmware. LSU connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble. LSU trouble.

Check & Remedy

PCU Laser optical axis misalignment Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble. Disconnection or improper connection of harness and connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Check connection of the connector and harness between the LD PWB and the MFPC PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the LSU.

Unknown PWB id entification inf ormation is detec ted in the PCU PWB.

Cause


MFP Watermark data trouble. HDD trouble. * When the wartermark data is not installed, U2-60 error occurs in booting. Use SIM62-02/SIM62-03 to check HDD read/write. If the result is NG, a remedy corresponding to E7-03 is required. Use SIM49-05 to update the watermark data. (Reinstallation)

LSU lase r detection error

Cause

Improper connection of the communication connector between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB PCU PWB or MFPC PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.

Water Mark data erro r

SCU SCU PWB trouble. Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit. CCD unit abno rmality. SCU PWB abn ormality.

Check & Remedy

Access error between the CPU i n the PC U PWB an d the LSU control ASIC. PCU

Cause

E7-49

Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Check connection of the communication connetctor between the LD PWB and MFPC PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the LSU.

LSU control Asic connection error

CCD-ASIC error

Trouble content

E7-20

E7-28

Trouble content SCU Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan level when the scanner lamp is turned ON. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Scanner lamp lighting trouble. Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble CCD unit abno rmality. SCU PWB abn ormality.

Check & Remedy

Check & Remedy

E7-55

PCU PWB infor mation su m error

Trouble content

PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error

Detail

PCU

Cause

PCU EEPROM sum check error. PCU EEPROM trouble. PCU EEPROM contact trouble.

Check & R emedy


Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU EEPROM.

E7-60


Trouble conte nt

E7-91

Unknown PW B ident ification inf ormation is detec ted in the MFPC PWB.

Detail

MFP

Cause

A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the machine specifications is connected.

Check & Remedy

Check the kind and the version of the firmware. MFPC PWB trouble.

E7-61

MFP conn ection troub le (PC U)


FAX reception image data error

Trouble conte nt

MFP Image data process abnormality HDD trouble SD card trouble or contact error Image compression data corruption MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory trouble or contact error FAX control PWB trouble

Check & Remedy

MFP connection trouble Compatibility trouble between MFP - PCU MFP Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the

Check & R emedy

PCU. Check the MFPC PWB. Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and the PCU.

E7-92


Detail Cause

Trouble content

MFP

Cause

Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the SCU.

Check & R emedy

E7-80

Check the MFPC PWB. Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and the SCU.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.

MFP - SCU PWB c ommun ication error E7-93


MFP

Cause

Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process erro r

SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.

Check & Reme dy

E7-90

An error of copy image data process occurs. (In Non ERDH) MFP Image data process abnormality HDD trouble Image compression data corruption MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory trouble or contact error

EEPROM PWB information check sum error

Detail

Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the HDD. Replace or check installation of the SD card. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Replace the FAX control PWB.

Copy im age data e rror

Trouble content

E7-62

An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.

Detail Cause

SCU PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble. Check connection of the SC U PWB and t he MFPC PWB. Check the ground. Replace the SCU PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.

Trouble content

MFP - PCU PWB c ommun ication error Detail Cause


MFP

Cause

PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble.

Check & Reme dy

Check & Remedy

Check connection of the PC U PWB and t he MFPC PWB. Check the ground. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.


An image data process error occurs in the fo llowing operation mode: ? Copy (in ERDH) ? Copy composing system function (Water mark) ? When in image send ? When filing docu ments ? When displaying the preview ? When printing with the GDI/PCL printer ? Copy composing system function (Water mark) ? When printing FAX send result table MFP Image data process abnormality HDD trouble Image compression data corruption MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory trouble or contact error Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.

E7-94

Image file data process error (when importin g file data )


File image process error (backup restore error) when importing filing data MFP Image data process abnormality HDD trouble Image compression data corruption MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory trouble or contact error

Check & Remedy

E7-96

F1-03

Au to dev elo per adj us tm ent (Over-toner abnormality )

Detail Cause

F1-10

Staple operation trouble

Detail

PCU

Cause

Staplem otort rouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor. Replace the staple motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.

Check & Remedy

tr ou bl e

An abno rmality occurred in exec ution of auto matic developer adjustment. PCU

F1-15

Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble

Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/ Trouble content

Check & Reme dy

Detail

PCU

Use SIM25-2 to per form the aut o developer adjustment.

Cause

Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.

Check & Remedy

Trouble conte nt

tr ou bl e

An abno rmality occurred in exec ution of auto matic developer adjustment.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/ developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble. Use SIM25-2 to per form the aut o developer adjustment.

Check & Reme dy

F1-19


Finisher - PC U PWB co mmunic ation error Check & Remedy


PCU

Cause

Connection trouble of the connector and the harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.

Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit tray lift motor. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper exit tray lift motor. Replace the home position sensor.

Finishe r alignment op eration trouble F

Cause

Check & Remedy

Lift motor trouble.

developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.

EE-EU Au to dev elo per adj us tm ent (Under-toner abnormalit y)

F1-00

Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit roller lift motor. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.

Trouble content

MFP Memory d ata corruption o ccurs MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory trouble or contact error Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the MFPC PWB. DIMM memory socket check Replace the DIMM memory.

Trouble conte nt

PCU Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble Harness and connector connection trouble Home position sensor trouble Finisher control PWB trouble

MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble

Detail

EE-EL

Detail Cause

Check & Remedy

Cause

Check & Remedy

Trouble content

Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.

MFPC PWB DIMM memor y ch eck erro r

Trouble content

Finisher paper exit roller lifting opera tion trou ble

Check the connector and the harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.


PCU Finisher paper a lignment m otor lock. Motor speed abnormality. Over-current to the motor. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor F. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper alignment motor F. Replace the home position sensor.

F1-20

Finisher alignment operation trouble R

F2-39

Proce ss thermistor tr ouble


Check & Remedy

F1-29

PCU Process thermistor trouble. Process thermistor harness connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble.

Check & Reme dy

Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor R. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the paper alignment motor R. Replace the home position sensor.

F2-40

Cause


PCU

Cause

Toner density sensor output abnormality. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.

Check & Remed y

Replace the toner density sensor. Check connection of the sensor connector and the harness. Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.

Check & Remedy

Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality MFP Motorlock Motor harness short/open. Finisher control PWB trouble. Harness/connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher cooling fan (FCF). Check connection from the finisher control PWB to the motor. Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

F2-58

Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M)


PCU

Cause

Temperature/humidity sensor trouble. Process humidity sensor harness and connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble.

Finisher data backup RAM error Check & Remedy

Trouble content Detail Cause Check & Remedy

PCU Finisher control PWB trouble. Malfunction due to noises Replace the finisher control PWB. Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)

Replace the process thermistor. Check connection of the process thermistor harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.

Toner density sensor trouble

Finishe r cooling fan motor abnormality


F1-37

Detail Cause

PCU Finisher p aper alignment motor lock. Motor speed abn ormality. Over-current to the moto r. Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.

F2-64

Replace the temperature/humidity sensor. Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor harness and the connector. Replace the PCU PWB.

Toner supply opera tion trouble

Trouble content

F1-50

Main unit - Finisher combin ation error

Detail

PCU

Cause

Toner motor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble. Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Toner cartridge trouble. Developing unit trouble.


PCU

Cause

The finisher which is not supported by the main unit model is installed. Finisher control PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

F1-95

Check & Remedy

Install a proper finisher. Replace the finisher control PWB.

Paper exit option configuration error F2-70

Trouble content Detail Cause Check & Remedy

PCU The paper exit option configuration is improper. Install a proper option.

Replace the toner motor. Replace the toner density sensor. Connector and harness check. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the developing unit.

Improper toner cartridge detection


Check & Remedy


PCU An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.

F2-74

Toner c artri dge CRUM error

F6-00

MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble


PCU

Trouble content

Cause

Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and toner cartridge

MFP - FAX communication establishment error / Framing / Parity / Protocol error

Section Case 1 Cause

MFP FAX control PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

F3-12

Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB. Check the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.

Case 2

Case 3 C1LUD is not turned ON w ithin the specified time.

Detail Cause

PCU C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time. C1LUD sensor trouble. Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble

Check & Remedy

F3-22

Check connection of the harness and the connector of C1LUD. Replace the lift-up unit. Replace the PCU PWB.

Replace the FAX control PWB.

Cause

FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and harness trouble Check the connector and the harness between the FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.

Check and Remedy

Paper feed tray 1 lift op eration trou ble

Trouble content

Check and Remedy

Case 4

F6-01

Cause

FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and harness trouble

Check and Remedy

Check the connector and the harness between the FAX control PWB and the mother board.

Cause Check and Remedy

FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.

FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error

Paper feed tray 2 lift op eration trou ble Trouble content

Trouble content

C2LUD does n ot turn ON within the specified time.

Detail

PCU

Cause

C2LUD do es not turn ON within the specified time. C2LUD sensor trouble. Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Check the harness and the connector of C2LUD. Replace the lift-up unit.

Check & Remedy

Section Case 1

Cause

FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble

Check and Remedy

Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to insure that EEPROM can be accessed.

Case 2

Replace the PCU PWB.

F3-32

C3LUD does n ot turn ON within the specified time.

Detail

PCU

Cause

C3LUD do es not turn ON within the specified time. C3LUD sensor trouble. Paper feed tray 3 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD. Replace the lift-up unit. Replace the PCU PWB.

Check & Remedy

F3-42



FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble

Check and


C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. PCU

F6-04

FAX MODEM operation trouble

Trouble content Section

FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble FAX

Case 1

Cause

FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.

Check and remedy


Cause

The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.

Check and Remedy


Case 2

F6-21

Improper comb ination o f TEL/LIU PWB and F AX soft s witch

Trouble content

Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX control PWB information (soft switch)

Section Case 1 Cause

MFP The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is improper.

C4LUD do es not turn ON within the specified time. C4LUD sensor trouble. Paper feed tray 4 lift unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble

Check & Remedy

Cause

Remedy


Trouble content

FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and write) FAX

Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD. Replace the lift-up unit. Replace the PCU PWB.

Case 2

Check and Remedy

Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.

Cause

TEL/LIU PWB trouble.

Check and Remedy

Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.


F6-30

FAX 1-chip mi cropr ocessor access error (F AX detection )

H2-01

Thermistor open t roubl e (TH_US)

Trouble content Trouble content Section Case 1 Cause Check and Remedy Case 2

Cause Check and Remedy

FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and write) MFP Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor, or no program data written. Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor program.

PCU Sub thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Fusing section connector connection trouble Fusing unit not installed

Check & Remedy

Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness. Check the connector in the fusing section.

FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble. Replace the FAX control PWB.

H3-00 F6-97

Incompatibil between F AX control PWB and th eity main machine

Trouble content Section Case 1

MFP Cause

The FAX control PWB installed i s improper. FAX control PWB trouble.

Check and Remedy

Install a proper FAX control PWB. Replace the FAX control PWB.

F6-98

Fusing section high tempe rature tro ub le (TH_UM)

Trouble content

Section Cause

Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main machine destination MFP Incompatibility between the destination information

Detail

PCU The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Main thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Power unit trouble.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness. Replace the power unit.

H3-01

written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) Check and Remedy

H2-00

1) 2)

Check the destination of the FAX control PWB. Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)

Fusing section high tempe rature tro ub le (TH_US)

Trouble content

PCU The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Sub thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Power unit trouble.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness. Replace the power unit.

Main thermistor open hardware detection trouble

Detail

PCU

Cause

Main thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Fusing section connector connection trouble Fusing unit not installed

Check & Remedy

Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness. Check the connector in the fusing section.

Sub heater lamp abnormally high temperature software detection trouble

Detail Cause

Thermistor open troub le (TH_UM)

Trouble content

Main heater lamp abnormally high temperature software detection trouble

Cause

Incompatibil ity b etween the F AX control PWB destination and the main machine destination

Trouble content

Case 1

Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine

Sub th ermistor open hardware detection trouble

Detail Cause


H4-00

Fusing section low temperature tro ubl e (TH_UM)

H5-01

5-time cont inuo us jams of POSD

Trouble content Trouble content

The fusing temperature does no t reach the s pecified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Main t hermistort rouble. Main heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. HL control PWB trouble. Power unit trouble.

Check & Remedy

H4-01

Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the power unit.

Fusing section low temperature tro ubl e (TH_US)

Trouble content

The fusing temperature does not r each the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Sub thermistor trouble. Sub heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. HL control PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

Power unit trouble. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp. Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the power unit.

Detail

PCU

Cause

A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper remains.) POSD sensor trouble Fusing unit installation trouble POSD sensor connector and harness connection trouble PCU PWB trouble Fusing unit, drive section trouble

Check & Remedy

Replace the POSD sensor. Check installation of the fusing unit. Replace the fusing unit. Check paper around the fusing unit section. Check connection of the POSD sensor connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

L1-00

Scanner fee d troub le

Trouble content

Scanner feed is no t completed within th e specified time.

Detail

SCU

Cause

Scanner unit trouble. SCU PWB trouble. Scanner control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble. Scanner home position sensor trouble. Scanner motor trouble.

Check & Reme dy

L3-00

Use SIM1-1 to chec k the scan operation. Replace the scanner unit. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the scanner motor.

Scanner return trouble

Trouble conte nt

Scanner return is not com pleted wit hin th e specified time.

Detail

SCU

Cause

Scanner unit trouble SCU PWB trouble Scanner control PWB trouble Harness and connector connection trouble Scanner home position sensor trouble Scanner motor trouble Use SIM1-1 to chec k the scan operation. Replace the scanner unit. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the scanner motor.

Check & Reme dy


L4-01

Main motor lock trouble

Trouble content

L4-40

The motor lock signal i s detected during rotation of the main motor.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Main motor lock trouble Harness and connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble

Check & Remedy

L4-11

Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor lock. Replace the main motor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB.

No change in t he shi fter home position sensor signal is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Shift motor trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Shifter home position sensor trouble. Use SIM6-1 to che ck the shift operation. Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter home position sensor. Replace the shift mo tor. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the shifter home position sensor.

Check & Reme dy

LSU cooling fan trouble

Trouble content

The fan operation signal is not detected. PCU

Cause

LSU cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.

Check & Remedy

Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan. Replace the LSU cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB.

Powe r source cooling

Trouble content

fan trouble

The fan operation signal is not detected.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Power cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Replace the power cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

L4-35


Detail

PCU

Cause

Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and the fan motor. PCU PWB trouble. Fan motor trouble. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble (No power supply to the fan motor)

Check & Remedy

L4-43

Cause

Check & Remedy

L6-10

Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.

Paper exit cooling


fan trouble

The fan operation signal is not detected. PCU Paper exit cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Check the connector and the harness. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

Polygon motor trouble

Trouble conte nt

Detail

L4-32

Trouble content

Shift motor trouble

Trouble content

L4-34

Ozone fan troub le

The polygon motor does not reach the sp ecified RPM within the specified time after starting rotation of the polygon motor.

Detail

PCU

Cause

Polygon motor trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.

Check & Remedy

Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the LSU. Replace the PCU PWB.

L4-70

Toner motor lo ck troubl e


PCU

Cause

Toner motor abnormality Improper connection or disconnection of the toner motor and the harness. PCU PWB abnormality

Check & Remedy

Fusing cooling fan trouble

Use SIM 10-1 to check the toner motor operations. Check connection of the toner motor harness/ connector. Replace the toner motor. Replace the PCU PWB.


L8-02

Detail Cause

PCU Fusing cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.

Trouble conten t

The ful l wave s ignal frequency is j udged as abno rmal. (The detected frequency is over 65Hz or below 45Hz.)

Check & Remedy

Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Replace the fusing cooling fan. Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.

Detail Cause

PCU PCU PWB trouble. Power unit trouble. Harness trouble. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit. Check connection of the connector and the harness.

Trouble content

Full wave signal width abnormality

Check & R emedy


L8-20

Powe r con troller communication trouble

PC--

Personal counter not detected


MFP PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connector connection trouble. Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB of the MFPC PWB.

Check & R emedy

P1-00

Communication establishment error / Fra ming / Parity / Protocol error

Replace the PC U PWB. Check connector connection between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB. Check the ground of the main unit.

Check & Remedy

U1-01

Detail

MFP

Cause

Communication error between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. Connection failure of connectors and harness between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. MFPC PWB trouble. PCI control PWB trouble. Check connection of the harness and connectors between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. (Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the procedures.) Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if necessary.

Trouble content

U2-00

Cause


MFP

Cause

MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble MFPC PWB trouble Strong external noises.

Check & Remedy

U2-05

Check connection of the connectors and harness between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB. Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if necessary. Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.

inconsistency Trouble content Detail Cause

The SD c ard or the MFPC PWB installed is improper. (Erroneous detection of account management data) MFP The SD card was replaced. The MFPC PWB was replaced. SD card trouble MFPC PWB trouble

Plasma gene rating device error


Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM. Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.) Check the power environment.

SD/MFPC PWB SRAM con tents

Check & Remedy

P1-02

Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or above. Replace the battery.

MFP The PCI fan operation signal is not detected. PCI fan trouble. PCI control PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

RTC backup battery voltage fall MFP 1) Battery life 2) Battery circuit abnormality

MFP EEPROM read/writ e erro r

PCI fan error


Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the SCU PWB.

Batte ry troub le

Check and Remedy

Trouble content

P1-01

MFP The personal counter is not installed. The personal counter is not detected. SCU PWB trouble.

Detail Case 1 Cause

PCI communication error

Check & Remedy

Detail Cause

Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the SD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works. Use SIM16 to cancel the error.

MFP

Cause

Connection f ailure o f connectors and h arness between the plasma generating device and the PCI control PWB. Plasma generating device trouble. PCI control PWB trouble.

Check & Remedy

Check connection of the connectors and harness between the plasma generating device and the PCI control PWB.

U2-10

MFPC PWB SRAM user authent icati on index check sum error


MFP

Cause

SRAM user index information (user authentication basic data) check sum error.

Replace the plasma generating Check the PCI control PWB, anddevice. replace if necessary. Check & Remedy


MFPC PWB SRAM trouble. MFPC PWB trouble. Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (Index information data in the HDD are transferred to the SRAM.) Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)

U2-11

MFPC PWB EEPROM cou nter check sum error

U2-24

MFPC PWB SRAM memor y u ser authentica tion co unter check sum error


MFP MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble MFPC PWB trouble Strong external noises.

Check & Remedy

U2-22

Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the EEPROM.) Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)

MFPC PWB SRAM memory c heck s um error

Trouble content

MFP PWB SRAM trouble

Detail

MFP

Cause

MFP PWB SRAM trouble Strong external noises Access circuit trouble

Check & Remedy

U2-23


MFP

Cause

MFPC PWB SRAM trouble MFPC PWB trouble Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.) Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)

Check & Remedy

U2-30

MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency

Trouble content

The data of the communication management table in the SRAM is initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted data again Use SIM16 to cancel the error Replace the MFPC PWB

Detail

MFP

Cause

When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB, the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. MFPC PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble

Check & Reme dy

Check that t he EEPROM is p roperly set. Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted on the new PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.) Replace the PCU PWB.

MFPC PWB SRAM memor y u ser authe ntication counter check s um error

Trouble content

Individual data check sum error of SR AM memory (MFP)

U2-40

Detail

MFP

Cause

SRAM trouble Runaway of the control circuit due to the noise MFPC PWB SRAM access circuit trouble Initialize automatically the data relating to the content that check sum error occurs by the power-OFF/ON. The saved "Scan" and "Fax" data may be deleted by auto initialization. To check if there're any deletion of those data above, by "Job Log". If there're any deletions, ask customer to do deleted job again. Clear the U2 trouble by SIM16. Replace the MFPC PWB.

Check & Remedy

Inconsistency between the ma nufacturing No. sav ed in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.

SD card syst em sto rage data are a error


MFP A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data partition. SD card trouble MFPC PWB trouble

Check & Remedy

U2-41

Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is automatically booted. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.

HDD system storage data area error


MFP

Cause

A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data area, disabling backup of theinsaved file of the machine adjustment values the SD card. HDD trouble MFPC PWB trouble

Check & Remedy


Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."

U2-42

Machine adjustment data storage data area) error

(system

U2-80

SCU PWB EEPROM rea d/wri te err or


Check & Remedy

U2-50

MFP The saved file of the machine adjustment values in the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is broken. Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system saved data area are broken. HDD trouble MFPC PWB trouble SD card trouble Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. Check the SD card, and replace if necessary. When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card replacement." Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the adjustment values.

HDD*1 user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed)

Detail

SCU

Cause

SCU PWB EEPROM trouble SCU PWB trouble SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble

Check & Remedy

printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the coun ter data and the adjustment values.)

U2-81

SCU PWB EEPROM check s um error


SCU SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. SCU PWB trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble.


MFP

Cause

HDD trouble* 1 MFPC PWB trouble Strong external noises.

Check & Remedy

Check & Remedy

Check the data related to the check sum error (address book, image send system registration data (senders record, meta data)) and register again. Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Replace the HDD*1. Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)*1

Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket. Check the SIM adjustment value of the following items, and adjust again if they are improper. * Scanner-related adjustments * Touch panel-related adjustments Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a

U2-90

Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the SCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.) To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the coun ter data and the adjustment values.)

PCU PWB EEPROM rea d/wri te err or

*1: SD card when no HDD is installed. Trouble content

U2-60

Watermark check error


Check & Remedy

Detail

PCU

Cause

PCU PWB EEPROM trouble PCU PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble

Check & Remedy

MFP Watermark data trouble HDD trouble MFPC PWB trouble Use SIM16 to can cel the U2 tr ouble. Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. Replace the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)


Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and adjust again if they are improper. Replace the PCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the coun ter data and the adjustment values.)

U2-91

PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error


PCU

Cause

PCU PWB EEPROM trouble PCU PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble

Check & Remedy

U7-50

Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Replace the PCU PWB. Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.) To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter da ta and the adjustment values.)

MFPC PWB - Vendo r mach ine communication error

Trouble conte nt

Communication error betw een the MF P and the se rial vendor.

Detail

MFP

Cause

Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications (SIM26-3). Vendor machine trouble. MFPC PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble. Strong external noises. Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line. Change the specifications of the vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the MFPC PWB.

Check & Remedy

U7-51

Vendor machi ne error


MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)

Cause

Serial vendor machine trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.

Check & Remedy

UC-02

Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the vendor. (XX is the detail code.) Repair the vendor machine referring to the de tail code. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line.

CPT - ASIC error


SCU

Cause Check & R emedy

UC-20

SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.) Replace the SC U PWB.

DOCC ASIC error

Trouble content Detail Cause Check & R emedy

SCU SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.) Replace the SC U PWB.


(1)

Descriptions on E 7-91 - 94 errors

Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the errors. The number in each digit has its own meaning. (Example) E7-91(**) The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error. Error code

The upper digit of the added code

E7-91

Other

1*

JPEG

2*

JBIG

3* 4*

Mxx1ch Mxx4ch

5*

Other

6* 7*

JPEG JBIG

8* 9*

Mxx1ch Mxx4ch

A* - F*

Job kind at the occurrence of the error *1 *1

* FAX (Internet FAX) reception print (Other than long size images)

*1

*1 *1 *1

* FAX (Internet FAX) reception print (Long size images)

Not Used

*1

0*

Other

*1

1*

JPEG

E7-92

2*

JBIG

3*

Mxx1ch

4* F*-5*

Mxx4ch

E7-93

E7-94

Image type

0*

*1 *1

Not Used

*1

0*

Other

1*

JPEG

2* 3*

JBIG Mxx1ch

4*

Mxx4ch

5*

Other

6*

JPEG

7* 8*

JBIG Mxx1ch

9*

Mxx4ch

A* B*

Other JPEG

C*

JBIG

D* E*

Mxx1ch Mxx4ch

F*

Used Not

0* 1*

Other JPEG

2*

JBIG

3* 4*

Mxx1ch Mxx4ch

F*-5*

* OC copy (in Non ERDH)

*1

* Copy print (in ERDH) * Copy composing system function (Custom Stamp, Water mark)

*1 * Image send * Document filing * Preview display *1

* GDI/PCL printer print * Copy composing system function (Custom Stamp, Water mark)

*1 *1 *1

* Backup restore (Filing data import)

Not Used

*1 *1 *1 *1

*1: Added code without generating The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed when the abnormality is detected. Lower digit of the added code

B*6*,1*, JPEG The upper digit of the 2*, added code C*7*,JBIG i D*8*,3*, Mxx1ch Error detection circuit E*9*,4*, Mxx4ch

Kind/Content of the error

*1

*9

*A

*B

*C

*D

*E

*F

Memory verify NG

-

Huffman code error

Restart marker error

Improper marker error

Head decoding error detection (ASIC detection)

Head decoding error detection (CPU detection)

Other abnormal termination

-

O

O

O

-

-

O

-

-

O

-

O -

: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error. O : Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc. - : Added code without generating


O

-

O -

O O

(2)

Counterm easure s in case of E7 -91 - 94

In c ase of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41) Cause

Check and remedy

In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is automatically read/written to perform a simplified check. If an abnormality is detected in that case, the added code becomes (*1). Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an abnormality lies around the memory. * Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.) * Use SIM60-01 (Memory read /write check) to check to ins ure that no error occur s. * Replace the DI MM memory. * Replace the MFPC PWB.

NOTE: Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94 occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with absolute certainty. If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality. Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no abnormality around the memory. Other added codes Cause

Check and remedy

Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for decoding are broken for some reason. There is an abnormality in the process of read/write of the process data in the memory or the hard disk. A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the cause. For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, when broken data are saved, printing is performed every time when the machine is booted, generating an error repeatedly. (E7-91) (To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.) * * * * * * * * * *

Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality. When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX control PWB and the SC CARD PWB. Perform SIM60-01 (Mem ory read/write check) to insure that there is no NG . Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not required, however, when the job at occurrence of an error is FAX.) Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.) Replace the HDD. Replace the FAX con trol PWB. Replace the DI MM memory. Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the SD card.

NOTE: When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur. If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibility that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB.

(3)

Counterme asures against the case where nothing is disp layed when the machine is booted

[Trouble content] If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify. One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of the SD card. To check that, the following method is used. [Check method] Check to confirm that the LED (red) upper the CPU heat sink on the MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is supplied. If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card. Red LED

Heat sink (CPU)

SD Card

[Countermeasures] 1)

Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service part.)

2)

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

3)

Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception data, this procedure is not required.) (The FAX reception data are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)

4)

Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)


(4)

Relation betwee n the M FPC PWB LED status and errors

When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause. LEDstatus(Lighting)

Processoperationcontent CPUinitialsetting

OOO

Memoryadjustment

Memoryanditsperipheralcircuittrouble

Memorycheck

Memoryanditsperipheralcircuittrouble

OO O OO

Programmemorydevelopment

Memory-relatedtrouble

O

Interruption-relatedinitialization

OO

O

O

O O

O

SD card initialization SATA initialization

O O O

OSinitialization(1) Timerenabling

O

Serialdriverenabling I2C driver enabling O O

ReusASICtrouble

PCIeinitialization Basicdeviceinitialization

OOO

O

ReusASICtrouble PCIeanditsperipheralcircuittrouble(SoC/ACRE,etc.) ReusASICtrouble Reus ASIC trouble SD card trouble HDD trouble ReusASICtrouble Reus ASICtrouble Reus ASIC trouble

LCDinitialization

ReusASICtrouble

ImageprocessIPinitialization OSinitialization(2) Mainprocess

*

Causeforhaltduringoperation

OOOO

ReusASICtrouble ReusASICtrouble ReusASICtrouble

: LED ON / O: LED OFF

LED status (Flashing) OOO OO

O

OO O O

Error content Nonsupportmemory

Memorytrouble

Nonsupportmemory (accessspeed)

Memorytrouble

Cause

Nonsupportmemorycontroller OO O

OOO

Memorytrouble

DDR-PHYsettingerror Interruptionhandlerprocesserror

ReusASICtrouble ReusASICtrouble

Memorycheckerror

Memorytrouble

Memorycombination error

Memorytrouble

* In case of an error , the LED's flas h as shown in the abov e table. *

: LED ON / O: LED OFF

LED No.

D25/D24/D23/D22 3 / 2 / 1 / 0


2. JAM and t rou ble sho oti ng A. JA M co de l is t (1)

Main un it JAMcode

TRAY1 TRAY2

(3) JAM content

RSPF JAMcode

Cassette 1 paperfeed JAM (PPD1 not-reached JAM) Cassette 2 paperfeed JAM (C2PFD not-reached JAM)

JAM content

SPPD1_N

SPPD1 not-reached JAM

SPPD1_S

SPPD1 remaining JAM

SPPD2_N


C2PFD_N3

C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)

SPPD2_S SPPD3_N

SPPD2 remaining JAM SPPD3 not-reached JAM

C2PFD_N4


SPPD3_S

SPPD3 remaining JAM

C2PFD_S2

C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)

SPPD4_N


C2PFD_S3 C2PFD_S4

C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)

SPPD4_S SPPD5_N

SPPD4 remaining JAM SPPD5 not-reached JAM

TRAY3

Cassette 3 paperfeed JAM (C3PFD not-reached JAM)

SPPD5_S

SPPD5 remaining JAM

SPSD_SCN

Exposure start notification timer end

C3PFD_N4


SPPD2_NR

SPPD2 r everse n ot-reached JAM

C3PFD_S3 C3PFD_S4

C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)

SPPD2_SR

SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM

P_SHORT

Shortsize JAM

TRAY4

Cassette 4 paperfeed JAM (C4PFD not-reached JAM)

SDFS_S

Overlap feed detection jam/accompanied feed jam

C4PFD_S4

C4PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)

ICU_REQ

ICU factor stop JAM

MFT

Manual feed tray paperfeed JAM (PPD1 not-reached) PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)

PPD1_N2 PPD1_N3

PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)

PPD1_N4 PPD1_NA

PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)

PPD1_SM

PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)

PPD1_S1

PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)

PPD1_S2


PPD1_S3


PPD1_S4


PPD1_SA

PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)

POSD_N POSD_S

POSD not-reached JAM POSD remaining JAM

POD1_N

POD1 not-reached JAM

POD1_S POD2_N

POD1 remaining JAM POD2 not-reached JAM

POD2_S

POD2 remaining JAM

POD3_N

POD3 not-reached JAM

POD3_S

POD3 remaining JAM

DRUM

Drumlockdetection

FUSER PRI_JAM

Fuser winding detection Image preparation wait timeout

FIN_ERR

Finisher communication abnormality detection

MTR_ILG SIZE_ILG

Motor driver trouble JAM Size illegal JAM

STOP_JAM

Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)

NO_MATCH

Parameter n o m atching

(2)

Fin is her JAMcode

FPPD1_N FPPD1_S

JAM content Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM Finisher inlet port remaining JAM

FSTPD_S

Finisher paper exit remaining JAM

FSTPL

FinisherstapleJAM

FPRD_N

Finisher compiler not-reached JAM

FPRD_S

Finisher compiler remaining JAM


3. Image s end comm unica tion re port cod e A. Out li ne an d c od e sy st em d esc ri pt io ns

B. Detail s

After completion of communication, the communication report table, the communication management table, and the protocol are described on the communication report column.

(1)

The communication report code is composed as follows:

Comm unic ation re port m ain code

Report code

Final receive signal (Send side)

Final receive signal (Receive side)

0 1

Abnormal signal NSF,DIS

2

CFR

(PWD),(SEP),NSC,DTC

3 4

FTT MCF

EOP EOM

The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: Used by the serviceman.

5

PIP, PIN

6

RTN, RTP

PRI-Q

The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to communication report sub code 1.)

7

Nosignal,DCN

DCN

8

PPR

The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to communication report sub code 2.)

9 10

Communication report: XX (XXXX) The upper 2 digits of the communication report code: Communication report code of 00 - 99 (Refer to communication report main code.)

CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal notation.) CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the these models.

Abnormal signal (SID),(SUB),NSS,DCS

MPS

PPS-EOP PPS-EOM PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL

11 12

RNR CTR

RR CTC

13

ERR

EOR-Q

16

Abnormal signal

Abnormal signal

17

NSF,DIS

18

CFR

19

FTT

20

MCF

21

PIP,PIN

22

RTN,RTP

PRI-Q

23 24

Nosignal,DCN PPR

DCN

25

RNR

RR

26

CTR

CTC

27 28

ERR

EOR-Q PPS-PRI-Q

29

V.8Phase-1

V.8Phase-1

30

V.8Phase-2

V.8Phase-2

31

V.8Phase-3

V.8Phase-3

14

PPS-PRI-Q SID,SUB,NSS,DCS PWD,SEP,NSC,DTC PPS-EOP PPS-EOM PPS-MPS,PPS-NULL

CAUTION: For report codes 16 - 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.


Report code (Communication result)

Display in the column of result

0 - 31

Refer to “previous table”.

Content of communication interruption Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.

33

BUSY

The calling side cannotestablish connection with the remote party.

34

CANCEL

A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for interruption of input.

35

NG35 XXXX

Power is failed during sending/receiving.

36 37

(Norecord paper) (Recordpaperjam)

38

MEM. FULL

39

(Numberofpaper unmatched)

40

(Relay not received)

41

LENGTH OVER

The send data length of one page exceeds the l imit (2m) in sending.

42

LENGTH OVER

The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit.

43 44

(Communication) (OK) ORIGINAL ERROR

Speaking before data transmission A document jam occurs in direct sending.

45

(Picture quality error)

46

NO RESPONSE

47

TX DECODE ERROR

48

Memory overduring reception. Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit.

OK

The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. (When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.) A decode error occurs in the FAX board. Normalendofcommunication

OK REPLY RECEIVE

OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.

49

NO RX POLL

The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. The called side has no data to send.

50

RX POLL FAIL

In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. In polling sending, there is no send data.

51

PASS # NG

In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. In polling sending, the system number is not matched.

52

(No confidential function in remote party)

53

(Confidential not received)

1)

In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS.

54

(Confidential BOX NO NG)

1)

In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.

55

(No relay function in remote party)

In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. (Including other company's machine) 1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.

56

NOREL RX

57

(Relay ID unmatched)

1)

58

REJECTED

In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. (Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)

59

RX NO F-CODE POLL

In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)

60

NO F-CODE POLL

In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP.

61

RX POLL # NG

In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched.

62

F POLL PASS # NG

In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched.

63

NO F FUNC

64

NOF-CODE

In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). (Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.) InFcodesending: 1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box n umber. 2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.

67

F PASS # NG

In F code receiving : "F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW." In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched.

68

BOX NO. NG

In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.)

69 70

MEMORY OVER (JOB MEMORY OVER)

In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. (Including other company's machines) 1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit. 2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.

2) 1) 2) 3)

*1

71

NG71XXXX

72

(NG72XXXX)

73

NG73XXXX

*1

74

NG74XXXX

*1

*1

The NSF is not a Sharp machine. In relay command sending,DCN isreceived for NSS. In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received. In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match.

Memory over in quick online sending In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. In department management setting on the machine side: * In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the machine side is specified. * In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FA X, the department numb er is not specified. In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX; * The pass-code for the folder is set on the machi ne side and the pass-co de from PC-XXX does not matc h with it. * The pass-code for the folder is set on the machin e side and no pass-cod e is specifie d by PC-XXX.


Report code (Communication result)

Display in the column of result

Content of communication interruption

75

NG75XXXX

*1

* Reservation cannot be made due to machine bus y. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted .) * When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibi t" is set on the mac hine side.

76

NG76XXXX

*1

Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered on the machine side.

77

NG77XXXX

*1

In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.

78

NG78XXXX

*1

79

NG79XXXX

*1

The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PCInternet FAX. An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.

80

NG80XXXX

*1

81

NG REPORT

82

NO REPORT

In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including PC-Internet FAX). * In a case where send confirma tion wait timeout time is other than 0, when send confir mation repl y from an Internet FAX destination is not received. * Recalls of the set numb er of recalls ar e performed, but sen d confirmation reply fr om an internet FA X destination is not received.

83

NG LIMIT

In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.

84 85

REJECTED NG85XXXX

86

RECEIVED

87

NG87XXXX

*1

88

NG88XXXX

*1

89

NG89XXXX

*1

90 91

NG90XXXX NG91XXXX

*1

92

NG92XXXX

*1 *2

The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is executed.

93

NG93XXXX

*1

When error in D-SMTP send (with recall) * An error respon se of 4XX occurs durin g communication with the SMTP serv er. * Time out occu rs after establishment of connect ion with the SMTP serve r.

94

NG94XXXX

*1

When busy in D-SMTP send Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.

95

NG95XXXX

*1

When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.

96 98

NG96XXXX NG98XXXX

*1 *1

When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending. The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.

99

NG99XXXX

*1

A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.

*1

NIC connect failure (network abnormality) * Check for disconnection of cables. * A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs. * The port is set to DISABLE. * Authentication of the POP server i s failed when PO P before SMTP is ena bled. * When an error other than the com munication result cod e 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (inc luding error response of 5XX) In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet FAX). * Error of the disposition-modifier. * The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or processed.

In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server. * Header acquisition erro r. * Time-out during mai l receive In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received. Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files. * The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized. * There is no a ttached file.

*1 *2

In * In *

e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. Memory over SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. Cannot be stored in me mory.

* The number of items of acti ng receive dat a is the maximum, and an additi onal data cannot be stor ed. In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server. * Time-out occurs during e-mail receive. After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made. Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed. * The memory dev ice is disconnected during wri ting to the mem ory device. * An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.

*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG For a communication result, "Communication error

XXXX" is displayed. "

" is the code number.

(XXXX)" is displayed.

*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log. * When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000." * Errors in ( ) are not used.


(2)

Comm unic ation re port s ub co de 1

The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."

(3)

Comm unic ation re port s ub co de 2

Reportcode2 00 01 02 03 04 05

Contentofcommunicationinterruption

Send/Receive

When the conditions after 01 do not apply.

Send/Receive

length Send over uptime EOL

Send Receive

Carrier detection time up

Receive

Timeupofthecommunicationstartcommandfromthemachineside min) phase (8 Time inC up

Receive Send

06

Memory image decode error

07 08

Memory image decode error TimeupbetweenframesinphaseC(Reportcodeis0or16.)

09 used

Not

—

10 used 11

Not Polarity reversion detection

— Receive

12 13 14

Receive Send Send/Receive

Invalid command reception Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time)

Receive Receive

error PUT

Receive

15

InV.34mode,timeupisgeneratedwhenshiftingfromPrimarytoControl.

Receive

16

InV.34mode,timeupisgeneratedwhenshiftingfromControltoPrimary.

Receive

17

Command receive time-up from MFP controller

Receive

18 used

Not

—

19 used 20

Not Polarity reversion detection

— Send

21

Invalid command reception

22

Fallback retry number over

23 24

Send Send

Command retry number resend over timer) (T5up Time

Send Send

25

Time (T5 up timer) V.34 inmode

26

InV.34mode,timeupisgeneratedwhenshiftingfromPrimarytoControl.

Send

27

InV.34mode,timeupisgeneratedwhenshiftingfromControltoPrimary.

Send Send

28 29 used

When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. (V.34, other than V.34) Not —

30

A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code i s 0 o r 16.)

31

DC current not detected (busy)

Send

32

Dial tone not detected (busy)

Send

33 34 35

Busy tone detection (busy) T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) T1 time up (Remote machine not responding)

36

Indialing,polarityreversiondetection(Remotemachinenotresponding)

37 38 used

Callingisnotmade(busy) Not

Send

—

Send Send Send Send Send —

60

Inresendofdocumentfileddata,anerroroccursindecodingorcoding.

61

In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Enlarged.)

Resend

62

In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated.

Resend

Resend

63

In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend.

64 70

In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive

71

Time out occurs during e-mail receive.

72

Receivereject occurs duringe-mailreceive.

E-mailreceive

73

Networkcommunicationcannotbemadeduetoportdisable.

Networksend

74

AnauthenticationofthePOPserverisfailedwhenPOPbeforeSMTPisenabled.

75 76

In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Thereisnoimageinnetworkcommunication(transfer).

80

There is no attached file inreceived e-mail.

81

Theattachedfileofreceivede-mailisnotofTIFFtypewhichissupported.

82

The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. ID error The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Endian error The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Version error

E-mail receive

The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Tag data error The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Tag parameter error

E-mail receive

The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Header size error

E-mail receive

83 84 85 86 87

Resend

E-mail receive

Networksend Network send Networksend E-mail receive


E-mailreceive

E-mail receive E-mail receive

E-mail receive

Reportcode2

Contentofcommunicationinterruption

Send/Receive

88

The TIFF type of the attached f ile in received e-mail cannot be recognized. Data error

E-mail receive

90

In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. Memory over. Cannot be stored in memory.

E-mail receive

91

In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. The file size is too great to be stored in memory.

E-mail receive

92

In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. Cannot be stored in memory.

E-mail receive

When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

4. Dial tone When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine, be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone i s properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled. Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the buzzer sound.) If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.


MX-M316N

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE

Service Manual

1. Outline A. Cases wh ere u pdate i s r equ ir ed

C. Update procedure s and kinds of firmware

ROM update is required in the following cases:

There are following methods of update of the firmware.

1)

When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.

1)

Update method using SIM 49-1

2)

When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine.

2)

Update method using FTP

3)

Update method using the Web page

3)

When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair to the machine.

4)

Update method using the CN update function (There are three methods.)

4)

When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be repaired.

Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware. When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.

B. Notes for upda te (1)

Relations hip betwe en each R OM and upda te

Firmware types The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.

Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.

Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.

2. Update pro cedur e A. Update m eth od us in g SIM 49-1 For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.

Media Adapter

Firmware.sfu

USB Host Firmware.sfu

Firmware.sfu

+

USB memory

Firmware.sfu

*1: * Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand. * The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data. * The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.

MX-M316N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

The machine detects the media and executes the program automatically.

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01

5)

1)

Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation panel.)

2)

Enter the SIM49-01.

Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]” becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected firemware.

Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to the update screen.   





     

 

The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE UPDATE" title by 20 steps. 





 



Current version number and the version number to be updated will be shown for each firmware respectively.





           

* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen appears. 3)



 

* The number of key changes according to the number of the sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.

  

At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not displayed. 6)

If the update is normal completion, following screen is displayed.   





      

4)

Press [ALL] key.



All the firmware programs are selected.

Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.) Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded successfully. 7)

If the update is not normal completion, following screen is displayed.   





         

* Normally select all the firm wares and execute updating. * In this case, firmwares which do not exist on t he machine side are ignored. To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with the firmware display key. * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out and cannot be pressed. MX-M316N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2



B. Firmwa re up date using FT P FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

Machine 1

Machine 3

10.36.112.83

10.36.112.84

Firmware.sfu

Machine2

Machine4

FTP Client

10.36.101.52

10.36.101.53

C. Firmwa re upda te using the We b page

4)

An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the firmware. 1)

Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.

2)

Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the [Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.

When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.

MX-XXXX

"Close the browser and open again to display latest information." will be displayed. 5)

3)

Check the f irmware version of machine again.

After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." appears.


D. Firmwa re upda te using the CN update function (There are three methods.) (1)

Out li ne

The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called the CN update.

c. DIP-SW use d in the CN update mode To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on the MFP PWB and boot the machine. When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to OFF (normal mode).

a. Funct io n There are the following three functions in the CN update mode. 1)

Firmware update function This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options by means of a USB memory or USB cable. This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the following points: When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section than operation the boot program some reasons during firmwareother update of otherformethod than the CN update, this method can be used to update the firmware. If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program. If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in the boot program. If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the main program.

2)

Firmware version check function

d. Key s used in the C N upda te mode The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the normal mode. [UP]

[BACK]

(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this manual.) 3)

ROM making function (This function is not used in the market, and not described in this manual.)

b. Pur pose This function is used in the following cases: 1)

[DOWN]

When an error occurs during firmware update operation other than the CN update. When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update operation of other method than the CN update, this method can be used to update the firmware. If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.

[MENU]

Key name

[OK] Functions in the CN update mode

[OK] key

Executes the selected function or item.

[MENU] key

Selects a menu.

[BACK] key

Selects a menu. (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)

[UP] key [DOWN] key

Selects an item. Selects an item.

If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.


(2)

Operating proc edure s

7)

Press [OK] key. The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and the file selection menu is displayed.

a. Firm war e updat e func tion This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB memory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and each option.

Firm Update > F 0100P000.sfu

It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points. 1)

The update target ROM is automatically selected.

2)

When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update operation of other method than the CN update.

Display of file selection 8)

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and [DOWN] key.

If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.

When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: "> D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.

When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the main program (SD card). a-1. Necessa ry item s

When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the menu returns to the srcinal upper directory. 9)

1)

Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine.

2)

USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.

Select the firmware file (SFU).

Press [OK] key. The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one minute.

NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower directory.

Firm Update Reading Data

a-2. Proce dure s 1)

Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP PWB cover.

Display of file reading

2)

Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to the PWB side.)

10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is continued.

3)

Install the USB memory into the USB port. USB memory installing

position

Firm Update Writing Data

IcuM

Display of the firmware update process * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the display. * During the update process, the display may flash instantaneously. It is a normal operation.

USB port

4)

Turn ON the power.

5)

Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes more than ten seconds to display the menu.)

Update Program Init Please wait

11) Check the update result. Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the firmware programs. Firm Update Result : OK

IcuM

Firm Update IcuM Result : Not Update

Firm Update Result : NG

IcuM

Display of the firmware update result OK: Update is completed successfully. NG: Update is f ailed.

Version Check Conf : 00050000

Not Update: Update is not executed. 12) Turn OFF the power.

Display when booting is completed 6)

13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the DIP-SW to the normal mode.) 14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine boots up normally.

Select the firmware update mode. Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.

Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed. Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the copier basic menu.

Firm Update From USB Memory

15) Check to confirm the version of each firmwa re with SIM22-5. 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

Display of the firmware update mode


1

: ‘15/Aug.

MX-M316N

[9] MAINTENANCE

Service Manual

1. Maint enance lis t ✕:

When calling Process section

Drum

Side Seal F/R

✕

400 k

450 k

500 k

600 k

700 k

750 k

800 k



✕







✕







✕





✕



-



✕



-



✕



-

✕

✕

✕

-

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕



✕



-



✕



-



✕



✕



✕



-



✕



-



-



✕







✕ ✕

✕

✕

Developer Toner filter DV blade DV side sheet F

✕



✕



✕



✕



✕

-



✕



-



-



✕

✕

✕



✕

✕

✕





✕







✕









✕







✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

DV side sheet R

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Toner sensor

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Toner cartridge

BK

Transfer unit

Transferbearing

-

TransferGear

-

Anti-static pin Transferrollerunit

-

Mirror/Lens/CCD

○

Check the sensor head surface.

-

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

-

Packed with the drum.

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

-


✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

✕

-

-




○



○

○ ○

○

○

○



○ ○

○



○

○

○

○

○

○



○

○

○

○

○

○

○

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Rails

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

○ ○

○

○

○

○

Air-blow the light guide bar.

✕

✕

✕

✕

Sensors

✕

✕

✕

✕

OC

○

LSU section Paper feed

Dust-proof glass

✕

Paper feed roller

✕

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○

○

section/ Transport section

Pickup roller Separation roller

✕ ✕

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○

○ ✕

✕

○

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

○

✕

○

✕

✕

✕

○ ✕

✕

○ ○

○

○

✕

○

✕

✕

○

○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

-

Replace it every 100K or 1 year of use.

○

○ ○

Sensors

-

○

✕

Gears

○

○



○



○



○



○



○

○

○

○



○

○

○



○

○

○

○



○



○



○



○



○ ○

Staringwasher

-

○



○



○



○



○



Uppercleaningpad

-

✕



✕



✕



✕



✕



✕

○

○

○



○

○

○



○

○

○

Fusing separation pawl (Lower)

-

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○

✩



✩

○ ✩



✩

-

✕



✕



✕



✕



✕



✕

Apply grease to specific position. (Refer to grease map.)

Pressure roller bearing

-

✕

○✩

✕



✕

○✩

✕



✕

✕

✕

Replace if ne cessary.

✩



Apply grease to specific position. (Refer to grease map.)

Upper heat roller bearing Paper guide

-

○ ○ ○

Delivery guide collar

✕○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Gears

✕✩

○ ○ ○

✕✩

✕✩

✕✩



✩



○ ○ ○ ○

✕✩

○

Refer to cleaning point.

✕✩

✕✩

✕✩

✕✩

✕✩

✕✩

Belts

Filter

✕

✕ ✕

○

○ ○

Fusing separation pawl (Upper)

Drive section

○

Torque limiter

Thermistor Fusing gear

Usable for three PM cycles

✕

✕

Upperheatroller Pressure roller

Replace as Process frame unit every 300K.

✕

Table glass/SPF glass Scanner lamp

Transport rollers Transport paper guides

Remark Stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ)

User replacement for every toner empty.

Drive belt/drive wire

Fusing section

Lubricate

300 k

Separation pawl unit Process frame unit

Scanner section

✩:

200 k

MC unit Star ring

Developing section

Replace

150 k

✕

:

100 k

-

Cleanerblade

1

○ : Cleaning

Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)

Ozonefilter

-

Exhaust ozone filter

✕

✕

✕

○

✕

✕

✕

○

○

✕

✕



-







-







-





-







-







-



-

MX-M316N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1

Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use. grease.(Refer to grease map.) Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use. Or, replace it every 6 month use. Or, replace it every 6 month use. Destination: North America and Mexico only

When calling Exit Paper feed section

Transport rollers ✕

✕

Discharge brush

✕

✕

Sensors

○

✕

✕

✕

✕

○ ○

✕

200 k

✕

✕

400 k

○ ○ ○ ✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

○ ○

✕

✕

✕

450 k

500 k

600 k

○ ○ ○ ○

✕

○ ○

✕

300 k

✕

✕

✕

✕

○ ○ ✕

✕

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Discharge brush

✕

Transport rollers

○

Sensors Scanning plate

✕

○

✕

✕

○ ✕

✕✕✕

✕

○ ✕

○

✕

○

✕

○ ✕

○

✕

✕✕

✕

✕

○

○

○

✕

✕

○

○

✕

○

✕✕

✕

✕

○ ✕

✕

○ ✕

○

✕

○

✕

○

○

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

OC mat

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

✕

Belts

○

Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value. SPF section roller: 100K or 1 year of use When replacing the paper feed roller, apply grease to the paper feed shaft. (UKOG-0013QSZZ) Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value. SPF section torque limiter: 400K or 2 years of use

✕

Gears

○

Remark

✕

○

✕✕✕

800 k

✕

Pickup roller Separation roller

✕

750 k

✕

○ ○

✕

700 k

○

Paper feed roller

Torque limiter

Grease map

150 k

○ ○ ○

✕

Gears Transport paper guides

Paper feed section/ Transport section (RSPF)

100 k

○

Fusing section

Grease UKOG-0255FCZZ





conntact point of plates.

conntact point of plates.


1

: ‘15/Aug.

Grease map

Drive section Grease UKOG-0307FCZZ

Grease UKOG-0013QSZZ

Grease UKOG-0013QSZZ Do not apply grease on the fusing drive giar.




Do not apply grease on the tooth surface show in the figure. Cleaning point

Fusing section

1 Clean the Delivery guide collar surface.


2. Othe r re lated ite ms A. Cou nt er c lear Item

SIM

Maintenance cycle setting

Remarks

SIM 21-1

Jam/trouble counter clear

SIM 24-1

Paper feed counter clear Scan/Stapler/Stampcounterclear

SIM 24-2 SIM24-3

Maintenance counter clear

SIM 24-4

Copy counter clear Printer/other counter clear

SIM 24-6 SIM 24-9

FAX counter clear

*

SIM 24-10

Scanner mode counter clear

SIM 24-15

*: When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the replaced part's counter only.

3. Display of ma inte nan ce execu tion timing The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages and the counters are shown below.

A. Main ten anc e co un ter Display condition Display content

-

SIM26-38-A set value

Countername

0 (Print continue)

Maintenance required. Code: TA Maintenancerequired.Code:TA

Countervalue

Maintenance counter (Total)

When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.

(Print 1 stop) 0(Printcontinue)

WhentheSIM21-1setvalueis reached.

(Print stop) 1

Print JOB Enable/ Disable Enable Enable Disable

* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total).

B. Transf er unit Display condition

Display content Maintenancerequired.:TK

Countername

Countervalue

Transferunitprintcounter

150K

Print JOB Enable/ Disable Enable

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use day counter.

C. Fus ing un it Display content Maintenancerequired.:FK1 Maintenancerequired.:FK2

Display condition Countername

Countervalue

Fusingheatrollerprintcounter Pressurerollerprintcounter

150K 300K


* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing heat roller print counter, the accumulated rotation number counter and the use day counter.

D. OPC drum Display content Maintenancerequired.:DK Maintenance required.: DK

Display condition Countername

Countervalue

OPCdrumprintcounter OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter

100K 550K rotations


* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum print counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter.

E. Develope r Display content Maintenancerequired.:VK Maintenance required.: VK

Countername

Display condition

Developerprintcounter

Countervalue 100K

Developer accumulated rotation number counter

Print JOB Enable/Disable Enable

550K rotations

* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter. The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum m otor rotation number.


F. Ton er Status Close to Near End (Near Near End)

NearEnd

Toner End

Message

Print JOB Enable/Disable

Display content Toner low. (Do not replace cartridge until requested.)

Sim.26-69A

Readytoscanforcopy. (Change the toner cartridge.)

Change the toner cartridge.

Enable

0

1

Display (Default)

Not display Sim.26-69C

0 Display (Default) -


Enable 1 Not display

-

Disable

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. Disa ssembly a nd Ass embly t able Unit

Parts

A. Side door section/Duplex transport section

1

Transfer unit

2

Transfer roller

3

Transfer discharge plate

4 B.Scannersection

1 2

D.Paperexitsection

Drive belt, Drive wire

4 5

Rails Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

1 2

Thermostat

3

Thermistor

4

FusingPG

5

Lower separation p awl

6 7

Heaterlamp Cleaning felt

8

Upper separation pawl

9

Heatroller

10

Pressure roller Ozonefilter

2

Cooling fan

3

First paper exit unit

1

1 2 3

F. Optical frame unitsection G. LSU section H. Tray paper feed section/Paper

1 1

I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport section

Paper feed clutch Separation roller

4

PINsensor

5 1

PSroller Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller

2

Tray paper feed d rive u nit

3 4

Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch Tray transport roller

1

Bypasstrayunit 2

Bypass tray paper feed roller

3


1 2

L.Developingsection

Powerswitch

2

Developer Toner filter unit

4 5 1

DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R DVblade Toner sensor Drumunit

2 3 4 N. Others

Bypass tray paper feed clutch HighvoltagePWB PCUPWB

3 1 3

M.Processsection

Operation panel PWB LSU unit Main drive unit

2 3

4 K.Powersection

Second paper exit unit MFP PWB PCUPWB Optical frame unit

1

transport section

J.Bypasstraysection

Lens,CCD LED PWB, LED driver PWB Fusingunit

4 E. PWB section

Duplex transport part Tableglass,SPFglass Scanner unit

3

6 7 C.Fusingsection

Contents

1

Main charger holder unit Cleaning blade Separation pawl unit Main motor

2

Tray open/close sensor

3

Paper empty sensor

4

Paper exit fan

5

DV cooling duct

6

Lift up motor

MX-M316N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

1

: ‘15/Aug.

2. Disas sembly a nd asse mbly of each unit

 

A. Sid e do or sec ti on /Dup lex tr ans po rt sec ti on (1)

No.

(1)

Content

1

Transfer roller unit

2

Transfer roller

3


4

Duplex transport part

(2) (1)

Transfe r rolle r unit

 

Open the bypass tray and remove the side door. (3)

* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the right door unit.

(3)

(1)

Transfe r disch arge pl ate

Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl. (2)

Remove the transfer roller unit. (2)

(3)

Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer discharge plate.

(3) (1)

(2)

Transf er ro lle r

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.   

(1)

(2) (1)


1

(4)

Duple x tra nspo rt part

B. Scanne r section

Remove the rail inner unit. No.

(1)

Name

1

Table glass, SPF glass

2

Scannerunit

3 4

Drive belt, Drive wire Rails

5

Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

6

Lens,CCD

7

LED PWB, LED driver PWB

Table glas s, SPF glas s

1)

Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the table glass, and the SPF glass.

2)

Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.

Remove the side door reinforcing plate.

(2)

Remove the side door auxiliary roller.

Scann er u ni t

1)

Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the machine.

2)

Remove the operation panel unit.

3)

Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.

4)

Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.

5)

Remove the scanner unit.


(3)


(5)

Mirror , Refle ctor , Scanner la mp

1)

Remove the table glass.

1)


2)

Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without clearance.

2)

Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

3)

Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.

OK

NG

Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the figure below and fix it. When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.

(6)

(4)

Lens , CCD

1) 2)

Remove the table glass. Remove the dark box, and the cover.

3)

Clean the lens, and the CCD.

Rails

1)


2)

Grease each rail.

Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive wires. If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.


(7)

LED PWB, LED drive r PWB

C. Fusi ng se cti on

1)


2)

Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base plate.

No.

(1)

3)

Contents

1

Fusingunit

2

Thermostat

3

Thermistor

4

FusingPG

5

Lower separation pawl

6 7

Heaterlamp Cleaningfelt

8


9 10

Heatroller Pressure roller

Fus in g u ni t

1)

Remove the right sub cabinet.

1)

Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.

1)

Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure

Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the LED driver PWB.

4)

Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the connector from the LED PWB.

5)

Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB. 



  


1)

(2)

Take out the fusing unit from the left side.

(4)

Remove the fusing PG.

1)

When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.

Therm os tat

1)

Remove the thermostat cover.

1)

Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the thermostat.

(5) 1)

(3) 1)

Fus in g PG

1)

Lowe r separation pawl Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.

Therm is to r Remove the thermistor.








(6)

Heater la mp

(7)

1)

Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp.

1)

Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.

1)

Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates.

Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.

1)

Remove the cleaning felt.

(8) 1)

1)

Cleani ng f elt

1)

Uppe r separation p awl Remove the upper separation pawl.

Remove the heat lamp.


(9) 1)

Heat r ol ler

D. Paper exit se ction

Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as shown in the figure.

No.

1 2

(1)

3

5

Contents

1

Ozonefilter

2

Coolingfan

3


4

Second paper exit unit

Ozon e fi lt er

1)

Remove the rear cabinet.

2)

Remove the ozone filter.

4

1

2

(10) Pressure roller 1)

Remove the High voltage holder.





(2) 1) 2)

Coo li ng fan Remove the harnesses from the power unit.

Remove the pressure roller.



 


2)

(3)

Remove the HV PWB.

1)

Firs t pa per exit u nit Remove the paper holding arm.

B

A

3)

4)

Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the fan duct. 2)

Remove the paper full actuator.

3)

Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.

4)

Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.

Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.


5)

Remove the upper paper exit cover.

9)


10) Remove the right cover bottom and the rig ht cover door.

6)






11) Remove the right front rear stay. 7)

Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.

8)

Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.

12) Remove the screws, and remove the first pa per exit unit.

(3)

(1)

(2)


(4)

13) Remove the paper exit drive unit.


1)

Remove the job separator.

2)


3)

Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.

4)

Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.

14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bearing.

15) Remove the delivery rol ler holder and the shifter PG unit.

外す





16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remo ve the shifter bottom frame unit.






5)

Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit.

E. PWB sectio n No.

(1)

Contents

1

MFPPWB

2

PCUPWB

3

Operation panel PWB

MFP PWB

1)

Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.

6)

Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.

7)

Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears

2)

Remove the screws, and remove the M FPC cover.

8)

Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG.

3)

Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB . Then, remove the MFP PWB.


(2) 1)

(3) 1)

PCU PWB

4)

Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.

5)

Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then, remove the LVDS PWB.

Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PW B. Then, remove the PCU PWB.

Operation p anel PWB Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.

F. Optica l fra me un it se ction No. 1

2)

3)

(1)

Remove the DFFC and the harness.

Contents Optical frame unit

Opti cal fra me uni t

1)

Remove the right cover and the left cover.

2)

Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.

3)

Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.

Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F PWB.


4)

Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.

G. LSU section No. 1

(1)

Remove the paper exit tray.

5)

Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.

6)

Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU unit.

Contents LSUunit

LSU un it

1)

Open the front cover.

2)

Remove the screws fixing the paper exit tray.

3)

4)

Open the tray and remove the left cover.


1

: ‘15/Aug.

H. Tray pape r feed section/P aper transport section No.

(1) 1)

2)

Contents

1

Main drive unit

2

Paper feed clutch

3

PSroller

4

PINsensor

Main d ri ve un it Remove the flywheel.

6)

Remove the temperature humidity sensor.

7)

Remove the harness from the cable saddles.

Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.

3)

Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove the PS clutch.

8)

Remove the connectors.

4)

Remove the lift up motor.

9)

Remove the DUP motor.

5)

Remove the second drive unit. MX-M316N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15

1

: ‘15/Aug.

10) Remove the main drive unit.

(2) 1)

3)

Open the front door and remove the PS knob.

4)

Remove the left E-ring.

5)

Remove the PS roller

Paper fe ed clu tc h Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.



(3) 1)

PS ro ll er Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove the PS clutch.



(4)

2)



PIN sens or

1)

Remove the connector. And remove the harness.

2)

Remove the PS unit.

Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.


3)

Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connector, then, remove the PIN sensor.

I.

Tray pape r feed section/ Paper transport section No. 1

(1)

Contents

2

Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller Tray paper feed drive unit

3

Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

4

Tray transport roller

Tray pick up roller/ Tray pa per fee d roller/ T ray separation roller

1)

Open the tray.

2)

Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and the tray separation roller.

3)

Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.


(2) 1)

Tray pa per fee d drive unit

2)

Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and remove the tray paper feed drive unit.

Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as shown in the figure.





(3) 1)

Tray tra nsport clutch/ Tray pa per fe ed clutch Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then, remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch with caring the locking positions of the clutches.

J. Byp ass tra y se cti on No.

(1) 1)

(4) 1)



Contents

1 2

Bypasstray unit Bypass tray paper feed roller

3


4

Bypass tray paper feed clutch

Byp ass tra y uni t Remove the bypass tray unit.

Tray transpo rt rolle r Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch and the gears.

(2) 1)

Byp ass tra y pa per fee d rolle r Remove the service cover.


2)

(3) 1)

Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed roller.

4)

Remove the separation roller cover.

5)

Remove the separation roller unit.

Byp ass tray se paration roll er Remove the tray arms.





6)

2)

Remove the bypass tray.

(4) 1)

3)

Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.

Byp ass tra y pa per fee d clutc h Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed clutch.

Remove the bypass frame unit.


K. Power se ctio n No.

(1) 1)

2)

Remove the power switch. (1)

Contents

1

High voltage PWB

2

PCUPWB

3

Powerswitch

(2)

High v olt age PWB

(1)

Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the power unit.

L. Developi ng sec tion No.

(1) (2) 1)

PCU PWB Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU PWB.

Contents

1

Developer

2

Toner filter unit

3

DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R

4

DVblade

5

Tonersensor

Develo per

Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer cover.

Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.

(3) 1)

Pow er s wi tc h Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the harnesses inside.


1

: ‘15/Aug. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment r

Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.

eference

0

0 Molt edge reference 0.3

0.3

0.5

0

Projection edge reference

(4)

Molt edge reference

0

0.5


DV bl ade

DV blade attachment reference

1

[Cross-section]

Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner density control reference value setting)

Bump reference

Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe of the process UN may be locked.

(2)

0

0.5

Tone r fi lte r un it

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it. When replacing, clean the guide AS.

0.5

0

Rib reference

(5)

Ton er se ns or

* Clean the sensor only af ter removing used DV when re placing DV. * Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.

(3)

DV side s heet F/ DV side s heet R


(2)

M. Proc ess sectio n

1) No.

(1) 1)

Main ch arger ho lde r uni t Remove the main charger holder unit.

Contents

1

Drumunit

2

Main charger h older unit

3

Cleaning blade

4

Separation pawl unit

Drum uni t Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the drum unit.

 

2)

After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.

3)

After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.

(3) 1)

(4) 1)

Cleanin g bla de Remove the cleaning blade.

Separation pawl unit Remove the separation pawl unit.

 

- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends (5mm) of the OPC drum. - Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.


1 : ‘15/Aug. N. Othe rs

(3) 1)

No.

(1) 1)

Paper em pty s ens or Remove the Desk PE actuator.

Contents

1

Mainmotor

2


3

Paper empty sensor

4

Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)

5

DVcooling duct

6

Liftupmotor

Main m ot or

 

Remove the flywheel.



2)

Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.

 2)

Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main motor.



(4)

(2) 1)

Paper exit fan

1)

Remove the delivery tray right.

2)

Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.

Tray ope n/clos e sensor Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sensor.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)


1 3)

: ‘15/Aug. Remove the right sub cabinet.

7)

Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan. (Only in the North America)

1

4)






5)

6)

(5)

DV cool in g d uc t

1)


2)

Remove the screws fixing the paper exit t ray.

3)


Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.

Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)


4)


5)

Remove the main front cabinet left.

7)

(6)

6)

Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV cooling duct.

Li ft u p m ot or

1)


2)

Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.

Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.


[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. Disa ssembly a nd Ass embly t able Unit

Parts

A. Side door section/Duplex transport section

1

Transfer unit

2

Transfer roller

3


4 B.Scannersection

1 2

D.Paperexitsection


4 5

Rails Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

1 2

Thermostat

3

Thermistor

4

FusingPG

5

Lower separation p awl

6 7

Heaterlamp Cleaning felt

8


9

Heatroller

10

Pressure roller Ozonefilter

2

Cooling fan

3


1

1 2 3

F. Optical frame unitsection G. LSU section H. Tray paper feed section/Paper

1 1

I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport section

Paper feed clutch Separation roller

4

PINsensor

5 1

PSroller Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller

2

Tray paper feed d rive u nit

3 4

Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch Tray transport roller

1

Bypasstrayunit 2

Bypass tray paper feed roller

3


1 2

L.Developingsection

Powerswitch

2

Developer Toner filter unit

4 5 1

DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R DVblade Toner sensor Drumunit

2 3 4 N. Others

Bypass tray paper feed clutch HighvoltagePWB PCUPWB

3 1 3

M.Processsection

Operation panel PWB LSU unit Main drive unit

2 3

4 K.Powersection

Second paper exit unit MFP PWB PCUPWB Optical frame unit

1

transport section

J.Bypasstraysection

Lens,CCD LED PWB, LED driver PWB Fusingunit

4 E. PWB section

Duplex transport part Tableglass,SPFglass Scanner unit

3

6 7 C.Fusingsection

Contents

1

Main charger holder unit Cleaning blade Separation pawl unit Main motor

2


3

Paper empty sensor

4

Paper exit fan

5

DV cooling duct

6

Lift up motor


1

: ‘15/Aug.

2. Disas sembly a nd asse mbly of each unit

 

A. Sid e do or sec ti on /Dup lex tr ans po rt sec ti on (1)

No.

(1)

Content

1

Transfer roller unit

2

Transfer roller

3


4

Duplex transport part

(2) (1)

Transfe r rolle r unit

 

Open the bypass tray and remove the side door. (3)

* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the right door unit.

(3)

(1)

Transfe r disch arge pl ate

Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl. (2)

Remove the transfer roller unit. (2)

(3)

Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer discharge plate.

(3) (1)

(2)

Transf er ro lle r

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.   

(1)

(2) (1)


1

(4)

Duple x tra nspo rt part

B. Scanne r section

Remove the rail inner unit. No.

(1)

Name

1

Table glass, SPF glass

2

Scannerunit

3 4

Drive belt, Drive wire Rails

5

Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

6

Lens,CCD

7

LED PWB, LED driver PWB

Table glas s, SPF glas s

1)

Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the table glass, and the SPF glass.

2)

Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.

Remove the side door reinforcing plate.

(2)

Remove the side door auxiliary roller.

Scann er u ni t

1)

Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the machine.

2)

Remove the operation panel unit.

3)

Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.

4)

Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.

5)

Remove the scanner unit.


(3)


(5)

Mirror , Refle ctor , Scanner la mp

1)


1)


2)

Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without clearance.

2)

Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

3)

Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.

OK

NG

Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the figure below and fix it. When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.

(6)

(4)

Lens , CCD

1) 2)

Remove the table glass. Remove the dark box, and the cover.

3)

Clean the lens, and the CCD.

Rails

1)


2)

Grease each rail.

Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive wires. If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.


(7)

LED PWB, LED drive r PWB

C. Fusi ng se cti on

1)


2)

Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base plate.

No.

(1)

3)

Contents

1

Fusingunit

2

Thermostat

3

Thermistor

4

FusingPG

5


6 7

Heaterlamp Cleaningfelt

8


9 10

Heatroller Pressure roller

Fus in g u ni t

1)


1)

Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.

1)

Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure

Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the LED driver PWB.

4)

Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the connector from the LED PWB.

5)

Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB. 



  


1)

(2)

Take out the fusing unit from the left side.

(4)

Remove the fusing PG.

1)

When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.

Therm os tat

1)

Remove the thermostat cover.

1)

Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the thermostat.

(5) 1)

(3) 1)

Fus in g PG

1)

Lowe r separation pawl Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.

Therm is to r Remove the thermistor.








(6)

Heater la mp

(7)

1)

Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp.

1)

Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.

1)

Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates.

Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.

1)

Remove the cleaning felt.

(8) 1)

1)

Cleani ng f elt

1)

Uppe r separation p awl Remove the upper separation pawl.

Remove the heat lamp.


(9) 1)

Heat r ol ler

D. Paper exit se ction

Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as shown in the figure.

No.

1 2

(1)

3

5

Contents

1

Ozonefilter

2

Coolingfan

3


4


Ozon e fi lt er

1)


2)

Remove the ozone filter.

4

1

2

(10) Pressure roller 1)

Remove the High voltage holder.





(2) 1) 2)

Coo li ng fan Remove the harnesses from the power unit.

Remove the pressure roller.



 


2)

(3)

Remove the HV PWB.

1)

Firs t pa per exit u nit Remove the paper holding arm.

B

A

3)

4)

Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the fan duct. 2)

Remove the paper full actuator.

3)

Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.

4)

Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.

Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.


5)

Remove the upper paper exit cover.

9)


10) Remove the right cover bottom and the rig ht cover door.

6)






11) Remove the right front rear stay. 7)

Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.

8)

Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.

12) Remove the screws, and remove the first pa per exit unit.

(3)

(1)

(2)


(4)

13) Remove the paper exit drive unit.


1)

Remove the job separator.

2)


3)

Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.

4)


14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bearing.

15) Remove the delivery rol ler holder and the shifter PG unit.

外す





16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remo ve the shifter bottom frame unit.






5)

Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit.

E. PWB sectio n No.

(1)

Contents

1

MFPPWB

2

PCUPWB

3

Operation panel PWB

MFP PWB

1)

Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.

6)

Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.

7)

Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears

2)

Remove the screws, and remove the M FPC cover.

8)

Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG.

3)

Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB . Then, remove the MFP PWB.


(2) 1)

(3) 1)

PCU PWB

4)

Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.

5)

Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then, remove the LVDS PWB.

Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PW B. Then, remove the PCU PWB.

Operation p anel PWB Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.

F. Optica l fra me un it se ction No. 1

2)

3)

(1)

Remove the DFFC and the harness.

Contents Optical frame unit

Opti cal fra me uni t

1)

Remove the right cover and the left cover.

2)

Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.

3)

Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.

Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F PWB.


4)

Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.

G. LSU section No. 1

(1)


5)

Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.

6)

Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU unit.

Contents LSUunit

LSU un it

1)


2)

Remove the screws fixing the paper exit tray.

3)

4)



1

: ‘15/Aug.

H. Tray pape r feed section/P aper transport section No.

(1) 1)

2)

Contents

1

Main drive unit

2

Paper feed clutch

3

PSroller

4

PINsensor

Main d ri ve un it Remove the flywheel.

6)

Remove the temperature humidity sensor.

7)

Remove the harness from the cable saddles.

Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.

3)

Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove the PS clutch.

8)

Remove the connectors.

4)

Remove the lift up motor.

9)

Remove the DUP motor.

5)

Remove the second drive unit. MX-M316N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15

1

: ‘15/Aug.

10) Remove the main drive unit.

(2) 1)

3)

Open the front door and remove the PS knob.

4)

Remove the left E-ring.

5)

Remove the PS roller

Paper fe ed clu tc h Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.



(3) 1)

PS ro ll er Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove the PS clutch.



(4)

2)



PIN sens or

1)

Remove the connector. And remove the harness.

2)

Remove the PS unit.

Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.


3)

Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connector, then, remove the PIN sensor.

I.

Tray pape r feed section/ Paper transport section No. 1

(1)

Contents

2

Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller Tray paper feed drive unit

3

Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

4

Tray transport roller

Tray pick up roller/ Tray pa per fee d roller/ T ray separation roller

1)

Open the tray.

2)

Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and the tray separation roller.

3)

Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.


(2) 1)

Tray pa per fee d drive unit

2)

Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and remove the tray paper feed drive unit.

Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as shown in the figure.





(3) 1)

Tray tra nsport clutch/ Tray pa per fe ed clutch Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then, remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch with caring the locking positions of the clutches.

J. Byp ass tra y se cti on No.

(1) 1)

(4) 1)



Contents

1 2

Bypasstray unit Bypass tray paper feed roller

3


4

Bypass tray paper feed clutch

Byp ass tra y uni t Remove the bypass tray unit.

Tray transpo rt rolle r Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch and the gears.

(2) 1)

Byp ass tra y pa per fee d rolle r Remove the service cover.


2)

(3) 1)

Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed roller.

4)

Remove the separation roller cover.

5)

Remove the separation roller unit.

Byp ass tray se paration roll er Remove the tray arms.





6)

2)

Remove the bypass tray.

(4) 1)

3)

Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.

Byp ass tra y pa per fee d clutc h Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed clutch.

Remove the bypass frame unit.


K. Power se ctio n No.

(1) 1)

2)

Remove the power switch. (1)

Contents

1

High voltage PWB

2

PCUPWB

3

Powerswitch

(2)

High v olt age PWB

(1)

Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the power unit.

L. Developi ng sec tion No.

(1) (2) 1)

PCU PWB Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU PWB.

Contents

1

Developer

2

Toner filter unit

3

DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R

4

DVblade

5

Tonersensor

Develo per

Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer cover.

Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.

(3) 1)

Pow er s wi tc h Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the harnesses inside.


1

: ‘15/Aug. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment r

Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.

eference

0

0 Molt edge reference 0.3

0.3

0.5

0


(4)

Molt edge reference

0

0.5


DV bl ade

DV blade attachment reference

1

[Cross-section]

Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner density control reference value setting)

Bump reference

Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe of the process UN may be locked.

(2)

0

0.5

Tone r fi lte r un it

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it. When replacing, clean the guide AS.

0.5

0

Rib reference

(5)

Ton er se ns or

* Clean the sensor only af ter removing used DV when re placing DV. * Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.

(3)

DV side s heet F/ DV side s heet R


(2)

M. Proc ess sectio n

1) No.

(1) 1)

Main c harge r ho lde r un it Remove the main charger holder unit.

Contents

1

Drumunit

2

Main charger holder unit

3

Cleaning blade

4

Separation pawl unit

Drum uni t Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the drum unit.

(3)

Cleanin g bla de

1)

Remove the moquette F/R.

2)

Remove the cleaning blade.

 

2)

After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.

            

3)

After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.

(4) 1)



Separation pawl unit Remove the separation pawl unit.



- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends (5mm) of the OPC drum. - Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.


1 : ‘15/Aug. N. Othe rs

(3) 1)

No.

(1) 1)

Paper em pty s ens or Remove the Desk PE actuator.

Contents

1

Mainmotor

2


3

Paper empty sensor

4

Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)

5

DVcooling duct

6

Liftupmotor

Main m ot or

 

Remove the flywheel.



2)

Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.

 2)

Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main motor.



(4)

(2) 1)

Paper exit fan

1)

Remove the delivery tray right.

2)

Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.

Tray ope n/clos e sensor Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sensor.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)


1 3)

: ‘15/Aug. Remove the right sub cabinet.

7)

Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan. (Only in the North America)

1

4)






5)

6)

(5)

DV cool in g d uc t

1)


2)

Remove the screws fixing the paper exit t ray.

3)


Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.

Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)


4)


5)

Remove the main front cabinet left.

7)

(6)

6)

Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV cooling duct.

Li ft u p m ot or

1)


2)

Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.

Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.


MX-M316N

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

Service Manual

1.Operation panel A.Mec han is m r elat io n d iag ram

LVDS PWB

LCD KEY PWB

USB I/F PWB

B.Operational descriptions The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation. It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB. In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.

MX-M316N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 1

2. RSPF section (31opm) A.Mec han is m r elat io n d iag ram (1)Outline

SCOV

SPFM SPPD2 SRRC 12

3

SPRS

1

SPUC

11 2

13

4

SPPD1

SPPD3 SPPD4

5

SPWS

SOCD 6 10

8

SPLS1 SPLS2

9

7

Signal name

Name

Function/Operation

SCOV

RSPF cover open/close detector

Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.

SOCD

RSPF open/close sensor

SPFM

RSPFtransportmotor

Transportsadocument.

SPPD1

Document transportsensor 1

Detects paper pass.

SPPD2 SPPD3

Document transportsensor 2 Document transportsensor 3

Detects paper pass. Detects paper pass.

SPPD4


Detects paper exit and switchback.

SPRS SPUC

Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (RSPF) Paper feed clutch

Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.) Controls the paper feed roller. (Controls the timing of paper feed.)

SRRC

Registration roller clutch

SPLS1



SPLS2



SPWS

Documentsizedetector

Detectsthedocumentwidth.

Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.


No. 1

Name Transport auxiliary roller

Function/Operation Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the registration roller. Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing.

2

Registration roller (Drive)

3

Registration roller (Idle)

Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the document.

4

Transport roller 3 (Idle)

5

Transport roller 3 (Drive)

Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the document. Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.

6

Transport roller 2 (Idle)

Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to

7


the document. Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.

8

Paper exit roller (Idle)

Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to the document.

9

Paper exit roller ( Drive)

Discharges a d ocument. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the back surface.

10 11

Document reverse gate Document pickup roller

Reverses a document when scanning images on the back surface. Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.

12

Paper feed roller

Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a warp on paper between the registration roller and this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.

13

Separation roller

Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.


B. Operat iona l descript ions (1)

Docum ent siz e detection

(3)

RSPF paper fe ed and trans port opera tions

Size detection on the document tray

a. Paper fee d opera tion

The document width is detected with the RSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the RSPF document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length according to the table below.

The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed clutch.

Document size AB series

Document length sensor

The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.

SPLS1

At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to prevent double-feeding.

A5

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A4 B5R

OFF

OFF ON

A4R 8.5" 13" x B4

OFF OFF

ON ON

OFF ON

A3

Inchseries

SPLS2

B5 11" 8.5" x

ON

ON

ON

ON

17" 11" x

ON

ON

8.5" 14" x

ON

ON

8.5" 13.4" x

ON

ON

8.5" 13.5" x 8.5"x5.5"

ON OFF

ON OFF

11" 8.5" x

OFF

OFF

A4 11" 8.5"R x

OFF ON ON

ON

8.5" 14" x

ON

ON

A3 8.5" 13.4" x

ON ON

b. Sing le face scan ning The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the registration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document scanning section, where images are scanned. Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor. The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller pressure control solenoid.

OFF OFF

8.5" 13" x

17" 11" x

The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to the paper feed roller.

When the read edge of the document passes the scanning s ection, the both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for paper exit. 1)

Document set (Document empty sensor ON)

2)

Paper feed start (1st sheet)

ON ON

ON

ON

RSPF uni t

The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And the paper feed clutch is ON.)

  

3)

Registration operation (1st sheet) (Registration clutch ON)

(2)

(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration clutch, the paper feed clutch i s turned OFF.)

Docu ment s canni ng

The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi. Resolution

Documenttransportspeed

400dpi

186mm/sec

600dpi

124mm/sec

4)

Scanning start (1st sheet)


5)

c. Duple x sc anning

Paper feed start (2nd sheet)

Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed. Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller section and aligning (registration) the document. 6)

Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet) (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration clutch, the paper feed clutch i s turned OFF.)

Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface. To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the document. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed. Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller section and aligning (registration) the document. Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document to the paper exit section and discharge it.

7)

When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge secti on and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).

Scanning start (2nd sheet)

During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scanning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in contact. 8)

Paper exit complete (1st sheet)

1)


2)

Paper feed start (1st sheet) Pick-up roller descending

9)

Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

3)

Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)

4)

Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)

5)

After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is pressed. (Solenoid ON)

6)

After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

11) Pick-up roller lifting up (After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.)


14) Scanning start (Second sheet)

7)

After reversing, registration operation is executed. 15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is pressed.

8)

After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.

16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure is released.

9)

Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)

10) After completion of scanning, the rev erse follower roller is pressed.

11) After stopping the ope ration, reversing is start ed.

12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

13) After turning ON the PS clutc h, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.


3. RSPF section (56opm) A.Mec han is m r elat io n d iag ram (1)Paper feed section

SPPD2

SPM SCOV

SPPD1

2

1

SPED

3

SPLS1 SPLS2

No.

Name

Function/Operation

1

Pick-up roller

Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.

2

Paper feed roller

Performs the paper feed operation of documents.

3

Separation roller

Signal name

Separate a document to prevent against double-feed. Name

Function/Operation

SCOV SPED

Upper cover open/close sensor Documentsensor

Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover DetectsdocumentemptyintheRSPFpaperfeedtray.

SPLS1

Papersize detector 1

Detectsthe documentlength in the RSPF paper feed tray

SPLS2

Papersize detector 2

SPM

RSPFpaperfeedmotor

SPPD1

RSPF paper pass s ensor 1

SPPD2

RSPFpaperpasssensor2

Detectsthe documentlength in the RSPF paper feed tray Feedsadocument Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed Detectspaperpass


(2)Transport section

SRRC SPFM SPPD3

SPRS

1 2 SOCD SPPD5

4 3

No. 1

Name Registration roller (Drive)

Function/Operation Transports a document to the transport roller 2. Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing

2


Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller

3 4

Transport roller 2 (Drive) Paper exit roller (Drive)

Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the back surface

Signal name

Name

SOCD

RSPFopen/closesensor

SPFM SPPD3

RSPFtransportmotor Documenttransportsensor3

Function/Operation Detectsopen/closeoftheRSPFunit Transportsadocument Detectspaperpass

SPPD4

Document transportsensor 5

SPRS

Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid

Detectspaper exit and switchback Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller

SRRC

Registration roller clutch

Controls the registration roller (Controls the timing of document transport)

B. Operational descriptions

Document length sensor

Document size

(1)Document size detection

AB series

Size detection on the document tray

When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray, the

SPLS2

OFF OFF

OFF OFF

A5 B5 11" 8.5" x

The document width is detected by the document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.

SPLS1

OFF OFF

B5R

ON

OFF

A4R 8.5" 13" x

ON

OFF

ON

B4

maximum size is detected.

A3 17" 11" x Inchseries

OFF

A4

OFF

ON ON

ON

ON ON

ON ON

8.5"x5.5"

OFF

OFF

11" 8.5" x

OFF

OFF

A4 11" 8.5"R x 8.5" 13" x 8.5" 14" x

OFF ON

A3 17" 11" x


OFF OFF

ON ON

ON ON ON

ON

ON ON

(Registration clutch ON) (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration clutch, the paper feed clutch i s turned OFF.)

  

(2)

Scanning start (1st sheet)

5)

Paper feed start (2nd sheet)

6)

Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)

Docu ment s canni ng

The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.

(3)

4)

Resolution 400dpi

Documenttransportspeed 279mm/sec

600dpi

186mm/sec

RSPF paper fe ed and trans port opera tions

a. Paper fe ed ope rati on The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed clutch.

(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration clutch, the paper feed clutch i s turned OFF.)

The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to the paper feed roller. The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section. At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to prevent double-feeding. b. Sing le face scanning The lead edge of the fed document is aligned ( registration) by the registration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document scanning section, where images are scanned. Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.

7)

Scanning start (2nd sheet)

8)

Paper exit complete (1st sheet)

9)

Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor. The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller pressure control solenoid. When the read edge of the document passes the scanning s ection, the both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for paper exit. 1)


2)

Paper feed start (1st sheet) The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And the paper feed clutch is ON.)

3)

Registration operation (1st sheet)


10)Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

4)

Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)

5)

After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is pressed. (Solenoid ON)

6)

After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

7)

After reversing, registration operation is executed.

8)

After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.

9)

Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)

11) Pick-up roller lifting up (After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.)

c. Duple x sca nnin g Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed. Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller section and aligning (registration) the document. Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface. To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the document. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed. Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller section and aligning (registration) the document. Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document to the paper exit section and discharge it. When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge s ection and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle). During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scanning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in contact. 1)


2)

Paper feed start (1st sheet) Pick-up roller descending 10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is pressed.

3)

Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)


11)After stopping the operation, reversing is s tarted.

12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

13) After turning ON the PS clutc h, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.

14) Scanning start (Second sheet)

15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is pressed.

16) After discharge (First shee t), the reverse follo wer roller pressur e is released.


4.Scanne r sectio n A.Mec han is m r elat io n d iag ram

MHPOS

5

7 4

MIRM

6

2 3

7 6

1

Signal name MHPOS MIRM No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Name Scanner home position sensor Scanmotor

Name CCDPWB ScannerlampdrivePWB Lens 1stmirror 2nd mirror Light guidebar LEDPWB

Function/Operation Detects the scanner home position. Drivesthescannerunit.(scan,returnoperations) Function/Operation ScansdocumentimagesandperformsA/Dconversionofthescanningsignal. Drivesthescannerlamp Reducesadocumentimage(light)andprojectittotheCCD. Leadsadocumentimagetothelens. Converges thescanner lamplights andradiates ontothedocument. Generatesthescannerlamplights.


B.Operational descriptions (1)General This section performs the following operations. 1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be converted into analog image signals. 2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals by the A/D converter. 3) The digital image signals are sent to the SC Ncnt PWB for imag e processing.

(2)Detailed descriptions a. Optical section drive The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted from the scanner motor (MIRM) through the belt to the drive pulley/ wire, and the copy lamp unit and the mi rror base which are attached to the wire are driven. The scanner motor (MIRM) is controlled with the signals sent from the MCU PWB.

b. Scanner lamp drive

R

The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is generated by the LED drive PWB with the control signals sent from the SCNcnt PWB.

G B

(Image data for 1 line)

c. Image scan and col or separation Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be converted into analog image signals.

R

G

B

The color components are extracted into R, G, B by the three kinds of CCD elements (R, G, B).

Red component image data

Green component image data

Blue component image data

The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD extracts the green component, the blue CCD extracts the blue component. This operation is called color separation.

d. Image signal A/D conversion 1)

The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the four kinds of elements ( R, G, B). The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction. Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner motor. The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected to the CCD. The scan resolution is 600 dpi.

The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter. Each color pixel has 10bit information.

2)

The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image process section.

CCD PWB Analog IC CCD R G B

R,G,B Color filter

AFE ADC

LVDS

Buffer Timing Generator CCD Elements

e. Zooming operation 3LINES CCD UNIT

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction. Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but performed by the image process technology (software).


5. Manua l pa per fee d se ction A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

MPFC

MPED 1 2

Signal name

Name

Function and operation Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections.

MM

Main motor

MPED MPFC

Paper empty detector (Manual paper feed tray) Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray)

No.

Detects paper empty. (Manual paper feed tray) Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF.

Name


1

Paper feed roller

Feeds paper to the paper transport section.

2

Separation roller

Apply the pressure to the paper feed roller in reverse direction and prevents the paper from feeding it in layered condition.

B. Operat iona l descript ions Only the top sheet of paper is fed from the paper stack on the manual bypass tray, the feed roller is pressed against the paper surface and sent to the transport section. The feed roller transports paper to registration section. Against the paper, by applying a force in the direction opposite to the feed roller from below, separation rollers are prevented double feeding of the paper. On / OFF control of the feed roller is carried out by the Manual Feed Clutch This model does not have an automatic paper size detection function in Multi-purpose tr ay.


6. Paper registra tion section A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

RRC

MPWD 2

PIN

1

Signal name

Name


MM

Mainmotor

MPWD

Paper width detection sensor

Detectsthe width of the paper.

PIN

P-INsensor

Detectstheentranceofthepaperinfrontoftheregistrationroller.

No.

Name


1

Resist roller (Drive)

The Resist Roller (Drive) synchronizes the paper timing to the image on the Transfer Belt. A buckle is created to eliminate any skew in the pap er. The paper is then driven to the Transfer section where the image is correctly timed for transfer onto the paper.

2

Resist roller (Idle)

The Resist Roller (Idle) puts pressure on the back side of the paper allowing the Drive roller to move the paper to the transfer section after proper buckle timing ha s occurred.

B. Operat iona l descrip tion The resist roller set controls the synchronization of the Image on the Transfer Belt to the Timing of the paper making its way to the Primary and Secondary Transfer section. Start stop movement is controlled by the PS Clutch. Drive for the Registration roller comes from Main motor.


7. Paper fe ed tra y section A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

C1PUC C1LUD C1PED

C1LUM

2 3 1

Signal name MM

Name


Mainmotor

C1LUD C1LUM C1PUC C1PED

Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector

Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.

Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) paper Driveson thethe lifttop plate of the the paper d tray 1, and maintain s thepaper contact pres sure between and paper fee pickup roller to provide stable feed power. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector

No.

Controls ON/OFF of the rollers (the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, the paper transport roller 2) in the paper feed tray 1 section. Detects paper empty in the paper feed tray 1.

Name


1

Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1)

Picks up paper on the top and feeds it to the paper feed roller.

2

Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1)

Feeds paper to the paper transport section.

3

Paper separation roller (Paper feed tray 1)

Separates paper to prevent double-feed.

B. Paper lifting ope ration

D. Paper fe ed ope ration

Set paper in the paper feed tray and insert the paper feed tray into the machine. The lift plate lifts up.

The paper feed motor (CPFM) is turned ON, and then the paper feed clutch (CPUC1) is turned ON.

Paper is lifted by the lift motor (CLUM).

The power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted through the paper feed clutch (CPUC1) to the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.

When the paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector (CLUD1) detects the top of paper, the lift motor (CLUM) stops and the contact pressure between paper on the top and the paper pickup roller becomes the proper level when paper is picked up. When the paper remaining quantity is decreased, the lift plate lifts up in each case to maintain the contact pressure between paper on the

The paper pickup roller descends to pick up paper on the top and feed it to the paper feed roller. The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent double-feed.

top andup.the paper pickup roller at the proper level when paper is picked

C. Paper siz e detection opera tion This model does not have a function to detect the paper size in the cassette. The paper size in the cassette is changed on operation panel.


8. Paper exit secti on A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

POM

OSM

POGS 5 SHPOS FUFM 1 POD1

3 2 4

Signal name FUFM

Name Paper exit cooling fan

Function and operation Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.

OSM

Offsetmotor

Offsets(shifts)paper.

POD1 POM

Paper exit detector 1 Paperexitmotor

Detects paper transport from the fusing section. Drivestherollerinthepaperexitsection.

SHPOS

Shifter home positions sensor

No. 1

Detects the shifter home position.

Name Paper exit roller (drive)

Function and operation To exit paper onto the exit tray and perform switch back operations when in duplex mode. To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to a paper. Transport the paper from the fusing unit to the paper exit unit.

2

Paper exit roller (idle)

3

Fusing rear roller (drive)

4

Fusing rear roller (idle)

To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to a paper.

5

Discharge Brush2

To discharge static generated in the paper exit section.

B. Paper exit ope rat ion The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller to paper exit roller, and then discharged to the inner tray. When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is transported to paper exit roller, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then the paper is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit roller to the right tray.


9. Dup lex sect io n A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

ADUM

1

2

Signal name ADUM No. 1 2

Name Duplex motor

Function and operation Drives the rear fusing roller and the paper exit roller with the duplex model.

Name


Paper feed roller (Idle)

Applies pressure to the back of the paper for drive to the Lower Duplex Transport Rollers

Paper feed roller (Drive)

Drive Roller in upper Duplex section that transports paper to the Lower transport rollers in the Duplex Section.

B. Operat iona l descrip tion The switched back paper which comes from paper exit section goes to ADU section. The paper feed rollers are driven by the duplex motor transporting the paper to the registration section


10. OPC drum se ction A.

Mechan is m relat io n d iag ram

MM

8

5

2 2 3 6 1

7 4

Signal name MM No. 1

Name Main motor Name

Function/Operation Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections.

OPCdrum

Function/Operation Formselectrostaticlatentimagesbylaserbeams.

2

Drum separation pawl

Separates paper from the drum.

3

Sub blade (Cleaning seal)

Prevents against toner leakage from the cleaner section.

4

Screen grid

Helps to charge the OPC drum evenly with electric charges provided from the main charger.

5 6

Saw-teeth charger Waste toner transport screw

Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum. Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.

7

Cleaning blade

Cleansremaining toner on the OPC drum.

8

Waste toner transport pipe

Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section.


B.

Operatio nal descrip tio ns

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger, then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images. 1)

3)

After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the cleaning blade.

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.

Main corona unit

High voltage unit

Screen grid

CTL

Residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the waste toner box section in the toner cartridge by the waste toner transport screw.

CGL Aluminum layer

OPC drum

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually s ame as the voltage applied to the screen grid. 2)

4)

The whole surface of the OPC drum is d ischarged. Laser beam

LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser unit to form latent electrostatic images.

CLT CGL layer Aluminum

Laser beam

CLT CGL layer Aluminum

After completion of the job, laser beams are radiated onto al the surface of the OPC drum. When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC drum, positive and negative charges are generated. OPC drum

Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative

OPC drum CTL CGL layer Aluminum

charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.

When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative and positive charges are generated.

Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC drum.

Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum. Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage. Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC drum surface.


11. Toner supply section A.Mec han is m r elat io n d iag ram

TNM

Signal name TNM

Name Tonermotor

Function and operation Drivesthetonercartridge.

B.Operational descriptions The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the toner motor to supply toner to the developing unit. The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF by the toner m otor. The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the toner motor is turned ON to supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing unit. When the toner density reaches the specified level, the toner motor turns OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit. With the above process, the toner density in the developing unit is maintained at a fixed level.


12. Developing se ction A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

3

TCS 2 2

1

Signal name MM TCS No. 1

Name Main motor Tonersensor

Function and operation Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections. Detectsthetonerdensityinthedevelopingunit.

Name Developing roller

Function and operation Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.

2

Stirring roller

Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.

3

Tonerfilter

Preventstonersplashandvacuum.


B. Developing ope rat ions Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum surface by the laser (writing) unit (laser image beams) are converted into visible images by toner. layer Aluminum

CGL CTL

Drum

-400V

Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller. When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical friction. The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing roller. Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on the OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure. On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where exposure is not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attached.


1

: ‘15/Aug.

13. Transfer se ction A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

5 4 3



 5

4 3

2

1

3

Signal name MM

Name

No.

Function and operation Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section an d the scanner sections.

Mainmotor

Name


1

Transferroller

TransferstonerimagesfromtheOPCdrumsurfacetopaper.

2

Dischargeplate

3

TRbearing(F/R)

4

Transferrollercollar

Transferrollercollar

5

TRgear

Transferrollerdrivegear

Apply the negative voltage to the paper which the positive voltage is applied to and discharge the paper. Transferrollerbearing


B. Tran sfe r opera tion The toner image on the photo conductor is transferred to the paper by applying the positive high v oltage to the transfer roller.

   

 

 

   

 

C. Cleaning opera tion The unnecessary toner on the transfer roller is moved to the photo conductor by changing the polar character of the transfer roller to the negative high voltage type. Then, the unnecessary toner is transported to the waste toner section by the cleaning blade of the photo conductor.    

 

 

   

 


14. Fusing section A. Mech ani sm rel ati on di agr am

MM

TH_MY

TH_US

2

TS_UM 1 2 TS_UM

3

2

HL_PR HLout

Signal name

2

3

Name


MM

Main motor

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections.

HL_PR HLout

Heater lamp control relay Heaterlamp

Turns ON/OFF the control of the heater relay. TurnsON/OFFtheheaterlamp.

TH_MY

Thermistor UM

Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at the end of the Heat Roller.

TH_US

Thermistor US

Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at center of the Heat Roller.

TS_UM

ThermostatUM

Fusing roller overheat protection. Cuts off power supply to heat lamp when over heat condition is determined.

No. 1

Name Heatroller

2


3

Pressureroller

4


Function and operation Appliesheatand pressure to toneron paper to fuse it on paper. Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating). Pressestoneronpapertofuse. Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating).

B. Fusin g un it d rive

C. Heater la mp drive

The driving of fuser unit is; the driving force is transported to fuser roller, thru the Main motor (MM) and connection gears, based on the controlling signal from PCU.

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.





The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and heating the heat roller. To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, the thermostat is provided for safety. When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the heater lamp is cut off.


D. Fus ing ope rat ion Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat roller.

Heat Roller

Pressure Roller

The heater lamp is in the heat r oller, which heats the heat roller to fuse toner onto paper. The pressure roller is made of silicon rubber because of the following reasons and purpose. 1)

Paper is separated. (Since the heat roller is of higher hardness, the pressure roller is deformed to separate paper toward the heat roller.)

2)

The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for paper.

3)

By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without deformation.

E. Fus ing te mpe rat ure co ntrol The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the heat roller. The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at the specified level.


1

: ‘15/Aug.

15.Fan and Filt er secti on The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit. Signal name

Name


OZFM

Ozone fan

Cools the developing unit generates the ozone from the main charger unit.

PSFM LSUFM

Power supply unit cooling fan LSUcoolingfan

Cools the power supply unit. CoolstheLSUandtheDevelopingunit

FUFM

Paper exit cooling fan

Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.

The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section. No. 1

1

2*1

Name


Ozone filter

Absorbsozone generated in the image processsection.

Exhaust Ozone filter

Take in an odor to exhaust.

*1:Destination North America and Mexico only

FUFM(TFM)

LSUFM PSFM

2 OZFM

1


MX-M316N

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION

Service Manual

1. Block diagram A. Sy st em b lo ck di agr am

C N P

      

D C O S

              

D E P S

1 D P P S

S P M T S

2 D P P S

3 D P P S

1 S L P S

2 S L P S

N C S _ H

      

W          

        

C R P S

h tciw S

              

                   

V O C S

r io d u A

4 D P P S

C O

B W P V R D F P S R

D E -L S R O

ti n U el

P D S R

B W P S D V L

n a P n o it a re p O

O

 

  

it n U )1 X (x A F

       

       

it n U )1 X (x A F

      

) B

     

B

0 G 5 (2

P W D L

it n U

D D H

      

M P

M F U S L

U S L

IN C A        

B W P N C S

S W P S

B W P c P F M it n U

C F P S

S R P S

M F P S

F P S R

M U P S

B W P D C C

ti n U er n n a c S

 

B W P V R D

B W P D E L

D E L

M IR M

er h isn i F re n In

      

S P H

M

V 0 0 2 

it n U

B W P U C P

M F S P

A R _ D U H

C R R

S P S P

A R _ H T

S C T

M U R C

M N T

t n u o C _ M T

M U D A

ti U n 1 y re v ir e D

      

ti n U y re v ir e D t h g i R

D 1 O P

S O P H S

1 S G O P

M O P

M S O

1 D F T

B W -P V H

M F Z O

S S 1 C

M M

it n U ts 1 ed e F re p a P

C U P 1 C

D U L 1 C

y l p p

1 D P P

            

) A ( B W P S C

M U L 1 C

      D E P  1  C   

1 S C _ H W

                  

ti n U d n 2 d ee F re p a P

R _ W S D

C F P M

D S O P

it n U r e p a P l a u n a

1 M F U F

1 P O T M

) B ( B W P S C

2 P O T M

      

D W P M

D E P M

ti n U d r3 d ee F re p a P

3 D F T

3 D O P

    

       

ti n U 2 ry e v rie D

2 D O P

2 D F T

C O P _ W S D

M F P C

S S 2 C

C U P 2 C

D F P 2 C

D U L 2 C

S S 3 C

C U P 3 C

D F P 3 C

D U L 3 C

S S 4 C

C U P 4 C

D F P 4 C

D U L 4 C

M U L 2 C

D E P 2 C

     2  C  _  W S  D   

M U L 3 C

D E P 3 C

2 C R T P

2 S C _ H W

1 C R T P

     3  C _   W  S  D   

3 S C _ H W

1 D L P M ) A ( B W P S C

M

2 S G D P

it n U re s u F

M U _ H T

S U _ H T

u S re w o P

B W P H W

er d n e V n i o C

      

r o cta e R

M U _ L H

S U _ L H       

ti n U h t 4 d ee F re p a P

M U L 4 C

D E P 4 C

1 C R T P

     4  C _   W  S  D   

MX-M316N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

4 S C _ H W

ch it w S H W

h tc iS w in a M

IN C A

B. PCU PWB

B W P P F

r e d in n o e C V

B W P H W

N U U S L r o t o M N A F U S L

l o tr n o

it n U V H

2 1 N C 7 4 N C

6 4 N C

5 N C

8 4 N C

5 4 N C

4 N C

0 1 N C

6 1 N C

g Lo / g u b e D

6 N C

r e itr W

r os n es r ev o C t u oP; C OP_ WS D

C

M s O ti R b M sh 16 a l F

D L P C

t) e k c o s M IM D in p 2 (7

) 51.. 0( s uB at aD

IC P 7 3 N

r os n eSll uF y ar T T U OP dn2; 2 DFT

C

te s e R

1 5 N

m a r g a i D g in t c e n n o C U P C -E A V O N

s il ta e d re o m r o f s m ra g ia d ti u c ri C h e t e e S ** *

2 r o s n e S n o tii s o P

d e fe i lt u M

d e fe i lt u M

y a tr

1 P O T M

2 3 N C 6 3 N

C

r so n e S n o tii s o P

y a tr

2 P O T M

r so n e S P H r e tf i h S ; S O P H S

r o s n e S t u o P ; 1 D O P

r so n e S ll u F y ra T ; 1 D F T

M n a F g in l o o C N rU e s u F ; M F U F

8 3 N

C

r o t o

r to o -M r e fti h S ; M S O

(A B W P y la e R S C

ti n U d e e F r e p a P l a u n a M

1 r o s n e S th g n e L r e p a P T F M ; 1 D L P M

lo a n A r o s n e S th d i W r e

r so n se r o y t s p n e mS E s y s a a tr rP r e e p p a a a P P P T it U F u l A D M M; ; 1 D D WE D P P P P MMA

M U R C ty i id

7 2 N C

3 4 N

C

M s A it R b S M 1

5 3 N C

r e itr W IC P

1 N C

F O P

d IC e d S n A a O p x I/ E

IC t se e R

l) a n o it r os n es t u oP p O t hg i R; 3 D OP ti n U 2d i on el oS et a G ti x t u oP; 2S GOP e r e p a r os n eSll uF y ar T p t u oP t h g i R; 3 DFT t h g i R

) A e p y T( it n U te t e s s a C

2 r h to r tc c r r lu e c o to h t to e c y tc c tc r rto D te t e e lu to sp t p t d e n e C o a e D m e D M tr E D e p l F r r p a r o e p tte U U U e k t ic e o rt p D p ft s ic if e a ; a P iL a P L v P ; 2 ; ; C ; ; sk e D C D D ; C M :D F _ E U S U U 2 P L S P L P W C 2 S 2 2 2 2 2 TR C D C CC C CP

) 02.. 0(s uB ss er ddA 3 7 U 3 P 2 C / S 8 H

3 N C

r os n es t u oP dn2; 2 D OP

4 1 N

s u B C I2

B W P U C P

4 N C

LD P C

M re n o T

C

M s O ti R b P k E 4 E 6

r to o M t u p t u O r e p a P ; M O P

1 d i o n le o S te a G t u o P ; 1 S G O P

r o t c e t e D ss a P g n i h c it w S T U O P ; D S O P

3 3 N

C

r te is ) m r g e lo Th a r n A e s u 2 F x ; ( S U _ H T/ M U _ TH

d i o n le o S te ra a P e S r e p a P ; S P S P

2 2 N

C

r o t o M n a F n o z O ; M F Z O

9 4 N

C

r e t n u o C M T

W S k c o Lr e t In

0 5 N

C

r to o M x e l p u D to u A ; M U D A

3 5 N

C

h c t lu

C p U k ic P 1 e tt sse a C ; C U P 1 C

C

r so n e S h tc lu C r e ll o R sti s e R ; C R R

r to o M p U fti L M LU 1 C

t c e t e D ss

a rP e p a P ; 1 D P P

r o s n e S l tro n o C r e n To ; S C T

t iU n e tt e s s a C in a M

r r to to c y c t te p e t e e D m E D te e r p U e p a ift ss P a ; L; C ; D D S E S P LU 1 1 1 C CC


r to o -M N I A M ; M M

r o t o

2 5 N

8 N C

B W P t n C N A C S

ly p p u rS e w o P

C

9 N C

4 5 N C

r to o M n a F g n li o o C N U y l p p u rS e w o P ; M F S P

B W -P D L

M r e w o P

r e h is in F r e n n I

r to o -M n o g ly o P

m u H r / p o s mn e Te S

h tc lu C p U k c i P y ra t d e e f ti l u M ; C F P M

) B r to e o p y T( M d ti e e n F U r e p a P te t e s a C ;

r to c e t e D d e e F r e p a P

r to c e t e D r o o D ; ; 3 C D _ F S P 3 W C D

B W P y la e R S C

ty p m E r e p a P ; D E P 3 C

r o t c e t e D p U tf iL ; D U L 3 C

r to c e t e D te t e s a C ; S S 3 C

h tc lu C p U k ic P ;

1 h c t lu c

r rt o to p s o n Ma tr l p a U c t rti ifL e v ; k s

C Me U U :D P L 1 3 3 TRC C CP

M F P C ) A e p y T( it n U

) (A B W P y a l e R S C

r o t c e t e D d e e F r e p a P

r to c te e D r o o D ; ; 4 D C F _ P W 4 S C D

r r o to t y t c c p te te me e E D D r p te e t p U e a ft s P Li a ; ; C D D ; E S P LU S 4 4 4 CC C

h tc lu C p U k ic P ; C U P 4 C

r to o M p U tf iL ; M LU 4 C

2. Powe r li ne dia gra m A.A C po wer li ne d iag ram (1)

100V


(2)

120V


(3)

200V


3. Ac tu al wi rin g ch art A. LSU s ect io n

B W P D L

F E D C R N C V G V

1 2 1 3 8 9 4 7 5 6 P J D H H R WS

2 S V 2 1 R D H P

M P

M F U S L

) P K M LC T K R (A YL C A D 5 T N V - OO 3 P /L /S G 42 7 1 2 9 1 23 4 5 -2 2

-2 S V 2 -1 R D H P

B W P C P F M

B S S D H P B 0 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 B

R R E P N D D B /H D D _ _ D N B N E S N L T T N G n n n G n D D G

-5 8 2 2 9 7 1

) ) ) C C D H H C N R WS N ( ( N (

2 5 1 2 3 4 5 9 6 8 7 10 11 21 B S N S C D N N N DN P MD D D D D _ N_ 1 1 N N N N H N _ _ C 1 1 R D D G G GG P G - N N H G - R L L - - - D Y E S DE _ _ D D D D B S D _ D S S 2 H _ _ L D L L _ D V V D 1 L D B D D L D D L

B L

C N Y S H _ C C D N N B

D N -G D

T IN _ IC P _ Q E R N

N _ O R T N I _ U P M

C I P _ T S R N

N _ T S T N I R P _ U P M

C P F M _ F O P N

N O N _ O N P A P L V O C I WP

N A L _ 2 1 X A F _ U W N

IC P _ D X R

X R _ F I S _ U P M

C I P _ D X T

X T _ F I S _ U P M

C I P _ R L C N

3 8 1 3 2 2 2 3 9 6 7 5T 1 1 D U D _ O L 2 9 2 FM N FM PU G U MS S AL L 3 8 2 3 1 2 2 9 7 1

K L C _ IF S _ U P M

C I P _ Q E R N

T S R _ IF S _ U P M

M W P V S R _ C G P IC P

U C P _ S T C n

U C P _ D X R

U C P _ S T R n

U C P _ D X T

U C P _ S E R n

6 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 987654321 N2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C

D N -G D

D N -G D

T B Z M F 8 2

-2 S V 0 1 R D H P

B W P U C P

0 T 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 82 B N Z C T )C U U U U U D D M K C C C C D T N C N C T N X C D C D C I I I I I F x x L _ S _ P N O A P N N N N IN C C C C C N N 8 P T F P T P C P R G P F _ R _ C Y G O P P P P _ P G G _ _ _ _ S M_ P _ D _ D F R _ _ P - S - IC R S T F F QF ( _ _ _ _ _ D D 2 I U D H _ D B

P _ Q E R n

T E N _ N V X A C WR N I R I F I n O L P _ n R P P U _ n P U M P M

I X S L I E I MS D S D S T x T x E S T _ C S R S _ _ WC R R T R U n U n _ U U P n P P P P M M M M

2 14 2 1 N C A D V D N 5 T _ D -G N L D I


0 6 5 8 3 7 9 1 K L C _ M P /

D D D V C C L _ N 4 N N _ MG 2 MP / D /P

-S V 3 -0 P A P B S S D H -P B 0 1 B

5 5 1 2 3 1 K N S C A T D D P U N L _ O G B M 3 M F F U 0 U S B S L

L

C. Scanner , RSPF se ction

F B W P e D oed doth EHS an_ .) ca_ L-G ED C. ED

R B W P e D oedn doth EHS a_ .) ca_ L-G ED C. ED

B N 3 L ( L -1 0 NM1 2 3 CS

B N 3 L ( L -1 0 NM1 2 3 CS

-S V 3 0 R H G

-S V 3 -0 R H G

-6 R H P

B W ) ) 2 1 P L L E E S S _ _ D NP DD C NNNNNN CC CC I I I I I I N C _ V C I N I CC _ T _ _ _ _ _ _ N N N N N I I I _ _ CDN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN O_D I_D LKC _SC SEE DN 3V3. 3V3. 3V3. 3V3. 3V3. 3V3. DN _5V _5V _5V DN 10V 10V DN NX0 PX0 DN NX1 PX1 DN NX2 PX2 DN XSY XSY DN NX3 PX3 DN NX4 PX4 D(CN D(CN DN 5-S0.

G G GGGGGG GGS S S C RG + + + + + + G+ + + G+ + GT T GT T GT T GT T GT T GT T GGG S 0 5 -2 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 4 N 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 H C F

S P H M

IM M

-1 A S PDV 5 L HN5 7 MG + 1 2 G L 3 2 1 P H V 3 R H E

A B X B AX _ _ _ _ -B T IM IM IM IM 4 M M MM M -S H P 1 2 3 4 -B 4 B 4 R H P

-3 R H P V 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 S N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 .5 C -0 S 2 1 D 0 D D D D D D D D D S O IO K S D D V V V V V V D V V V D V V D N P D N P D N P D N P D N P D N P L L L 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 0 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ A NNNNNNNN NCDD CC . . . . . . NA A A N1 1 NAA NB B NCCNK K NDDNE E E EN 5 _ DN 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 GGGGGGGG G_ S S GA A GT T GT T GT T GL L GT T GT T S SG 4 S E CGA A A A AA G G_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ F CC _ _ T EE H NN NN NN T T N NNDD N _ F F E A C F _ _ F CC CC CC _ N NA CC CCCC S N CC C_ A A E CC N R _ C N C

B W P T N C N F C P S D D V O V RS_ V

V V DD S S 4 V 4 V 2 V 3 . 3 . NN2 5 2 5 1 5 3 3 NN D GG+ + + + + + + + GG H -P

5 B 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 -1 2 N1 1 1 1 C B

1 D P P S _ N C

2 D P P S _ N C

A B A X B X 1 A _ _ _ _ OA XB MMMMM_ _ _ F F F F F M MM P P P P P P PP S S S S S S SS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ NNNN NNNN CCCC CCCC

B X 1 _ OS MMR P P P S S S _ _ _ NNN CCC

S P C MR T R S S _ _ NN CC

S R R S _ N C

S A _ WL P E S S _ _ NN CC

B _ L E S _ N C

C _ L E S _ N C

T U O _ L E S _ N C

4 D P P S _ N C

0 -1 1 2 3 N C S DV 5 P N+ HG M

-S -K H P B 3 B

-S K H P B 6 S

B W P V R D D E L

1 2 e dD oN nG a _ D E L

3 / e d o th a c _ D E L

4 5 6 / e eD d dN o o n th a aGc _ _ D E D E L L F F /O N O N I N I _ _ _ P D B V V MD 4 4 A NN P 2 2 L GG A 5 -0 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 5 5

4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 N 2 C B

1 D E L _ E IZ S n V 4 _ 2 N + C

2 D E L _ E IZ S n _ D NN CG D N -G F 4 T 1 -2 A R S

-6 R H P F 8 7 N1 2 3 4 5 B C P C 5 0 D D N D D -7 P P ONN V V _ GG 9 5 4 4 L 5 2 2 C + +

C N P _ U A _ N C

Y P O C _ U A _ N C

A C _ U A _ N C

Y D A E R _ U A _ N C

D U C A L T _ _ OU U A CA V V _ _ V D4 _ N5 N2 NN4 2 C+ G+ CC+

7 -1 1 2 3 4 N C V WV 5 D NS 4 2 + G C + /O

-a C N P n _ U A _ D -S NN K C G -H -P

6 B 1 1 2 3 3 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 1 N C B ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 3 CCCCCCCCCCC 1 N ( (N (N N ( (N (N N ( (N (N N ( (N R H P

R O IT D U A


W S D N V C 5 /O G -3 9 8 4 5 1 2 3 7 1 -3 8 2 2 9 7 1

4 R H P 7 -S N 1 2 3 4 -K C H P B A B AB 4 X _ _ X _ IM IM _ B IM M M IM M M

2 O3 DD MD EC F P P P PO S S ) SS _ _ CV _ _ S NN 5 NN S C C (N + C C D H -P

B W P D E L S R O

W S C O

) N IO T P O (

-S 5 6 -K H P 2 B D 6 E L B _ E Z I S n _ N C

1 D E L _ E Z I S n _ N C

CC P P F F T MM B _ _ -T DD S X X H RT G B 6 0 12345 6 -2 N M C B ) ) ) ) ) ) CCCCCC (N (N (N (N (N (N D X R _ V DU .3 N P 3 GC

D X T _ U P C

D. Drive, Ma nual feed, DV , Tray 1 sectio n, FAN it n u y a r t d e fe r e p a lp a u n a M

1 P O T M 2 0 5 2 2 9 2

2 P O T M

1 2 - 2 P D 0 P D ON 5ON T G 2T G 2 M / D 9M / D 2 1 2

1 D L P M

-3 0 3 1 1 2 DD 9 L 2 P N P G MM / D A

1 2 -2 8 2 2 9 7 1

-3 0 3 1 2 D 9 D 2 E N P P G M /M D A

-S K DD H P WN - V B .3 P G 3 3 MD S

V 5 _ D L P M

1 2 3 -2 8 2 2 9 7 1

D W P M

1 2 3 -3 8 2 2 9 7 1

D E P M V 5 _ D E P M

1 2 3 -3 R H P

1 2

3 4

1 P D ON T G M / D

2 P D ON T G M / D

1 2

3 4

S V 6 -0 P A /P F V 6 -0 R L A P

1 2 3

4 5 6

V 5 1 D_ DN 1 L P -G D L M / DP M

DD V N .3 W 3 P -G MD

1 2 3

4 5 6

C F P M

R H Z /C -S Z T P 6 0 U /B S V 6 -0 R H Z C

ti n u S P ) C ) C ) C N ( N ( N (

1 D P N OG T D /M

B W P U C P

-S 1 4 -K H P 2 D -B P N 4 OG B T D /M

3 2 1

V 5 DD_ E ND P GE /M D P M

V 5 1 D_ DN 1 P D P -G P A / DP A

1 2 3

4 5 6

-S -K H -P 1 2 3 4 B 4 B

) N S 2 3 )( F L )( D ( HT L E C P S V 4 V RD2 T  P 4 3 2 0 U B

R M S / V C4 2 N V 2 0 P M1 S

) IN P ( 1 D P P

H 4 0 R N H P 4 1

7 3 N 1 2 3 C

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 1 2 1 1 1

1 DV DN5 _ L G P D1 D M / L P M

V DD .3 W N 3 _ P G D MD W P M

DDV E N5 P G_ D /M D E P M

1 DV DN5 P G_ P D1 D /A P P A

# # DD _ _ MMD UUN L L 1 1 G CCD

C U V P 4 1 2 /C

9 4 1 2 3 4 5 N C

6 7 8

9 10

1 4

C -N 1 V 2 -0 P M S V / 4 2 -N V 2 -0

1 2 3 4 5 A B V A B X X 4 MMMM 2 UUU T DD U D IN /A /A D /A /A

C U P 1 /C

R M1 2 S

1 2 3 4 5

-3 0 V 3 5 1 2 DD_ D 9 E 2 P NE P P G - 1 M1 A CDC

-3 0 V 3 5 1 _ 2 DDD 9 U 2 L NU L P G - 1 M1 A CDC

-3 0 3 V 1 5 2 _ 9 S DS 2 S NS P 1 MC G1 A / DC

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

M U R C A L DC S S _ _ V MMD .3 R R N 3 CCG 3 1 2 4 K V 4 0 R H S T

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

2

S 3 4 S 1 1 D H -P B V 4 4 C 1 2 F P B /M

C -N 1 V 2 -0 P ML S C / V 4 N - 2 V 2 -0 R M1 S

S S 1 C

C F P /M

C S V K 4 R 2 /R -H -P 1 2 B 1 1 2 1 B

2

D U L 1 C

e g d ir tr a c r e n o T

1 2 3 H 4 -0 R N H P

-6 R H P 0 5 654 N C

S K H -P 1 DV B 6 DN5 B _ P G 1 P / DD P P

321 V S D 4 CN 2 T G D

# K WD L V CL 4 DDCDC / _ 2 NN_ T G G M M WM N I P P /M /M C /M

D _ D MN R N G -K T P H P 2 1 -B 9 B

2 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 N C

2 -1 R H P

E F V 5 -0 R L A P / -E V 5 0 P A P

D E P 1 C

3 0 V 3 5 1 _ 2 1 D1 9 DN 2 P D P P GP M/ D P A

D S N CG T D

-2 S V 4 -1 R D H P

A / B X B X V A 4 MMMM 2 UUUU T DDDD N / /A /A A I A

ti n u d e e f r e p a P

S C T

-N V 1 2 2 -0

6 5 4

-4 R H P 1 5 N 2 3 C

it n u V D

-4 R H P

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

-S V 6 -0 -S V 4 -0 P A /P F V 4 -0 R L A P

ti n u y a rt r e p a p l a u n a M

R -9 R H P

L -B 4 R H P

-9 R H P

987 6 54

3 5 32 1 N C

1 D V L _ _ D MM 1 F F NS S -G K P P DS A -X 8 4 1 2 3 B 3 N 0 C B

5 3 N C

-S K H -P B S DV 9 S N5 _ B 1 G S /C D S 1 C

1234 DDV E N5 P G_ 1 DD E C P 1 C

DDV UN5 _ L 1 GD U C L 1 C

) T N U O CD _ N MGN V T ( D5 3 3 6 5 4 N C

-1 V 3 -0 P A X

-E K H -P B V T K D 4 DL N B .3 _ C 3 M_ G D RM CR C

T D UL O_ D MMN F F Z Z G S OOD K H P 3 2 1 -B 6 B

A R A _ DR NDN_ S V UGH 5 HDT K H P 2 3 1 2 3 4 -B N 4 C B

6 R H P

4 R H P

3 8 3 2 1 2 2 9 3 7 1 6 T D 5 UL 1 O D _ N 2 9 MMG 2 F F P Z Z D MOO A -3 8 2 1 2 3 2 9 7 1

2

C R R /

2

-2 R H P -7 8 2 2 9 7 1 1 2 3 4 5

2 1

V 4 2 T IN

DD _ N MG U L P 1 C

A B A B MMX X U U MM DDUU D /A /A D /A /A

M U D A

M U L 1 C

-7 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 1 2 9 V DCK F 2 4 NNL F 2 G CO / N O

C U P 1 C

C R R

-3 0 3 1 2 1 2 9 2 T P ND N MU G A OCD _ M T

6 7 WD CL /C W C

M M

-4 R H

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

M N T

M F S P


-S K - 1 2 3 4 H -P B 4 A DA S V 5 RN R + _ G_ D H T U H

3 D E L V 5

T N U O C M T

M F Z O

A R _ H /T A R _ D U H

P

E. Paper exit (1st, 2nd, R ight), ILSW , Finisher, CV section

7 1 R T X M

3 D O P

3 D F T

V 5 _ 3 3 - 3 D ND 0 DG 3 O O 1 P DP 2 9 2 P 1 2 3 M A

3 - 3 0 D 3 F 1 T 2 9 2 P 1 M A

2 S G O P

V 5 _ D3 N GD F DT 2 3

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

1 V 3 -0 P A X / F V 3 0 R R A X

-S 1 2 3 V 6 -0 P A P / F V 6 -0 R L A P

h c it w s k c lro e t In

V 3 D5 DN_ F G3 D T DF T

1 2 3

4 5 6

b 2 S G O /P

1 2 3 N V 1 2 0 R M S L / C C V 4 -N 2 V 2 -0 P M1 S

-S 1 2 3 V 3 -0

4 5 6

V 3 D5 DN_ 3 OGD P DO P

a 2 V S 4 G 2 O /P

P a b A 2 2 S P / V S GG F 4 V2 OO P 3 / /P -0 R L A 1 2 3 P

-S V 1 1 R H Z C 1 N 1 0 C 1 1 9

8 7 6

5 4 3

3 DV DN5 _ OG3 P DD O P

3 DV DN5 F G_ 3 T D D F T

V a b 4 2 2 2 S S GG OO P / P /

B W P U C P

V 5 _

1 D L _ M F U F

a b 1 1 S G S G ) ) CCV 4 OO (N (N 2 /P /P

8 - 7 - 6 A A A

5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 A A A A A

V 4 2 T NB A I M X M X M B M A ) _ CM S S S S S (N O /O /O /O /O 4 3 2 1 0 9 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 B B B B B B

V 4 2 T A B N I M _ A M B M X M X M OOOOO P /P /P /P /P

V 5 1 D1 _ DN D F GF T DT

-1 -B V -H K

W Z C 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 - B 8 B B B B B 2 B

8 - 7 - 6 B B B

-S V 4 1 R H Z C

R O D N E V IN O C O T

2

S P S P /

2

N -3 R H V

2 P H X

2 H 2 V N 1 2 3 P C 3 B V DV 4 N4 2 G2 T D IN

8 -E 3 N 1 2 A C H X L S -B CP 2 V S B 4 / 2 P

) C (N

1 2 1 -B K H T D Z E N -C B DG 1 _ D 1 A B 2 T U O P

# V _ D M F N UG F D

V 5 1 D _ 1 ND D OGO P DP 1 0 9 1 - -1 A A A

S DO O S P NP HGH S DS 4 3 2 3 1 4 - -1 -1 N A A A C

V 4 2 T IN

V 4 2

1 2 3

S P S P

C V V O 5 5 P 2 D _ 2 N 2 D2 _ _ D ND D D D WN OGOF GF S G P DP T DT DD 0987654321 3 1 N C

S 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z N C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91 1 1 1 1 1 1 D N -P V DY T T A Y 1 E 0 X N0 1 2 3 B 4 NP NRCP RL RE V E E E E 6 2 GOUA _ OOP OL 5 Z I Z I Z I Z I 1 V CL A L P OT S S S S B DC T OU _ S C _ _ _ _ C_ / L OS V V V V V _ V CC_ CD _ V C _ _ V _ V /C /C /C /C /C C V V C V / / C / C / / C / /C

T E D _ B 1 2 D T N -B U OG K P D H Z C B 0 1 B

123456789

-S V 0 1 R H Z C

S V 4 1 R H Z C

B W P U C1 P1 oN TC

in NN I I N I N I N I I F N I N F _ F _ F R _ _ F _ F F _ D _ CS NN S DR D T S S E R E V G -K x x D T R/ D / RT / R5 D H 6 -P 4 B N 9 C B ) ) .C .C (N (N

9 R H P

N V 2 -0 R1 2 M S

-3 3 2 1 8 2 2 9 7 1 1 D L _ M F U F 3 8 2 2 1 2 3 9 7 1

-3 6 5 V 1 _ D 2 9 M N 2 F G PU MF A

it n u y r e ilv e D

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1 -3 0 3 1 2 3 1 2 9 2 S DD P NP MO P GN A H V 5 S

S O P H S

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1 -3 0 3 1 2 3 1 2 9 2 1 DD P D E N MO A P GL V 5

1 D O P

M F T

F V 1 2 3 3 -0

R b R a 1 1 A S S X / V 4 GG 1 - 2 OO V P / P / 3 0 P A X 1 2 3

1 S G O P

-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 2 2 9 7 -6 1 6 5 1 2 ) B AB A 9 CV 4 / / 2 (N 2 P M 6 A 8 2 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 7 1

E F V 1 2 3 4 5 5 -0

R L V A4 A B A B P 2 MMMM / T OOOO I P P /P /P -E N V 5 -0 P A 1 2 3 4 5 P

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

M S O

D N -G F

-3 0 3 1 2 3 1 2 9 2 1 P D DN NV MF 5 A T G D

1 D F T

M O P

n i p 5 1 b u s D

3 8 2 2 9 7 1 -3 0 1 2 3 3 1 2 9 2 2 P O DN D 5 V M G_ 2 A P D D O P

2 D O P

3 8 2 2 9 7 1 -3 0 3 1 2 9 2 P M A

1 2 3 2 DN D_ V 5 F G2 T D D F T

2 D F T


2 8 2 2 9 7 1 -2 0 1 5 2 2 9 2 O C P _ W S D

2

D N G D

C O P W S D

r to a r a p e s b o J

8 1 R T X M

-3 1 2 3 4 S 5 1 Y C S A DV D T J / N4 R S C_ 3 _ N - G2 P P + N I IF 5 F / -1 C A J 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y D R S E .C .C .C .C .C S _ /R N N N N N N I F /

D MV C _ 5 + N I F

T E D DN _ G IN -F F /

0 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

r e h is n i F O T

-3 T 1 -2

A R S

F. DC power supply se ction, H igh volta ge se ction

B G 7 8 -1 T 1 -0 S P S

7 8 1 T 1 0 S P S

) te i h

) d e R ( 7 8 -1 S P

(W 7 8 -1 S P

1

N 2 R H V

1 V H HD -V P 2 B

B G V H M

-S -K H -P B 1 1 B

)r e w a r D V D o T (

V H D

V H T

V H M

V H T

MM WE P R V 4 S S 2 D B B T N V V IN G D D

M E R V H T

M E R V H T

M M E # ME R A WR V D P V V H C B H 4 D T G M2

) C N (

S B V D

V H

1 0 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P H 6 K C 1 1

P H 6 K C 1 1

B W P U C P

5 S 4 1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 -K C H -P / / / / / / / # V D V B 1 4 N MMMMMA MM4 1 2 E E E E D WE 2 T G W B R R R R R C P P _ -_ _ _ T _ _ IN D _ S V V V S S H V H H B B B H T V T D V D G M D

t 2 T u o D T N _ L N C _ M C _ MD _ F U N F Y F _ S G R O WL P D n n F H

t u o _ S R U D P _ N _ S L G L H D H -K H P 4 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B 4 1 0 N 1 C B ) ) ) C C C N ( N ( N ( 0 1 R H P # V _ M F S P

B W P

V 4 2 6 1 1 N C

D N G D

D V N 2 G 1 D

N V 5

V V .3 .3 3 3

D D N N G G D D

2

3 4

5

7 8

9 0 1

B W P C DN L L DN P GD 5V+ 5V+ GD F H M7N4 1 2 3 4 4-VP

O V 5 + -B H V P 6 0 1 B

r e h is in F O T

C

N 0 -1 R H V

C -N D V 2 N 2 V G 0 - 4 P 2 P M S 1 2

N 6 R

S V 3 1 P

H P

)C H V N ( 1 1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 C

)C A P N ( 2 1 1 2 3 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 C

2 W 1 2 D R -S T F _ _ N P K T T N _ U U G L H C O O D /H P C L L D B H H 7 B

1 2 2 D D D V V V 4 4 4 N N N B 2 2 2 -G -G -G H P P P V P 6 B

1 V V N N V V V D D DD D D K 2 2 V 3 . 3 . 3 . N N NN N N S 1 1 V 5 5 3 3 3 -G -G -G -G -G -G A + + + + + + P + D D D D D D -B 3 1 B

-7 R

B W P S P

4 1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C 1 T N C C D

S V 6 0 P )C N ( 3 1 N1 2 3 4 5 6 C

A P

-1 L L D D D K V V O N N N S 5 5 V 5 GG G A - - - -P D D D B 6 0 B


T N C N C S

D D 2 N N N V V V 4 2 -G V .3 -G 2 1 D 5 3 D

B

H V 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 -P N 6 C B

N 4 R H V

N 6 R H V

G. AC powe r supply section, Fusing se ction t

ti

d r a d n a t S : n a p a J

1 iun S ay -C rrt H ep Wpat

N nu Cr -S en H na W cS

n o it p O : r e th O

s 1

2 1 F V 2 H -0 R H -W L Wl /E e ta r V v i u 2 L e 0 N P L E 2 1

2 1 V 2 0 - ) ) P NN L AA E CC / S S V ( ( 2 -N -L -0 H H R W L W E

it

2 nu S ay -C rrt H ep W pad

it n u g n i s u F

n 2

2 1 F V 2 H -0 R H -W L Wl /E -e ta r V v i u 2 L e 0 N P L E 2 1

)i N ( 3 -M 5 2 . 1 D

2 1

2 1 F V 2 H -0 R H -W L Wl /E -e a r V v t 2 iL u e 0 N P L E 2 1

1 t a t s o m r e h T

2 1 F V 2 H -0 R H -W L Wl /E -e a r V v t 2 iL u e 0 N P L E 2 1

1 p m la r te a e H

)i (N 3 -M 5 2 . 1 D

2 t a t s o m r e h T

2 p m la r te a e H

)i (N

)i (N

) C N (

Brdad n WSnat iopt Pn: :Or Hpaa the WJ O

3 H N V C 1 2 3 3 P 2 H )C H B . W WN _ l_ ( e a v rt i L u e N

T N C 1 _ V -K H4 W2 S A P B 5 1 2 2 N 0 C B -S V 2 0 P A P

-S V 3 -0 P A P

B W P U C P

N -3 ) R C H (N V 4 H N 1 2 3 V C 3 P 2 H )C H B . W WN _ l_ ( e a v rt i L u e N H H W _ l W) a tr _ e C . u e K iv N L ( N B H V 1 1 2 3 3 P N 2 C B ) C K -B (N N -3 R H V

H W

) C N (

4 5 N 1 2 C ) V C 4 2 N _ ( H W

-R 7 H 8 -1 W S -e P v r i o L -7 4 7 0 1 2 7 1

H H -W ) -W e C . e iv N iv L ( L R H V 3 2 1 2 3 P N 2 C B ) C -R (N N -3 R H V

-1 K 3 S A P T B N 3 C 0 _ B H W /

B W P S P

) C N (

7 8 H1 W - -S e v i P L ro 1 4 7 1 0 2 7 1

n Wtio Sp r O : te er a ht e /O h rd y if ad id tan S m: u h nap ea DJ

K B N -3 R H V

4 B N 3 2 1 -H C -V 3 P H )C H 2 B W -l (N W e a iv tr L u e N

l a t ) ru e v i Ce ( N L N

V 3 -0 P L V

) ) ) CCC N ( N ( N (

) C N (

5 K N 1 2 3 -B C H -V I ) I 3 P C CC 2 -P (N l-P B e a rt iv L u e N

0 -E 1 N 1 2 3 -B C H -V t ) i 3 u Cn - P o - NR 2 R( e B e iv v L i L

L V 1 1 2 3 P 3 N 0 C B V 3 -0 P L V

-4 T 1 -5 A R S

D lra e N tu v i G e L F - N

s ie r e s V 0 0 1

1 2 3

V 2 1 -0 T P U L 1 P V / ET V VU 2 IL -O -0 L R H L V

V 3 2 -0 T P U L 2 P V / E C . T U V V 3 IL N -O -0 L R H L V

1 2

1 2 3

y l n o s rie e s V 0 0 2

V 2 -0 P L V L 6 N 1 2 -V C P 2 0 ) ) B (L (L RR EE T T AA EE HH

t u o lra t u e N

l a t ) ru e v i Ce ( N L N

L V 1 1 2 3 P 3 N 0 C B

rd o c C A

1 2

4 T 1 -5 A R S

rd o c C A

T E L N I

2 4 N C

s e ir e s V 0 0 2

t u o e v i L

n -i e v i L

2

1

) C N (

in lra t u e N

L -V 3 P 4 0 B

1

) ) L A E R IV 0 T 0 (L 5 U 5 T 2 2 - E - U N ( S S PT P O U W O S

1

) D ) E (R V IE R (L 0 5 IN 2 WS S P

W S


1

) D ) E L R A (R RT 0 5 U2 E N S ( P N I W S

W S C A

H -4

2 3 V 5 D_ ND GS DO P 2 1

-R N -3 R H V

7 D N 1 2 3 -R C H V 3 ) 2 1 t C t P u u 2 o (N o B L L lH lH a a tr tr u u e e N N

V 4 -0 P L V

1

b u s r o t is is m m r r e e h h T T

D DP D S N OG - N -3 P D V 5 0 3 1 2 9 2 P 1 2 3 M A

H -3 R N H /P 1 -H -P R -T D PS 3O 0P U /B C -P H3 -6 K C 3 0

) C (N

e tl c a e R

n i a m r to

3 M 5 2 . 1 D

3 M 5 2 . 1 D

) C N ( N 3 R H V

D S O P

6 3 N 7 6 5 C

B W P U C P

DDV S N5 OG_ D P DS O P

R N H P / -H -P R T P 4 0 U B / C P H -6 K C 4 0

1 2 3 4

MD S D UN U _ N _ HG HG T D T D

4 3 2 1

C P H -6 K C 7 0 S 4 3 21 -K H -P MD S D B N 7 UNU _ G_ G B H H T DT D

H. Tray 2, T ray 3, Tray 4 section

2nd paper tray unit (MX-M266FP/MX-M316FP/MX-M316G/MX-M266N/MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U  ) (MX-M265N/MX-M265U : Option(MX-CS12))

PCU PWB B28B-PUDSS-1(CN14) PUDP-28V-S P-GND 24V 5VN 24V NC (C2LUM) (PTRC2) (C2PUC) NC (C4LUM) (C4PUC) (Y2) (C3LUM) (Y3) (CASSELA) (PTRC1) (CASSELB) NC (CASSELC) (C3PUC) (CPFMA) (CPFMB) (CPFMXA) (CPFMXB) (Y1) OPCASSEL D-GND D-GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Option Cassete I/F PWB

B28B-PUDSS-1(CN5) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

P-GND 24V 5V 24V NC LUM2 TRCL2 PCL2 NC LUM4 PCL4 (Y2) LUM3 (Y3) CSSELA# TRCL3 CSSELB# NC CSSELC# PCL3 AI# BI# /AI# /BI# (Y1) OPCASSEL D-GND D-GND

B24B-PUDSS-1(CN9) P-GND 24V 5V 24V LUM4 NC (Y2) PCL4 (Y3) LUM3 10 TRCL3 11 CSSELA# 12 NC13 CSSELB# 14 PCL3 15 CSSELC# 16 BI# 17 AI# 18 /BI# 19 /AI# 20 OPCASSEL 21 D-GND 22 D-GND 23 D-GND 24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PUDP-28V-S B3B-PH-K-S(CN3) /PCL2 NC 24V

1 2 3

Tray 2 paper feed clutch

B3B-PH-K-K(BK)(CN2) /TRCL2 NC 24V

1 2 3

Tray 2 vertical transport clutch 5V

DF11-4DS-2C

B8B-PH-K-S(CN8) PHR-8 D-GND PPD2 5V PAP2 DRS2 LUD2 NC NC

1 2 3

5V PPD2 D-GND

Tray 2 transport detector

1 2 3

5V PAP2 D-GND

Tray 2 paper empty detector

1 2

DRS2 D-GND

Tray 2 door detection SW

1 2 3

5V LUD2 D-GND

Tray 2 upper limit detector

179228-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

179228-3 179228-2

179228-3 D-GND

DF11-6DS-2C

B3B-PH-K-E(BL)(CN7) CSS2 NC D-GND

1 2 3

PHR-3-BL

1 2

CSS2 D-GND

Tray 2 presence detection SW

2 1

LUM2D P-GND

Tray 2 lift motor

179228-2

B3B-PH-K-R(RD)(CN1) LUM2D NC P-GND

1 2 3

03CK-6H-P


02CK-6H-P

I.

USB, FAX, PCI, HDD section

N IO T P O 4 4 4 d - S )C l D+ 4 4 ie N D DU B N h G ( S D V 1 2 3 4 5 6 S V 6 -0 R H Z C

B S U R E W O P & L A N IG S A T A S

D D H

A

B-SB - 4 3 2 1 WU P l1edi 1DN D1+ D1 1SU r hS DG BV o t c e n n o 11 1 C dile DN + - SU -1 B hS GD 1D 1D BV KAS S -P U 1 2 3 4 5 5B0

D N -G F

N P N X X X T R R _ _ _ D D D D D D D D D H A D A A D V V V N H V V V N N V H T T T V V N N N 2 2 2 A N A A N 3 . .3 .3 G G G 5 5 5 G G G 1 1 1 S GS S G3 3 3 D D D + + + D D D + + +

2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) ) ) CC C N ( N ( N (

) ) ) C CC N ( N ( N (

) y l n o 4 1 D H (

B W P

-4 T 1 -2 A R S

U C P

B

) C N (

P X T _ D A T N A GS

-S V 5 0 P A P

V D D 5 N N V OV V V T G G 4 V .3 .3 .3 S IN D D 2 5 3 3 3 -K H 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P 4 B N 8 C B 8 R H P

D N -G F

) ) ) ) ) C C C CC (N (N N ( (N N (

B W P C P F M

-4 T 1 2 A R S

S V 5 1 R H G

] ) b 3 N u 4 5 4 3 2 1 0987654321 N 1 S 1 1 1 1 1 H C )( B F L S - 4 3 3 + - 3 1 1 + - 1 (T U 4 4 + 4 [ 3 1 4 3 1 S D D S D D S B D D L N D D U L N D D U L N D D U -T E B E B E B S I G I G I G V H V H V H D D H D S S S G B 5 1 M B

S V 3 0 P A P

-8 R H P

12345678

1 4 N C

1234567 V D DX 5 N NA T GGF N I -D -D _ V 4 2

1 X A F _ 0 V 5

X A F _ V 3 R 3

X A F _ V 3 R 3

-B 2 -S -K H X -P A B F 8 _ B V 3 R 3

3

2 2 N C D P N D N X X N T GT _ G D _ A A D T T A A S S

N X R _ A T A S

0 5 N C

5 -B B 8 2 -3 P D P X N 7 R G 0 _ T A D A T S A 6 S

N X _ A D F X F F _ T _ _ T _ V C D D D V 3 3 N X . . N N 3 3 C A G G+ + n F

P _ D X T _ D X A F

P _ D X T _ S C X A F

D N G D

D H V 5 +

K S A -P B D 3 0 N B G D

N N _ _ D D X X T _ R S _ C D D X N X A A F GF

P _ P _ D D X X R _ R _ S D D C X N X A A F GF

N _ D X R _ S C X A F

S T S S T T R _ R C f)f _ _ S o D D P C A ( _ D X D X P X _ V N A N A V A V 5 F F L F 5 + Gn G n F n +

S T C _ S F F _ C _ D X V V V N A .3 4 .3 D F 3 2 3 N G n + + + GP

) N S )( L ( K R S C 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 -B 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 N 3 C B f)f o ( _ V 5 +

X A F _ S E R n

X ) An Fo d it np 2O o( T


J. RSPF (56opm) se ction

D E D 2 P E D S P N V S G5 +

3 8 2

2 D1 2 3 9 E P 7 1 S

) D 1 2 K P D D C V P N 5 P A + S G L (B 3 8 1 2 D 2 1 2 3 9 P 7 P 1 S

) D 5 2 K P D D C V P N 5 P A + S G L (B 3 8 2 2 D 2 1 2 3 9 P P 7 1 S

7 V 8 O 1 C T S 1 D 0 P V S 4 P 2 + S / 7 8 V 1 - O2 S P C S

-4 T 1 -2 A R S

W S V O C S

C R R S

S R P S

1

) D 3 2 K P D D C V P 5 P N A + S G L B ( -3 8 3 2 D 2 P 1 2 3 9 P 7 1 S

D D 2 C C D O ON S S GV 5 + -3 8 2 D 2 C1 2 3 9 O 7 1 S

) D 4 2 K P D D C V P 5 P N A + S G L B ( -3 8 4 2 D 2 P 1 2 3 9 P 7 1 S

) N O I T P (O

S P M T S

1 S L 1 2 P S D S L N D P G P S V 5

+ -3 8 1 2 2 S 3 1 2 9 L P 7 1 S

2 S

2 2 L P D S L S N P GS D P V 5 + -3 8 2 2 S 2 L 2 1 3 9 P 7 1 S

C S 2 C WD V P N A S G

S L R Y WB B G P S

-4 T 1 2 A R S

4 T 1 2 A R S -4 T 1 2 A R S

4 T 1 2 A R S

/ A M U P S

M U P S _ D P V 4 2 +

A B MM U U P P S S

M U P S _ D P V 4 2 +

/ B M U P S

/ A M F P S

M6 5 4 3 2 1 U P S



-6 R H P

R -6 R H P

M F P S _ D P V 4 2 +

A B MM F F P P S S

M F P S _ D P V 4 2 +

N V 2 -0 R M S / C -N V 2 0 P M S

1 2 S R / P S S R D P P V S 4 2 +

1 2

B V 2 -0 R M S / C B V 2 -0 P M S

1 2 C R R / S C D R P R V S 4 2 +

1 2

N V 6 -0 R M S / C -N V 6 0 P M S

-4 T 1 -2 A R S

1 2 3 4 5 6

4 T 1 -2 A R S

/ B M F P S

R E IV R D F P S R

2 -1 R H P

-6 R H P

/ M U A B A P M S MM U _D U U P P P P S 4V S S 2 +

-4 T 1 -2

A R S

-N V 3 0 R M S / C N V 3 -0 P M S

F 6 5 4 3 2 1 P S

R -6 R H P G N 1 2 3 4 C

-4 4 3 2 1 8 2 2 9 7 1 S P 4 / M U S T 2 P 4 P S 5 D N M D 2 T M 2 T P GS 9 S V 4 2 2 + 4 8 2 2 1 2 3 4 9 7 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 D D 3 2 D 2 C P D D C D O V P ON S 5 P N + S GS GV 5 +

4 T 1 -2 A R S

-4 T 1 -2 A R S

B W P

4 T 1 -2 A R S

4 T 1 2 A R S

-R 5 6 K H -P B M 6 U / P B B S _ M D U P P V 4 S 2 +

F S N 1 2 3 4 5 6 -K C H -P B M M 6 / F F / P A B P B B A S MM S M M F _D F F _D F P P P P P P V S 4 S S 4V S 2 +

B N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C

S 0 1 2 -K 9 1 1 1 H P B W2 V D S 1 O 1 5 E D D 2 2 C 2 V B D 2 P D D S D O E D P P D P D V P N D N C N P N S V P P S 5 5 P S GV 5 + S G + S G 4V G 4V 2 2 + + +

2 +

-8 R H P

E -S N 1 2 3 4 5 -K C H P B ) S 5 C F )/ R / P P . B S C S S C D F D R . P P P P N V S ( V S

C -S N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -K C H P B C D 8 R / B R 3 C D 2 D 2 S C P D D O R V P N C D D R ON S P 5 P V S + S G S G V 5 4 2 + +

4 2 (+

4 2 +

)/ D / C OB D V E OV 5 P (S 5 S C + + S . N K H I 4 3 2 1 P B N 4 C B 4 R H P

/ / 1 A / B / 1 D D 2 A A B B O S C C S A B C O 3 4 A B 2 2 V 2 1 D S P P P 2 D D D L M MMMMMMMO P D D 3 V R M R F WL L L E V D D D P 5 V P V F MF F R R R M N N .3 + E E S - - P 4 4 N N P F R R P P E R P T P P P F P P 5 -B P P P P P P P P P S S S S 2 2 GGS S S S S S GG+ S S S S S + S S S + + S S S S S S S D

A 4 3 8 7 6 5 2 1 3 4 N 3 3 C

9

-2 S V 0 -1 R D H P

-5 R H P

H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 -P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 3 B

1 S V 4 -3 R D H P

3 T 1 2 A R S

2 1 R H P

B W P T N C N C S

) C (N

) C (N

5 1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C

S 0 1 2 S 9 1 1 1 D H -P B 2 D D 1 D D V V V V B P OP D D B 3 3 N N . . 5 2 V V V V N N 1 5 4 5 4 GG G G3 3 2 2

3 T 1 2 A R S

1 S V 8 -2 R D H P

) C (N

) C (N

4 1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C

-B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 S D H P / / / / 1 1 2 A A 3 5 D D D 8 B B 1 S C C S _ _ _ O4 2 2 OA A B B O S P OD D D MMMMM D P E C B A B C L D M R R F M M W M M L L L P P F F F F P MP MR P P E E E E P F P P V P O P P P P P P F P P P P 5 S S S P T S S S S S S S S P S S S S S S S P S S S P S S S P S S S + S


0 -1 R H P B 0 S 9 1 S D H S P ) / P -B D D . 4 )2 2 2 U S M T 0 P P . D D D P P S 1 P D V V C MMD B N N N P 5 5 N T T P S G ( G G S S 4V (+ +

D N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C

2 +

S 0 K 9 1 H P B 1 2 0 S S L 1 2 2 2 L C S 2 . 1 S D D S P C WD C B P L L S V . S N P P N N _ P N _ V S GGS V A S G 5 5 + +

H N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C

1 2 3

C S 2 C WD V P N A S G

1 2 3

K. RSPF (31opm) section

) K 1 2 D D C P P D A V 5 P N L + S G B ( -3 8 2 2 9 1 7 D1 2 3 1 P - P 6 S

D D 2 E E D P P N S S G V 5 +

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

D E1 2 3 P S

) K C A L B ( -3 8 2 2 9 7 1 6

7 8 1 T 1 -0 S P S / 7 8 -1 S P

D 2 2 P D D V P N 5 P + S G

2 D P1 2 3 P S

4 T 1 -2 A R S

V O W C S S D V O P C V S 4 2 +

S R P S

C U P S

V O2 1 C S

S R R S

) K D 3 2 C P D D A V P N 5 P L + S G B ( -3 8 2 2 3 9 D 7 1 2 3 P 1 - P 6 S

) K C A L B ( -3 8 2 2 9 7 1 6

D D 2 C C D O O N S S G V 5 +

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

D C1 2 3 O S

D 4 2 P D D V P N 5 P + S G

4 D P 1 2 3 P S

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

1 S L 1 2 P S D S L N P G D S P V 5 +

1 S L 3 1 2 P S

-3 8 2 2 9 7 1

2 S L 2 2 P D S S N L P D G S P V 5 +

C S 2 C W D V P N A S G

2 S L 2 1 3 P S

S L R Y WB B G P S

4 T 1 -2 A R S

4 T 1 -2 A R S

-4 T 1 2 A R S

4 T 1 -2 A R S

B 1 2 -V 2 -0

R C U / M P S / S C U D P C P S B - V 4 V 2 2 + 0 P M 1 2 S

N 1 2 -V 2 -0

B 1 2 -V 2 -0

1 2

R P S C V B - 4 2 V + 2 0 P M 1 2 S

R M S / C N V 2 0 P M S

S R / P S S R D P P S V 4 2 +

R C R M R / S / S C D R

N 1 2 3 4 5 6 -V 6 -0

N 1 2 3 -V 3 -0

R D M 3 2 2 C S D D D D C D O / P V P N O N S 5 P G C + S G V S N 5 + V 6 0 P M 1 2 3 4 5 6 S

R M 2 S C S D / C W N V P C A S G N V 3 0 P M 1 2 3 S

-4 T 1 2 A R S 4 T 1 2 A R S

M M F F / P P / A S A B S B M M _ M M _ F D F F D F P P P P P P S S V S S V 4 4 2 2 + +

M F 6 5 4 3 2 1 P S

4 T 1 2 A R S

) C N (

-F S N C K - 1 2 3 4 5 6 H P

B W P R E IV

-E S N -K 1 2 3 4 5 C H -P B 5 B D C D S ) P F P R C V P V P N ( 4 4 2 /S 2 /S

D D D D D D D P D 4 V P P E D S P P N V N 2 P N V P N P G 4 G _ G V 5 S S G B 5 P 2 S W V 5 S D

S B A S A B _ M _ M M D M F P F F D F P V P P P P S / 4 S S V 4 /S 2 2

R D F P S R

) C N (

-B S N -K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 C 1 1 1 H -P B 2 1 D D B P 1 2 E D

B 6 M B tu M F tu tu F tu o P o o P o

/ 1 A / B / 1 T 1 2 A /A B B S C C S A B C U O M A M B O S P D D D D D D V V M M M M M M R R F W L L L O N N P P P P 5 .3 F F M M

-

3 4 D D D D D P P P N N

D 3 D C D D D D D C P R P N O P N C V R V O G S 4 P G S 2 S / 5 S V 5

D D B O C E V O P 5 V 5 S S

V V F F U U U U U P M R P P E E E L 3 P F P P V G G P P 4 4 G G T S S S S S S E P P P P P P P P P S S S S 2 2 S S 5 S S S S S S S S S S S S S D H P B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 0 1 2 3 4 -A 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 N 3 C B ) ) ) ) ) C C C C C (N (N (N (N (N

) C N (

-C S N -K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C H -P B 8 B

-S -K H P -I - 1 2 3 4 N B 4 C B

) ) C C (N (N

) C (N

L .5 3 T 1 -2 A A S

3 T 1 -2 A R S

) C (N

5 1 S NS 2 1 0 C D 71 81 9 1 H P B 2 1 B

) C (N

6 5 1 4 3 2 16

D D V O V B V V V V D D N N 4 V 4 V 2 5 .3 .3 N N 3 3 G G G G 2 5 2 5 1

) C ) C ) C ) C ) C (N (N (N (N (N

) C (N

) C (N

) C (N

4 1 S N S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 C D H P B 8 2 / B / 1 2 3 / / B 1 2 A A _ _ _ O 4 O S S C S S A O A A B B 1 O R P R D D M M M B C L D D ) D D D C W L B L L E P M P C P E P P F F M M M M M M M R R P O R P E E E S P F P (N V P P P F P F F P P P P M P T 5 S S S S S P S P P S S S S P S S S S S S S S S S P S S

S S

S

S

B W P L O R T N O C N A C S


) C N (

) C N (

) ) ) ) C C C C N ( (N (N (N

-D B N -S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 C S D H -P B 0 S 4 U P 1 D D ) D D D D P C B P P N N N N M V V ( P P G G G M T T 5 5 S

0 1

S P M T S D S /S P V 4 2

) C N (

-H S N -K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C 1 H -P B 0 1 1 2 )V B S 1 S .3 S 2 L ) L S D D S D C P L N N L P (3 W N N P S S C P _ G ( _ P G G S C S V S V V 5 5 A

MX-M316N

[13] OTHERS 1.

Service Manual

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HAND LING

A. HDD/SD car d m emo ry map (1)

HDD parti tio n

Option HDD installed HDD size = 160GB (Actual size 149GB)

Outer tracks

offset (GB) 0

0

1

2

345

67

8

9

[I-1] 14GB

10 20

[I-2] 72GB

30 40 50 60 70 [I-3] 1GB Not used

80 90

[S-1] 2.5GB

100

[S-5] 16GB

[S-2] [S-3] 2GB Not used 0.5GB

[S-6] 4GB

110 120

[S-7] 2GB Not used

[S-8] 16GB Not used

130 Inner tracks

140

[I-4] 1GB [L-1] 1GB

[S-4] 2GB Not used

[S-9] 6GB [S-10] 8GB

[L-2] 1GB

[GB]

(2)

HDD data cont ents

Option HDD installed No.

File system

Stored data

I-1

Imagedata

Imagedata(ERDH/Temporarystorage)

I-2

Imagedata

Imagedata(Documentfiling)

I-3 I-4

Image data Image data

NOTE 1000documents,3000images 3000documents,20000images

Not available FAX/Internet Fax receive images

Not used

L-1

Not available

System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data (sender's information, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)

S-1

Universal

S-2

Universal

Downloadfont User macro Database system file System log System setting data (Backup) Documentfiling (Database) Job log (Database) Job completion list

S-3

Universal

Not available

Not used

S-4 S-5

Universal Universal

Not available Spoolareaforprinter

Not used

S-6

Universal

Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)

S-7 S-8

Universal Universal

Not available Not available

S-9

Universal

Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))

S-10

Universal

L-2

Universal

e-manual Watermark Not available

Not used Not used

Not used

MX-M316N OTHERS 13 – 1

[GB]

(3)

SD card p arti tio n

Option HDD installed SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

0

[L-101] 500MB

[S-101] 500MB

1

[S-102] 500MB

[S-105] 100MB

700

800

900

[MB]

900

[MB]

[S-103] 924MB

[I-101] 1GB

2 3 [GB]

Option HDD uninstalled SD card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.2GB)

0

100

0

[L-101] 500MB

1

[S-103] 924MB

2

[S-104] 200MB

200

300

400

500

600

[S-101] 200MB

[I-101] 500MB

700

800

[S-105] 100MB

[S-102] 200MB

[I-102] 500MB

3 4 5

[I-103] 4GB

6 7 [GB]

(4)

SD card da ta cont ents

Option HDD installed No.

File system

Stored data

L-101

Not available

ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Boot animation Boot (CN Update mode) ARM9 firmware lang.sfu (language data) graph.sfu (Animation data)

S-101

Universal

font web help spdl Option FontROM

S-102

Universal

Same as above (Mirror)

S-105

Universal

Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

S-103

Universal

Key operator setting storage data IMS job management data FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty) FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese) Firmware update data (differential between new and old) Account management information

I-101

Image data

FAX/Internet Fax receive i mages (for backup) (HDD 1 -4 a rea d ata backup)


NOTE

Option HDD uninstalled No.

File system

Stored data

NOTE

L-101

Not available

ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Boot animation Boot (CN Update mode) ARM9 firmware lang.sfu (language data) graph.sfu (Animation data)

S-101

Universal

font web help spdl Option FontROM

S-102

Universal

S-101 area data backup (mirror)

S-105 S-103

Universal Universal

Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) Key operator setting storage data IMS job management data FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty) FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese) Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS) Account management information/User authentication da ta System log

S-104 I-101

Universal Image data

S-105 area data backup (mirror) FAX/Internet Fax receive images

I-102

Imagedata

FAX/InternetFaxreceiveimages(Backup)

I-103

Imagedata

ERDHwork


Notusedwhenanoption HDD is installed.

2.

Necessa ry st eps when replacing the P WB, HDD and the SD Card

A. MFP su bs tr ate r epl acem ent pr oc edu re (w or k f lo w) CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1) 1)

Attach the flash ROM, th e memory, the EEPROM, th e SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service p arts MFP PWB and inst all it to the main unit.

CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work. 2)

When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.

3)

Set as follows after restarting the main unit. At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1. (1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).

CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.

B. Proce dures nece ssary for HDD repla ceme nt Note for HDD replaceme nt • Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD. • If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up. • The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD. Contents of this chapter • HDD storage data and backup • Replacement procedures when HDD sto rage data can be backed up • Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD • Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD • Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.

(1)

HDD storag e data and b ack up

Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data cannot. If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD. a. HDD stora ge da ta list

No.

Datakind

Before installation (When shipp ing from the factory) Available

Aft er instal lati on (After use by users)

e-Manual

2

Addressbook

3

Image send series Notavailable registration data (Sender’s information, meta data, etc.)

Available

4

User authentication Account management

Notavailable

5

Japanese FEP dictionary (Learning)

6

Chinese FEP dictionary (Learning)

7

JOBLOG

8

JOBcompletionlist

Notavailable

Available

*1

Enable

Disable

Notavailable

Disable

Notavailable

Available

Disable

Notavailable

Disable

Reinstall operator

Sim49-3

Service

Enable

Sim56-2/ Device cloning / Storage backup

Service

Enable


Enable


Service

Available

Enable

Sim56-2

Enable

Sim56-2

Service

Notavailable

Available

Disable

Notavailable

Disable

—

Notavailable

Available

Disable

Notavailable

Disable

—

Available

Enable

Data reinstall procedures


Notavailable

Available

Disable

Enable/ Disable of data reinstall

Backup means

1

Notavailable

Available

Enable/ Disable of data backup

Enable

Performwith WEB PAGE.

Disable

— —

9

NewN/A(FSS)information

10

Userfont(Added)

Notavailable

Available

Disable

Notavailable

Enable

11

Usermacro

Notavailable

Available

Disable

Notavailable

Enable

12

Documentfiling

Notavailable

Available

Enable


Enable


13

Some of system setting data

Notavailable

Available

Enable

Enable

14

Watermark

Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup *2

Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup Sim49-5

15

FAXreceptiondata

Available Notavailable

Available Available

Disable Enable

Sim66-62

Enable Disable

*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory. *2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.


— Performwith WEB PAGE. Performwith WEB PAGE.

—

Service or User

Service Service —

(2)

Replacem ent procedure s when HDD data can be backed up

a. Work conte nts a nd proce dure s

Procedures

Step 1

Step 2

When a new HDD (blank HDD, service part) is used, or when a HDD which is normal but a program error occurs in it is used.

When a used HDD (used in the same model) is used *

Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (Servicing) Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB memory.) (Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data)) Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or servicing) Back up the data to PC with Web page. (Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14 (Document filing data, JOB LOG data)) When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given to the user.)

Step 4

Replace the HDD.

Step 5

Boot the complex machine.  Formatting is automatically performed.

Step 7

Step 8

Replacem ent procedure s when the HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown

a. Disp lay whe n HDD br eakdown

Step 3

Step6

(3)

When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is popped up. In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must be replaced. b. Work conte nts an d proced ure s

Procedures

Step 1

Step2

Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format automatically formatted, there the HDD. is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM. Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)

Step 9

Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.

Step 10

The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.

Step 11

Import the data backed up in Step 1. Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to import. (Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data))

Step 12

Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step 2. Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use macro (The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be imported.)

Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine.  Formatting is automatically performed.

When a used HDD (used in the same model) is used * Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine. The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. -> Cancel with SIM16.

Step 3

Since a blank HDD is automatically formatted, there is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM.

Step 4

Step 5

When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given to the user.) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)

Step 6

Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.

Step 7

The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.

Boot the complex machine. The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. -> Cancel with SIM16.

When a new HDD (blank HDD, service part) is used, or when a HDD which is normal but a program error occurs in it is us ed.

Use Sim62-1 to format the HDD.

With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory shipping.


(4) 1)

Reinsta ll and update pr oced ures of the HD D stora ge Operation Manual data

(5) 1)

Obtain the Operation Manual data.

Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web site (Tech-DS home page).

Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on the web site (Tech-DS home page).

Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.

Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.

NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.

To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files al so are copied. NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.

Watermark data re insta ll and update pr ocedu res Obtain the watermark data.

• The file size is different. • The time stamp is different. • The file exists only in the USB memory. 2)

• The file size is dif ferent. • The time stamp is different.

Enter the SIM49-5 mode.

 

 

CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be generated. 2)







     

• The file exists only in the USB memory.

 

 

Enter the SIM49-3 mode.    





      

 





 

3)

Insert the USB memory into the machine. • When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.

4) 

3)

• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1. 4)

The current version and the update version are displayed.



Insert the USB memory into the machine.

Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)

Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to the watermark data install menu.)

5)

Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are changed from gray-out to active display.

6)

When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data are installed. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

The current version and the update version are displayed. 5)

Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are changed from gray-out to active display.

6)

When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual is installed. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.


C. Proce dures nece ssary for SD card repla ceme nt (1)

SD card da ta and ba cku p

Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some data cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some data cannot. If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card. The SD card includes the following data. SD card backup Option HDD installed Partition number L-101

S-101

Enable/Disable of data backup Disable

Stored data ICU firmware data

ICU firmware (Boot/Main) lang.sfu graph.sfu Boot animation Boot (CN) ARM9 firmware

ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install)

font web help

Enable Enable

Disable

Enable

Option FontROM

Disable

S-102

ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror)

Same as above

S-105

System data


S-103

Userdata

Enable

Disable

SIM56-2

Enable

Key operator custom setting data (Data changed from the default)

Enable

FEP learning data (Japanese/ Chinese)

Disable

Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)

Disable

Account management information/ User authentication data

Enable

Home screen customize data

FAX reception data

Enble

Disable

Systemsettingdata

Enable/Disable of data reinstall Enable

Disable Disable

spdl

I-101

Backup means

FAX/Internet Fax reception image data

1)

Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.

2)

When the operation panel home screen has been customized, backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.

3)

When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot be restored to the machine.)

4)

Replace the SD card with a new one.

5)


6)

Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)

7)

Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).

sim56-02 Systemsettingdata backup device cloning

Enable

Enable Enable

Data reinstall procedures SIM49-1 (BOOT cannot be installed again.)

SIM49-1 SIM49-1 SIM49-1 SIM49-1 SIM49-1 SIM56-2

SIM56-2 Systemsetting data backup device cloning

Disable Disable sim56-02

Enable

Systemsetting data backup device cloning

Enable

SIM66-62

8)

Enable Enable

SIM56-2 Systemsetting data backup device cloning

Disable

Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the device cloning function.

CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD card supplied as a service part. The firmwa re required for booting must be included in the SD card used in this machine. The commercially available SD cards have no suc h data. NOTE: MEMO: When U2-40 error occurs, if the err or cannot be canceled by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in the SD card. CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be generated.


SD card backup Option HDD uninstalled Partition number

Enable/Disable of data backup

Stored data

L-101

ICU firmware data

ICU firmware (Boot/Main) lang.sfu graph.sfu Boot animation Boot (CN) ARM9 firmware

S-101

ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install)

font

Enable/Disable of d ata reinsta ll

Backup means

Disable

web help spdl

Enable

Disable

Enable

SIM49-1

Enable Enable

SIM49-1 SIM49-1

Disable

ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror)

Same as above

S-105

System data


S-103

Userdata

Enable

Disable

Systemsettingdata

Disable

Enable

Enable SIM56-2

sim56-02

Enable

Enable

Key operator custom setting data (Data changed from the default)

Enable

FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)

Disable

Disable

FEP learning data (Japanese/ Chinese)

Disable

Disable

Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)

Disable

Account management information/ User authentication data

Enable

Home screen customize data

SIM49-1 (BOOT cannot be installed again.)

Disable Disable

Option FontROM S-102

Data reinstall procedures

Enable

Systemsettingdata backup device cloning

Enable

Systemsetting data backup device cloning

Enable

I-101

FAX reception data

FAX/Internet Fax reception image data

Enable

SIM66-62

Disable

I-102

FAX reception data

FAX/Internet Fax reception image data (Backup)

Enable

SIM66-62

Disable

3)

When the operation panel home screen has been customized, backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.

4)

When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot be restored to the machine.)

5)

Replace the SD card with a new one.

6)


7)

Use SIM66-10 to clear the i mage send memory.

8)

Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).

9)

Restore the address book data backed up in the procedure 2). By using the storage backup function.

SIM56-2

Systemsettingdata backup storage backup

Enable

When the address book has been registered, use the storage backup function to backup the address book data.



System setting data backup storage backup

Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.

SIM56-2

Enable

Enable

2)

SIM56-2

Disable sim56-02

Address Data

1)

SIM49-1 SIM49-1

CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD card supplied as a service part. The firmwa re required for booting must be included in the SD card used in this machine. The commercially available SD cards have no suc h data. NOTE: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in the SD card. CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be generated.

10) Restore the data backed up in procedure 3) by using the device cloning function.


3.

HDD/SD card SI M forma t opera tion

The relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows: *1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.) *2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.) *3: Nothing is done. SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear

SIM62-8 Hard di sk fo rmat (Excludi ng th e system area)

HDD

HDD

Partition number I-1

Partition number I-1

Partition ERDHwork+Temporarystorage

I-2

Documentfiling data(Standard +User)

I-4 L-1

FAX/InternetFaxreceptiondata System storage data

*3

Partition ERDHwork+Temporarystorage

*3

I-2


*2 *3

I-4 L-1


S-1

User data 1

S-1

User data 1

S-10 S-2

Pre-install data (e-manual/Watermark) Application#1(Joblogdata)

*3

S-3

Redialinformation oftheaddressbook

*3

S-5

Printer spooler

S-5 S-6

Printer spooler Application work

*3 *3

S-6 S-9

Application work DSK data save

S-9

DSK data save

*3

*3

*3

S-10 S-2

*1 *1 *1 *3 *1


*1

*3

*1 *1 *1

SD Card

SD Card Partition number I-101

Partition number

Partition FAX/InternetFaxreceptiondata

*2

Partition

I-101 L-101

FAX/InternetFaxreceptiondata ICU firmware

L-101

ICU firmware

*3

S-101

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Pre-install)

S-101 S-102

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Pre-install) ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror)

*3 *3

S-102 S-103

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror) User data 2

S-103

User data 2

S-105

S-105

System data (System setting/ SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)


*3 *3

*1 *3 *3 *3 *1 *3

SIM62-10 Job compl ete list (Job log d ata) delete

SIM62-1 Hard dis k f ormat

HDD

HDD Partition number

Partition number I-1 I-2

Partition ERDHwork+Temporarystorage Documentfiling data(Standard +User)

I-4

FAX/InternetFaxreceptiondata

L-1 S-1

System storage data User data 1

I-1 I-2 I-4

*1 *1 *1 *1 *1

S-10

Pre-install data (e-manual/Watermark)

S-2

Application#1(Joblogdata)

S-5

Printer spooler

S-6 S-9

Application work DSK data save

L-1 S-1 S-10

*3

Partition ERDHwork+Temporarystorage Documentfiling data(Standard +User) FAX/InternetFaxreceptiondata System storage data

*3

User data 1 Pre-install data (e-manual/Watermark)

S-2

Application#1(Joblogdata)

S-5

Printer spooler

*1

S-6

Application work

*1

S-9

DSK data save

*1

*1

*3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *2 *3 *2 *3

SD Card

SD Card Partition number

Partition number

Partition

Partition

I-101


*3

L-101 S-101

ICU firmware ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Pre-install)

*3 *3

L-101 S-101

ICU firmware ICUfirmware fixeddata(Pre-install)

*3 *3

S-102

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror)

*3

S-102

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror)

*3

S-105


S-103 S-105

S-103

User data 2

User data 2 *3 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

I-101


*3 *1 *1


*3

SIM62-11 Document fili ng data delete HDD Partition number

Partition

I-1

ERDHwork+Temporarystorage

I-2


I-4 L-1


S-1

User data 1

S-10 S-2


S-5

Printer spooler

S-6

Application work

S-9

DSK data save

*2 *2 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *2 *3 *3


Partition

I-101


L-101

ICU firmware

S-101 S-102

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Pre-install) ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror)

S-103

User data 2

S-105


*3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3

SIM62-13 Hard d isk format (Manual area onl y) HDD Partition number

Partition

I-1

ERDHwork+Temporarystorage

I-2


I-4


L-1 S-1

System storage data User data 1

S-10

Pre-install data (e-manual/Watermark)

S-2 S-5

Application#1(Joblogdata) Printer spooler

S-6

Application work

S-9

DSK data save

*3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *2 *3 *3 *3 *3


Partition

I-101


L-101

ICU firmware

S-101

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Pre-install)

S-102 S-103

ICUfirmwarefixeddata(Mirror) User data 2

S-105


*3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3


4.

SERVICE WEB PAGE

A. Gener al The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the s erviceman. Menu/Item

Function and content

Password Setting

Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.

Output of Test Page

Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).

Font/Form Download

Used to download Font/Form. Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only) Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same setting to two or more machines efficiently.

Device Cloning

Filing Data Backup

Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.

User Control User Control 2

Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management. Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman. (Select among preset items.)

Job Log

Save Job Log View Job Log

Update of Firmware Syslog*1

Used to save the Job Log. Used to display the Job Log. Used to update the firmware version.

Administration Settings

Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings

Keep all the items selected.

Save/ Delete Syslog

Used to save or delete the log data.

View Syslog

Used to display the log data.

*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.


5.

Details an d ope ration proce dure s

A. Pro ced ur es t o en ter th e Hid den Web page exclusively us ed for the serviceman 1)

Boot a browser program.

2)

Enter the specified URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the servicing page menu.

C. Output of Test Page

MX-XXXX

Default password: "service"

MX-XXXX

1)

Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed. When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button. The list is printed out.

D. Font/ For m Downloa d

NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password Setting menu.

MX-XXXX

If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to reset the password to the default.

B. Password Setting

MX-XXXX

(1) 1)

Download of Font, Form , and M acro Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list. (Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)

2)

Click "Refer" button to select a target file.

3)

Click "Download" button.

4)

Click "Submit" (registration) button. The file is downloaded to the HDD. The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the HDD are displayed.

(2)

Delete of down loa ded font

Procedures to delete a file separate ly * The password can be optionally changed in the following procedures. 1)

Enter a new password.

2) 3)

Enter the new password again to make confirmation. Click "Submit" (registration) button.

1)

Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files, and click "Delete" button.

2)

Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press Yes key.

3)

Click "Submit" (registration) button. The file in the HDD is deleted.

(3)

Procedures to de lete all the files a t a time

1)

Click "Initialize" button.

2)

Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press OK key.

3)

Click "Submit" (registration) button.

NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files can be set to write protect. MX-M316N OTHERS 13 – 12

E. Device Cloning

G. User Control 1

M X-XXXX

MX-XXXX

1)

Enter the password to log in. Default Password: admin The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

(1)

Export

1)

Select an item to be backed up.

2)

Click "Execute" button.

H. User Control 2

Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File name: *****.bin) MX-XXXX

When the password is set, the set password must be entered when importing.

(2)

Import

1)

Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up file. (File name: *****.bin)

2)

Click "Execute" button to execute import. If the password is set when exporting, the password must be entered.

3)

Reboot the machine.

F. Fil ing D ata Bac kup 1)

Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be set in advance.)

MX-XXXX

(Example of use) The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this mode for servicing work.

I. (1)

(1) 1)

Job Log Save Job Log

MX-XXXX

Export Select the folder to be backed up. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.

2)

Click "Execute" button. Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File name: *****.bin)

3)

(2)

Click "Update" button.

Import

1)

Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)

2)

Click "Execute" button. The target file is imported.

3)

Click "Update" button.

1)

Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job Log to save it.


(2)

View Job Lo g

MX-XXXX

1)

Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting, all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items which are not to be displayed.)

2)

Click "Show" (display) button. The Jog Log is displayed.

J. Update of F irmw are

MX-XXXX

1)

Click "Refer" button to select a f irmware file.

2)

After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button. The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the firmware is processed.

During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now processing..." is displayed.


(3)

K. Sys lo g

Save/ Delete Syslo g

There are following functions in the Syslog mode. This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to troubleshoot when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshooting, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC. Syslog

Administration Set tings

MX-XXXX

Log Type Setting (Set to t he de fault.)

Storage/Send Settings

Set all the items selected.

Save/ Delete Syslog

Log data save, delete

ViewSyslog

Log data display

M X-XXXX

When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save position and save it. When deleting, click "Delete" button. Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and press OK key.

(4)

View Sys lo g

MX-XXXX

(1)

Administra tion S ettings / Log Type Setting

Set to the default.

M X-XXXX

1)

Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2)

Click "S how" button. The Syslog is displayed.

L. FSS (Field Support Syste m) Setting (2)

Stora ge/Send Setting s

1)

Set the following items. • Use Proxy Server: Yes/No

Keep all the items selected.

• Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit • Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min • Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit • Status Notification: On/Off

M X-XXXX

2)

Click the Submit (Registration) button.

MX-XXXX


6.

TOOL L IST Name

SITchart Graytestchart Color image density sensor calibration jig Kynar powder Grease(HANARLFL-955R) Conductiongrease(FLOILGE-676) Grease(FLOILG-313S) Grease(JFE552) Stearic acid powder Grease(FLOILGP-501MR) Grease(MOLYKOTEX5-6020) Grease(MOLYKOTEBR-2Plus)

code Part

Note

UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1 UKOG-0162FCZZ UKOG-0318FCZZ UKOG-0123FCZZ

For transfer belt

UKOG-0299FCZZ UKOG-0012QSZZ UKOG-0307FCZZ

Othershaft

UKOG-0235FCZZ UKOG-0312FCZZ UKOG-0013QSZZ UKOG-0158FCZZ UKOG-0097FCZZ


OPC drum RSPFpaperfeedrollershaft

LEAD-FREE SOLDER The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder. Example:

Lead-Free

5mm

Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.)

a

Solder composition

Solder composition code

Sn-Ag-Cu

a

Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu

b

Sn-Zn-Bi

z

Sn-In-Ag-Bi Sn-Cu-Ni Sn-Ag-Sb

i n s

Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag

p

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended. (2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT solder is about 220°C, © which XXXX is about BYSHARP 40°C higherCORPORATION than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when ALLofRIGHTS RESERVED. completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. No partiron of this may bewith reproduced, Iftipdifferent-kind solder remains on the soldering tip, itpublication is melted together lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron after completion of soldering work. stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer. any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA) “BATTERY DISPOSAL” THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY (MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS. “TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES” CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE) QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET DE TRAITEMENT.

                                                 

  

 





  

                                                                                                                                               

SHARP CORPORATION Business Solutions CS Promot ion Center

First Edition : April 2015 Latest edition: June 2016

Service Sharp MX-M266N

Recommend Documents